05_ SPPA T2000 as 620, SIM and I-O Function Blocks

IRAN POWER
DEVELOPMENT
COMPANY
2nd 3000 MW POWER PLANT

Ardebil Ext GAS TURBINE POWER PLANT(2*GTG V94.2)
SPPA T2000 AS 620, SIM and I/O function blocks
IN-HOUSE REVISIONS DOCUMENT REVISIONS
D D
C C
B B
A A
June June June June June June

0 FI A.B 2010 A.V 2010 K.H 2010 0 FI A.B 2010 A.V 2010 K.H 2010
Rev. Description Pre. Date Chk. Date App. Date Rev. Description Pre. Date Chk. Date App. Date
OWNER'S DOC. NO.:

REV.: 0
TSM/AL-00/CL-I-29-TKY-404
‫ﻃﺮح ﻧﻴﺎم‬
FILE NO.: CONTRACT NO.:
MAPNA GROUP
(PUBLIC STOCK)
TSM/AL-00/CL-I-29-TKY-404
MAPNA GROUP DESIGN STAGE:
MAPNA Electrical&Control
Engineering&Manufacturing Co.
(MECO)
Page 1 of 719
Contents Reg.
Important Notes
Information
SIM Function Blocks

FB74 ANAAUF Analog Signal Conditioning
GA
FB75 ANAAUS Analog Signal Output
SIM--HWKAA 1
SPPA--T2000 FB73 ANAEIN Analog Signal Input
(TELEPERM XP) FB76
KA
ANATHERM Sensor Cond. Thermocoupl.
GT 2
FB77 ANAWID Sensor Cond Resist. Thermom.
AS 620 GW 3
Automation System FB70 BINAUF Binary Signal Conditioning
GB
SIM and I/O FB71 BINAUS Binary Signal Output
4
SIM--HWKBA
Function Blocks FB72 BINEIN Binary Signal Input
KB
DMZ10 DMZ10MS Event Acquisition 10 ms
Manual 10MSDMZ 5
FB159 KONREG Continuous Controller
CC
FB153 MOTOR Control Motor/Solenoid Valve
ESG--MO 6
FB163 MOTVENTR Control Motor/Solen. Valve
DCM--MO , configurable
FB165 REGELANR Servo--Drive Control
ESG--RA , configurable 7
FB155 REGELANT Servo--Drive Control
ESG--RA
FB156 REVAN Reversing Drive
ESG--REV 8
FB154 STELANT Actuator Control
ESG--SA
FB164 STELANTR Actuator Control
DCM--ACT , configurable 9
FB250 STUFSTEL Step Adjuster STUF
FB80 ZAEHL Counting Pulse Input ZAEHLSIM 10
I/O Function Blocks
FB82 ANAAUSD APT Analog Signal Output
SD--ANAU
FB81 ANAINPSD APT Analog Signal Input
SD--ANAEI 11
FB150 FLOATINP An. Signal Input Float.--Point
NA--GPEIN
FB151 MOTKOP Motor/Solenoid Valve Control
NA--MO 12
FB152 STAKOP Actuator Control
NA--SA
FB167 STAKOP_T Actuator Control
NA--SA_T 13
FC404 Binary Signal Input
Issue 8.1 FC405 Analog Signal Input Float.--Point 14
Page 2 of 719
This manual contains information relating to
-- the applications and
-- the technical data
of the SIM and I/O function blocks AS 620 B and AS 620 F.
Ordering data are contained in the catalog LT600.
Note:
SPPA--T2000 is the further development of TELEPERM XP.
Therefore in the following text the two system names are used synonymously.
SPPA is a registered trade mark of Siemens AG.

TELEPERM is a registered trade mark of Siemens AG.
SIMATIC is a registered trade mark of Siemens AG.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the
not permitted without express written authority. hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this
by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included
in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
Copyright ESiemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved Technical data subject to change.
Page 3 of 719
Notes on the SPPA--T2000
SPPA--T2000 is a further development of the TELEPERM XP process control system for power plants.
SPPA--T2000 comprises of the AS 620 automation system. It may include automation processors based on the
SIMATIC S7 (AP--S7) and on the SIMATIC S5 (AP).
This manual documents the SIM function blocks for SPPA--T2000; the name TELEPERM XP will primarily be
used throughout the individual descriptions and operating instructions.
Notes: In the AS 620 with AP--S7, only the SIM signal modules from the ET200M range of devices (SIM 3xx)
are used. The values for library number and memory requirements which are specified under the Technical Data
are irrelavant for the SIM function blocks in the automation processor AP--S7. The runtime for AP--S7 applica-
tions is shorter by about factor 5.
Coupling of the AG--F and APT systems to AS 620 is only possible if the AP based on SIMATIC S5 is used.
ES680 displays the SIM function blocks as block numbers (FB no.) in the I&C template. In the AP--S7, the func-
tion blocks are designed as functions (FC). The table below illustrates the correlation (FB no. <--> FC no.) and
shows the correspondence between the various function blocks and the AP variants.
AS 620
SIM Function Blocks Designation in the AP Designation in the AP--S7
Name (on the basis of SIMATIC S5) (on the basis of SIMATIC S7)
ANAAUF Analog Signal Conditioning FB74 FC330
GA
ANAAUS Analog Signal Output FB75 FC331
SIM--HWKAA
ANAEIN Analog Signal Input FB73 FC329
KA
ANATHERM Sensor Cond Thermocoupl. FB76 FC332
GT
ANAWID Sensor Cond Resist Therm. FB77 FC333
GW
BINAUF Binary Signal Conditioning FB70 FC326
GB
BINAUS Binary Signal Output FB71 FC327
SIM--HWKBA
BINEIN Binary Signal Input FB72 FC328
KB
BINEIN2 Binary Signal Input not used FC404
BININP2
DMZ10MS Event Acquisition 10 ms DMZ10 DMZ10
10MSDMZ
KONREG Continuous Controller FB159 FC415
CC
MOTOR Control Motor / Solen Valve FB153 not used
ESG--MO
MOTVENTR Control Motor / Solen Valve FB163 FC419
DCM--MO configurable
REGELANR Servo--Drive Control FB165 FC421
ESG--RA configurable
REVAN Reversing Drive FB156 FC412
ESG--REV
AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

0--3
e Siemens AG
Page 4 of 719
AS 620
REGELANT Servo--Drive Control FB155 not used
ESG--RA
STELANT Actuator Control FB154 not used
ESG--SA
STELANTR Actuator Control FB164 FC420
DCM--ACT configurable
STUFSTEL Step Adjuster FB250 FC506
STUF
ZAEHL Counting Pulse Input FB80 not used
ZAEHLSIM
I/O-- Function Blocks:
ANAAUSD Analog Signal Output FB82 FC338
SD.ANAU
ANAINPSD Analog Signal Input FB81 FC337
SD.ANAEI
FLOATINP An. Signal Input Floatpoint FB150 FC406
NA.GPEIN
FLOATINP2 An. Signal Input Floatpoint not used FC405
FLINP2
MOTKOP Motor / Solen Valve Control FB151 FC407
NA.MO
STAKOP Actuator Control FB152 FC408
NA.SA
STAKOP_T Actuator Control FB167 FC423
NA.SA_T

0--4
e Siemens AG
Page 5 of 719
Notes on the CE Symbol for SPPA--T2000 (TELEPERM XP)
EC Directive EMC The following applies to the TELEPERM XP products described in this
manual:
89/336/EEC Products which carry the CE symbol fulfil the requirements for the EC Direc-
tive 89/336/EEC.
The EC declaration of conformity and the documentation relating to this are

available to the authorities concerned, according to the above--mentioned EC
Directive, Article 10(1), from:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Power Generation
PG LDE
Siemensallee 84
76187 Karlsruhe
Products which do not have the CE symbol meet the requirements and stan-
dards given in the System Manuals under ”General Technical Data”.
Fields of For the TELEPERM XP System, the following field of application applies ac-
Application cording to this CE symbol:
Field of Application Requirement for

Emitted interference Noise immunity
Industry EN 61000--6--4: 2001 EN 61000--6--2: 2001
Observing the Setup The setup guidelines and notes on safety given in the System Manuals must
Guidelines be observed during startup and when operating the TELEPERM XP System.
Working on To protect the modules from the static electricity, the user must discharge his
Cabinets body’s electrostatic charge before opening cabinets.
The general ESD guidelines must be observed.
Radio interference All main components have been tested under defined conditions.
susceptibility It has been demostrated that radio equipment can be operated in the vicinity
of TELEPERM XP equipment in most cases without impairing the proper
operation of TELEPERM XP.
Operation is not permitted within a distance of up to one meter.
Mobile communication equipment with a transmitter power of less than 2.5W
in the 2m band (160MHz) is recommended.
There are no restrictions in the use of German D--net and E--net telephones
and of German C--net telephones with a transmitter power of less than 4W.

0--6
e Siemens AG
Page 6 of 719
Notes on the CE Symbol for SPPA--T2000 (TELEPERM XP)
Notes for A filter must be inserted in the power supply lines ( SIFI C, B84113--C--B30 or
retro--fitting of similar).
IM 318--8MB12 The maximum number of IM 318--8MB12 is 8 per cabinet.
Notes for The maximum number of APF racks is 3 per cabinet.

APF racks
Updated In addition to the specifications in the ”General Technical Data” of the System
Technical Data Manuals, the specifications on noise immunity and electromagnetic compati-
bility given below apply to modules carrying the CE symbol.
The specifications are valid for systems which are assembled according to
the above--mentioned setup guidelines.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Radio interference suppression to EN 55011
Limit value class A
Interference by conduction on DC supply lines to 2 kV
EN 61000--4--4 / IEC 61000--4--4 (Burst)
Interference by conduction on signal lines 2 kV
to EN 61000--4--4 / IEC 61000--4--4 (Burst)
Interference by conduction on process lines 2 kV
to EN 61000--4--4 / IEC 61000--4--4 (Burst)
Noise immunity to discharges of static electricity 4 kV contact discharge
to EN 61000--4--2 / IEC 61000--4--2 (ESD) 8 kV air discharge
Noise immunity to electromagnetic HF field 80 to 1000 MHz
amplitude modulated 1.4 to 2.0 GHz
to EN 61000--4--3 (up to now ENV 50140) / 10V/m
IEC 61000--4--3 80% AM (1kHz)
Noise immunity to electromagnetic HF field 900 MHz
pulse modulated to EN 61000--4--3 (up to now 10V/m
ENV 50204) 50 % c.d.f.
Noise immunity to high frequency (sinusoidal) 0.15 to 80 MHz
to EN 61000--4--6 (up to now ENV 50141) 10 V
80 % AM
Noise immunity to surge voltage to 1.2 / 50 µs
EN 61000--4--5 / IEC 61000--4--5
-- process lines ¦ 2 kV asymmetric
¦ 1 kV symmetric
-- power supply ¦ 0.5 kV asymmetric
(cabinet supply) ¦ 0.5 kV symmetric

0--7
e Siemens AG
Page 7 of 719
Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Siemensallee 84 Copyright E Siemens AG 2006
76187 Karlsruhe All Rights Reserved
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
Page 8 of 719
SPPA--T2000 (TELEPERM XP)
AS 620 Automation System
SIM Function Block
FB74 ANAAUF (Analog Signal Conditioning)
Software Description
GA
Page 9 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
Copyright Copyright E Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not

permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All
rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or
design, are reserved.
Disclaimer of liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and
software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot
guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly
and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for
improvement are welcomed. Technical data subject to change.
Safety--related-- This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own
guidelines personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These
notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as
follows according to the level of danger:
Warning
! Indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial damage to property can
result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
! Indicates that minor personal injury or damage to property can result if proper pre-
cautions are not taken.
. Note
Is important information on the product, the handling of the product or the respec-
tive part of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid.
Qualified Commissioning and operation of the product must only be carried out by qualified
person persons. Qualified persons in the sense of the safety information in this publication
are those who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag equipment,
systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed use Please observe the following:
Warning
! The product must only be used for the applications described in the catalog and
technical description and only in conjunction with external devices and components
recommended or approved of by Siemens.
Correct and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, installa-
tion, operation and maintenance.

1--2
e Siemens AG
Page 10 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--5
2 Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6

2.1 Analog Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
2.1.1 Software Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
2.1.2 Nominal Range and Overflow Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
2.1.3 Modification of Input Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
2.1.3.1 Multiplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
2.1.3.2 Square-rooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
2.1.4 Generation of Mean Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
2.2 Data with Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
2.2.1 Signal TTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
2.2.2 Fault TTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
2.3 Generation of Limit Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--9
2.3.1 Triggering Direction OG (Upper Limit max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--9
2.3.2 Triggering Direction UG (Lower Limit min.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--9
2.4 Analog Signal Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--10
2.5 Input Signal Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--10
2.5.1 Analog Input Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--10
2.5.2 Analog Signal Monitoring following Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--10
2.5.3 Input Signal Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--11
3 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--11
4 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--12
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--18
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--19

1--3
e Siemens AG
Page 11 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF

1--4
e Siemens AG
Page 12 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
1 Application
The processing of analog signals in the AS 620 B system (SIM version) is carried out using function blocks
(FBs) in conjunction with the ET 200 I/O device and the corresponding signal modules.
The function block FB74, analog signal conditioning for 0/4 to 20 mA, is used together with the signal modu-
les SIM 331 / SIM 464 to read and monitor analog signals.
The following preprocessing functions are present:
-- Monitoring for open circuit
-- Smoothing of analog signal
-- Simulation of input signals
-- Monitoring and limiting of analog signal
-- Modification of input signals
-- Generation of mean value
-- Generation of TTD with change in signal
-- Output of a substitution analog value in event of fault
-- Generation of limit signals
-- Signalling of signal faults.

1--5
e Siemens AG
Page 13 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
2 Mode of Operation
2.1 Analog Signal Processing
2.1.1 Software Smoothing
The software smoothing function can be used to additionally filter the digitized signals if required. The
function is a 1st order timer with a time range 0.1 to 10 s, parameterizable in steps of 0.1 s. Filtering can be
selected using the smoothing parameter (GL) (see Section 4).
2.1.2 Nominal Range and Overflow Range
Violations of the nominal range up to 10 % (overflow range) are processed further linearly.
If the signal is outside the overflow range, it is limited to +110 % or --10 % of the physical nominal range (see
Section 2.5 for effects on further internal processing).
Nominal range Overflow range

Input signal Range limits Input signal Range limits
0 to 20 mA 0 to 100 % --2.0 to 22.0 mA --10 to 110 %
4 to 20 mA 0 to 100 % 2.4 to 21.6 mA --10 to 110 %
2.1.3 Modification of Input Signal
Multiplication or square-rooting can be configured for each channel individually using the modification
parameter (MOD) (see Section 4).
2.1.3.1 Multiplication
The signals can be multiplied by a correction factor. This is necessary e.g. with flow measurements
according to the differential pressure method if variations in the density of the medium must be compensated
for the measurement.
The correction factor is calculated by the AP (standard FB) and transferred to the module with the PAA_E
process image. A square rooting of the transferred correction factor can be configured for flow
measurements with square--rooting transmitters and subsequent correction calculation.
2.1.3.2 Square-rooting
If analog signals are processed with a quadratic characteristic, e.g. when using a differential pressure
transmitter, the characteristic of the signal can be adapted by square-rooting. Square-rooting is only carried
out in the positive quadrants.
2.1.4 Generation of Mean Value
A mean value (MW) is generated following the modification and suppresses small oscillations in the resulting
signals. Generation of the mean value is only effective within a delta band of 20 digits.

1--6
e Siemens AG
Page 14 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
2.2 Data with Time
Data with time originate when a signal status changes. The various types of TTD are described briefly below.
The TTDs possible for the function block are shown in Fig. 1.
2.2.1 Signal TTDs
Analog input signals or signals generated on the module, e.g. limit signals, can be selected using appropriate
parameter settings.
With analog signals, acquisition is possible at selectable intervals or when a selected change in signal
occurs: sampling time (ABZE), delta band (DELT).
Acquisition of changes in signal with a time resolution of 1 ms is possible for limits which are required in the
process control level for message output and logging.
For small signal deviations within the parameterized delta band which are permanent in positive and negati-
ve direction an additional signal TTD is generated (sum delta method).
2.2.2 Fault TTDs
In addition to the TTDs assigned to a signal, there are also fault TTDs which describe the status of the
control system in detailed form for messages and logs using error numbers. The fault TTDs result from
events, i.e. faults detected by monitoring functions on the module, such as e.g. ”Faults in sensor supply,
channel 1”.
Signal TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation
Analog input signal AESIG
Limit signal 1 GS 1
Limit signal 2 GS 2
Limit signal 3 GS 3
Limit signal 4 GS 4
Channel simulated KSIM
Channel valid KG
Fault TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation
Downward violation of range limit EBU
Upward violation of range limit EBO
Open circuit in signal lines DML
Overflow of signal range USB
Signal simulated KSIM
Fig. 1: List of TTDs (data with time)

1--7
e Siemens AG
Page 15 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
2.3 Generation of Limit Signals
The limit signal generation function (GSB) can be used to parameterize whether limit signals are to be
generated, the triggering direction and the magnitude of the hysteresis between triggering and resetting of
the limit signal. Up to 4 limit signals can be generated.
2.3.1 Triggering Direction OG (Upper Limit max.)
- Triggering condition
Analog signal is ² parameterized limit.
- Reset condition
The message is reset if the analog value is smaller than the parameterized limit minus the set hys-
teresis.
- Effects on the process image

The limit signal is transferred to the process input image.
- Effects on data with time

A signal TTD ”Limit signal” is generated if the limit signal is parameterized as a signal TTD.
- Effects on further internal processing

In the event of a channel fault the limit signals, if parameterized, can be replaced by defined sub-
stitution limit signals.
2.3.2 Triggering Direction UG (Lower Limit min.)
Analog signal is ± parameterized limit.
- Reset condition
The message is reset if the analog value is larger than the parameterized limit minus the set hyster-
esis.

The limit signal is transferred to the process input image.

A signal TTD ”Limit signal” is generated if the limit signal is parameterized as a signal TTD.

In the event of a channel fault the limit signals, if parameterized, can be replaced by defined sub-
stitution limit signals.

1--8
e Siemens AG
Page 16 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
2.4 Analog Signal Simulation
An analog value can be simulated via the software independent of the current input signal. This simulated
value is processed further instead of the input variable. A signal TTD and a channel fault TTD ”Channel
simulated” are generated. The bit ”Channel simulated” is set in the process input image.
2.5 Input Signal Monitoring
2.5.1 Analog Input Range
The input range monitoring parameter (EU) can be used to separately define for downward and upward vio-
lation of the input range whether the monitoring function is to be active with delay, without a delay or not at
all. The delay can be varied between 0.25 and 60 s. The monitoring “Signal Line (Broken Wire)” is always
effective, independent of the EU parameterization.
The analog signal exceeds or falls below the nominal range by 10 %.
- Reset condition
Following elimination of the fault and return of the analog signal to the range --5 % . . . 105 % (hys-
teresis 5 %) the monitoring function is reset delayed by four times the software smoothing time or by
3 s whichever is larger.

The bit ”Channel valid” is reset.

A signal TTD ”Channel invalid” is generated provided at least one of the possible signal TTDs of the
channel is parameterized. A fault TTD ”Downward violation of range limit” or ”Upward violation of
range limit” is signalled in addition.

The signal is limited to --10 % or +110 % of the nominal range and processed further.
2.5.2 Analog Signal Monitoring following Modification
The permissible range of values for the signal following the modification is --65 % to +327 %. The
monitoring function is triggered if these values are violated.
- Reset condition
Following elimination of the fault, the monitoring function is reset delayed by four times the software
smoothing time or by 3 s whichever is the larger.

None

A fault TTD ”Overflow of signal range” is generated.

The signal is limited to the representable range of values and processed further.

1--9
e Siemens AG
Page 17 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
2.5.3 Input Signal Line
- Triggering condition (only with 4 ... 20 mA signal)

Open circuit of input signal lines with sensor signals in range 4 to 20 mA (on fall short of nominal
range > 15%).
- Reset condition
Following elimination of the fault, i.e. measured value > --10% of the nominal range (2.4 mA), the
monitoring function is reset delayed by four times the software smoothing time or by 3 s whichever
is the larger.


channel is parameterized. A fault TTD ”Open circuit in signal lines” is signalled in addition.

Depending on the parameter for the substitution analog signal (EAS), the conditioned input signal is
processed further unchanged (no substitution analog signal), or the last valid analog signal or the
value of the substitution analog signal (EASW) is processed further. Depending on the parameter
for the substitution limit signal (EGS), no substitution limit signal is generated, or a substitution limit
signal is generated with the value of the substitution limit signal (EASW).
3 Configuring
Fig. 2 shows the symbol of the function block ANAAUF similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring sy-
stem.
GA Symbol: Analog signal conditioning

TXP--specific module FB74
pic_id 2343
only for use in AP
Fig. 2: CSF symbol of function block ANAAUF

1--10
e Siemens AG
Page 18 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
4 Parameterization
The block parameters are generated by the ES configuring system. The parameters can be set using conve-
nient forms (see Fig. 3).
Fig. 3: Parameterization form of the function block FB74

1--11
e Siemens AG
Page 19 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
The following functions must be parameterized:
- Analog input range (AEB)
- Smoothing of input signals (GL)
- Input range monitoring (EU)
- Delay in input range monitoring (EUZE)
- Modification of input signals (MOD)
- Generation of limit signal (GSB)
- Limit (GW)
- Hysteresis of limit signal generator (HYS)
- Substitution analog signal (EAS)
- Substitution analog signal value (EASW)
- Substitution limit signal (EGS)
- Value of substitution limit signals (EGSW)
- Time--tagged data (TTD)
- Sampling time (ABZE)
- Delta (DELT)
- Physical lower range value (ANF)
- Physical upper range value (END)
- Alarm, warning, tolerance 1, 2, 3, 4 (AWT)
- Function area number (FUNR)
- Entity number (INST)
- Analog input range
Name: AEB
Function: Defines the input signal range
Range of values: 1, 2
Meaning: 0 = irrelevant
1 = input signal range 0 to 20 mA
2 = input signal range 4 to 20 mA
Basic setting: 2

1--12
e Siemens AG
Page 20 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
- Smoothing of input signals
Name: GL
Function: Defines the set time constant
Range of values: 0 to 100
Meaning: 0 = no smoothing
100 = 10 s
Basic setting: 0
- Input range monitoring
Name: EU
Function: Defines how the range monitoring functions (downward violation, upward
violation) are active
Meaning: downward = lower range limit upward = upper range limit
0 = downward not active, upward not active
1 = downward not active, upward active
2 = downward not active, upward active with delay
3 = downward active, upward not active
4 = downward active, upward active
5 = downward active, upward active with delay
6 = downward active with delay, upward not active
7 = downward active with delay, upward active
8 = downward active with delay, upward active with delay
Basic setting: 4
- Delay in input range monitoring
Name: EUZE
Function: Defines the delay time on triggering of the input range monitoring function
Range: 0.25 to 60 s
Basic setting: 1s
- Modification of input signals
Name: MOD
Function: Defines whether the input signals are processed mathematically, and how
Meaning: 0 = no modification
1 = square-rooting from 0 to 110 % (complete measuring range)
2 = square-rooting from 5 to 110 %, range 0 to 5 % = ”0”
3 = square-rooting from 10 to 110 %, range 0 to 10 % = ”0”
4 = Multiplication (with correction factor)
5 = Multiplication followed by square-rooting from 0 to 110 %
8 = Multiplication by square-rooted correction factor
Basic setting: 0

1--13
e Siemens AG
Page 21 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
- Generation of limit signal
Name: GSBn, OGUGn; n = 1 .. 4 (limit number)

Function: Defines whether the limit signals are to be generated and in which triggering
direction
Range of values: 0/1
Meaning: GSBn: ON/OFF
”0” = limit signal generation OFF
”1” = limit signal generation ON
OGUGn: triggering direction
”0” = lower limit UG
”1” = upper limit OG
Basic setting: 0
- Limit
Name: GWn; n = 1 bis 4

Function: Defines the set limit. Value is set as physical variable of the nominal range.
Range of values: --10 % to +110 % of the physical nominal range
Basic setting: --10 %
- Hysteresis of limit signal generator
Name: HYS
Function: Defines the range between triggering and resetting of the limit signal. Value is
set as physical variable of the nominal range.
Range of values: 0,1 & to 20 % of the physical nominal range
Basic setting: 0.5 %
- Substitution analog signal
Name: EAS
Function: Defines which signal is to be processed further with a channel fault.
Settings: -- Do not process substitution signal
-- Process last valid analog value
-- Process value from EASW
Basic setting: Do not process substitution signal

1--14
e Siemens AG
Page 22 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
- Substitution analog signal value

Name: EASW
Function: Defines the value of the substitution signal (only effective if EASW is to be
processed further, see parameter EAS). Value is set as physical variable of the
nominal range.
Range of values: --10 % to 110 % of the physical nominal range
Basic setting: 0
- Substitution limit signal

Name: EGSn
Function: Defines whether a substitution limit signal is to be generated with a channel fault
Meaning: 0 ° do not use substitution limit signal
1 ° do use substitution limit signal
Basic setting: 0
- Value of substitution limit signals

Name: EGSWn
Function: Defines the value of the limit signals with faults (only when the parameter EGS
for the limit is set to ”1”)
Meaning: 0 ° substitution limit signal = 0
1 ° substitution limit signal = 1
Basic setting: 0
- Time--tagged data
Name: TTD
Function: Defines whether time--tagged datas are to be generated
Meaning: 0 ° no TTD
1 ° TTD
Basic setting: 0
- Sampling time
Name: ABZE
Function: Defines the sampling steps for generation of the TTDs. A TTD is only generated
if a downward violation / upward violation of the delta value has occurred.
Basic setting: 1000 ° 1 s

1--15
e Siemens AG
Page 23 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
- Delta
Name: DELT
Function: A TTD is generated with a change in the signal ² delta. Value is set as physical
variable of the nominal range.
Range of values: 0 % to 100 % of the physical nominal range
Basic setting: 0%
- Physical lower range value

Name: ANF
Function: Describes the lower range value of the corresponding physical variable
Range of values: floating-point format
Meaning: Depends on range of values of the input signal
Basic setting: 0
- Physical upper range value
Name: END
Function: Describes the upper range value of the corresponding physical variable
Meaning: Depends on range of values of the input signal
Basic setting: 0
- Alarm, warning, tolerance 1, 2, 3, 4
Name: AWT 1, 2, 3, 4
Function: Defines whether the limits GW1, 2, 3, 4 are classified as alarm, warning or
tolerance messages
Parameter type: Half-byte
Range of values: S, A, W, T
Meaning: A = no AWT identification
A = alarm
W = warning
T = tolerance
Basic setting: S
- Function area number
Name: FUNR
Function: Describes the function area to which the analog value is assigned
Meaning: Identification characteristic for ES/OM
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Function: Number of entity within the function area FUNR
Basic setting: 0

1--16
e Siemens AG
Page 24 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB74

Block name: ANAAUF
Library number: E88530--B 8374--A-- ...
Version: __________________"
Average run time: Typ. 220 µs
Called blocks: FB133 (TTD generation)
Memory requirements:
-- Code 2684 bytes
-- Parameters (per call) 24 words
-- Historical values (per call) 13 words + 4 words header
Other conditions: The function block can only be used in the group control level
(AP) within the system environment for SIM/protection.

1--17
e Siemens AG
Page 25 of 719
FB74 ANAAUF
6 Abbreviations
AE Analog input
AESIG Analog input signal
EBU Downward violation of input range
EBO Upward violation of input range
FB Function block
DML Open-circuit signal
KG Channel valid
KSIM Identification of simulation
PAA Process output image
PAE Process input image
SIM Signal module
TTD Time--tagged data

1--18
e Siemens AG
Page 26 of 719
Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 27 of 719
SIM Function Block
FB75 ANAAUS (Analog Signal Output)
SIM--HWKAA
Page 28 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

1--2
e Siemens AG
Page 29 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--5
2 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--5
3 Function Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6

3.1 Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
3.1.1 Signal Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
3.2 Startup/Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
3.3 Fault Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
3.4 Special Features when Connecting Auxiliaries, AG--F or APT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--8
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--9
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--12
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--13

1--3
e Siemens AG
Page 30 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
1 Application
The output of analog signals in the AS 620 B system (SIM version) is carried out using function blocks (FBs)
in conjunction with the ET 200 I/O device and the corresponding signal module.
The function block FB75, analog signal output, is used together with the SIM 332/470 signal module to out-
put analog process signals. The output signal can be simulated via ES680.
The function block FB75 is also used to output analog signals which must be sent to coupled systems (such
as ancillary plants with SIMATIC S5 and systems with AG--F).
2 Design
The FB75 establishes the connection between the hardware (SIM) and the automation processor (AP) and is
used to output analog signals. The signals originate from data blocks. A function block call with its parameter
set is required for each channel of the hardware.
FB75
Startup
AASIG Conversion to OUTPUT SIGNAL
SIM module Output
representation processing
Simulation value
from
ES680 Simulation Simulation KSIM
Data flow
AASIG Physical value, analog signal

OUTPUT SIGNAL Output value for the SIM block
Fig. 1: Function diagram FB75

1--4
e Siemens AG
Page 31 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
3 Function Description
3.1 Normal Operation
The function block converts the internal analog signal from a physical value in floating-point format into the
corresponding fixed-point number for the module.
The FB75 maps the physical value AASIG with the lower range value LRV and the upper range value URV
for the range of values of the SIM module according to the following equation:
(AASIG -- LRV)
AUSGABEWERT = x 6C00H
(URV -- LRV)
where: AUSGABEWERT: Is entered into the process output image PAA

AASIG: Physical value to be output
LRV: Lower range value
URV: Upper range value
6C00H: 100 percent value of SIM 332
For example SIM332 with +/-- 20mA: Output values within --117% <= AUSGABEWERT <= +117% are
entered into the PAA.
Output value of
SIM module
117%
100%
50%
LRV URV Physical value

-- 50%
-- 100%
-- 117%
Fig. 2: Mapping of physical value for the SIM range of values, e.g. +/-- 20mA

1--5
e Siemens AG
Page 32 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
The parameter AAB (analog output range) is not used.

Output currents with analog output modules:
ET 200M (SIM 332)

Percent Units 332--5HD01 Percent Units 332--5HD01
¦ 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
117% 7EFFH Overrange: 23,52 mA 117% 7EFFH Overrange: 22.81 mA
100 % 6C00H 20 mA 100 % 6C00H 20 mA
75 % 5100H 15 mA 75 % 5100H 15 mA
0% 0H 0 mA 0% 0H 4 mA
--75 % AF00H --15 mA --25 % E500H 0 mA
--100 % 9400H --20 mA The output value will be
limited to 0 mA
--117 % 8100H Underrange: --23,52 mA
ET 200U (SIM 470)

Percent Units 470--8MB12 470--8MC12
+/--20 mA 4...20 mA
>= 125 % 5000H 25 mA 24 mA
100 % 4000H 20 mA 20 mA
50 % 2000H 10 mA 12 mA
0% 0H 0 mA 4 mA
--50 % -- 2000H --10 mA --4 mA
--100 % -- 4000H --20 mA --12 mA
<= --125 % -- 5000H --25 mA --16 mA
3.1.1 Signal Simulation
The analog output signal can be simulated via ES680 independent of the current input signal.
Simulation is activated via ES680
- Reset condition
Simulation is deactivated via ES680
- Effects on the output value

The output value is replaced by the simulation value.

A signal TTD ”Channel simulated” is generated. In addition, the output value is generated as a TTD.
3.2 Startup/Restart
The FB carries out a cold restart when requested by the AP; internal statuses are initialized in the process.

1--6
e Siemens AG
Page 33 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
No further block processing is carried out during a cold restart.

The block is processed in every further cycle.
3.3 Fault Response
The block does not possess channel-specific monitoring functions.

1--7
e Siemens AG
Page 34 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
3.4 Special Features when Connecting Auxiliaries, AG--F or APT
In this application, the 32-bit floating-point analog value is entered as a hardware-based fixed-point value into
the send mailbox for the coupled system.
Message interface send mailbox User interface

(SIM function block FB 75 ANAAUS)
PAAD
PAAW
14 0 analog value
V 2 ... 2
in floating-point format (32 Bit)
Fig. 3: Interfaces for analog signal output in fixed-point format, FB 75 ANAAUS
It is possible for the user to identify the floating-point value as invalid using a separate binary value.
Qualifiers in the form of a quality code are not provided at the interface of the SIM function block.

1--8
e Siemens AG
Page 35 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
4 Configuring
Fig. 4 shows the symbol of the function block ANAAUS similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring sy-
stem.
SIM---HWKAA Symbol: Coupling module for analog signals

Hardware output
TXP--specific module SIM
PIC---ID 2491
Fig. 4: CSF symbol of function block ANAAUS

1--9
e Siemens AG
Page 36 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
5 Parameterization
Fig. 5: Parameterization form FB75
The two types of parameters listed below are either managed by the ES (no assignment by the user) or can
be preset and changed by the user.
From the general parameters the following are managed by the ES:
Name: FUNR
Function: Describes the function area to which the FB163 is assigned
Basic setting: 0
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0
The following parameters can be configured by the user:
- Analog output range (AAB)
- Physical lower range value (LRV)
- Physical upper range value (URV)

1--10
e Siemens AG
Page 37 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
- Analog output range
Name: AAB
Function: Defines whether 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA signals are to be output
Meaning: 0 = irrelevant
1 = output 0 to 20 mA
2 = output 4 to 20 mA
Basic setting: 2
Name: LRV
Meaning: Depends on measured variable
Basic setting: 0
Name: URV
Basic setting: 0

1--11
e Siemens AG
Page 38 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB75
Block name: ANAAUS
Version: _________________↑
Called blocks: None
-- Code 300 bytes
-- Historical values (per call) None
Other conditions: The function block can only be used in the group control level (AP) within the
system environment for SIM/protection.

1--12
e Siemens AG
Page 39 of 719
FB75 ANAAUS
7 Abbreviations
AP Automation processor
CSF Control system flowchart
PIQ Process output image
SIM Signal module
TTD Data with time

1--13
e Siemens AG
Page 40 of 719
Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 41 of 719
SIM Function Block
FB73 ANAEIN (Analog Signal Input)
KA
Page 42 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

2--2
e Siemens AG
Page 43 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--5

2.1.3 Signal Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.2 Time--tagged Data (TTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.2.1 Signal TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.2.2 Fault TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--8
2.3 Signal Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
2.3.2 Input Signal Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
2.4 Special Features when Connecting Auxiliaries or AG--F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--11
3 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--19

2--3
e Siemens AG
Page 44 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN

2--4
e Siemens AG
Page 45 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
1 Application
The function block FB73, analog signal input for 20mA, 0/4 to 20mA, is used together with the signal
modules SIM 331 / SIM 464 to read in analog signals.
-- Monitoring for open-circuit
-- Signalling of signal faults
The function block FB73 is also used to read in analog signals which originate from coupled systems (such
as auxiliaries with SIMATIC S5 and systems with AG--F).

2--5
e Siemens AG
Page 46 of 719
2
e
Fig. 1:
Limiting
Siemens AG
---10% +110%
FB73 ANAEIN
D P D D
D
Generation of
Block functions
Analog signal Smoothing Standardization
mean value
(GL) (NORM)
(MW)
Input signal Analog Substitution

line input range analog signal
Mode of Operation
(AEB) P (AEB) (EAS)
Ü Ü
>1
TTD TTD TTD*
PAE_E
TTD Time---tagged data PAE_E Process input image of ELE P Parameter

Monitoring
TTD* Time---tagged data, configurable Diagnosis point
Ü
D
MW Generation of mean value, only
effective with small changes
2--6
Page 47 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
The software smoothing function can be used to additionally filter the measured values. The function is a 1st
order timer which can be set in steps of 0.1 s from 0.1 s to 10 s. Filtering can be selected individually for
each channel using the software smoothing parameter (GL).
If the signal is outside the overflow range, it is limited to +110 % or --10 % of the physical nominal range.
Nominal range: 0 to 100 % Overflow range: -- 10 to 110 %

Input signal Range limits Input signal Range limits
0 mA to 20 mA 0 to 100 % --2 mA to 22 mA --10 to 110 %
4 mA to 20 mA 0 to 100 % 2.4 mA to 21.6 mA --10 to 110 %
 20 mA  100 %  20 mA  110 %
2.1.3 Signal Limiting
If the input signal is outside the overflow range, the digitized measured value is limited to --10 % or 110 % of
the nominal range.
A mean value (MW) is generated following the modification and suppresses small oscillations in the analog
signal. Generation of the mean value is only effective within a delta band of 20 digits.
2.2 Time--tagged Data (TTD)

Time--tagged data are used for the chronological acquisition of process signals and I & C error messages for
message processing and display as well as for logging. They are generated by changes in status in all
control levels. The I & C error messages are generated independent of the module. They are generated by
each detected fault in order to facilitate troubleshooting for the maintenance personnel. The possible TTDs
for the function block are listed in Fig. 2.
The various types of TTD are described briefly below.
2.2.1 Signal TTD
Parameters can be set to select input signals if they are required as data with time (TTDs) in the process
control level for message output and logging. With analog signals, acquisition is possible at selectable
intervals or when a selected change in signal occurs (parameters: sampling period ABZE, delta band DELT).

2--7
e Siemens AG
Page 48 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
2.2.2 Fault TTD
In addition to the TTDs assigned to a signal, there are also fault TTDs which describe the status of the
control system in detailed form for messages and logs using error numbers. The fault TTDs are generated as
the results of events (faults) recognized by monitoring the analog output signal, such as e.g. triggering of the
range monitoring function.
Signal TTD
Comment Abbreviation

Channel valid KG
Fault TTD

Open-circuit in signal line DSL
Fig. 2: List TTDs (time--tagged data)

2--8
e Siemens AG
Page 49 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
2.3 Signal Monitoring
This is part of the monitoring function ”Analog input range AEB” (see Fig. 1).
The parameter for input range monitoring (EU) can be used to separately define for the downward violation
and upward violation of the input range whether the monitoring function is to be effective without a delay, with
a delay or not at all. The delay can be varied from 0 to 60 s (parameter: delay input range monitoring EUZE).
lation of the input range whether the monitoring function is to be active with delay, without a delay or not at
all. The delay can be varied between 0.25 and 60 s. The monitoring “Signal Line (Broken Wire)” is always
effective, independent of the EU parameterization.
The analog signal exceeds or falls below the nominal range by 10 %.
- Reset condition
teresis 5 %) the monitoring function is reset delayed by four times the software smoothing time or by
3 s whichever is larger.


channel is parameterized. A fault TTD ”Downward violation of range limit” or ”Upward violation of
range limit” is signalled in addition.

The signal is limited to --10 % or +110 % of the nominal range and processed further.
2.3.2 Input Signal Line
- Triggering condition (only with 4 ... 20 mA signal)

Open circuit of input signal lines with sensor signals in range 4 to 20 mA (on fall short of nominal
range > 15%).
- Reset condition
Following elimination of the fault, i.e. measured value > --10% of the nominal range (2.4 mA), the
monitoring function is reset delayed by four times the software smoothing time or by 3 s whichever
is the larger.


channel is parameterized. A fault TTD ”Open circuit in signal lines” is signalled in addition.

2--9
e Siemens AG
Page 50 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN

Depending on the parameter for the substitution analog signal (EAS), the conditioned input signal is
value of the substitution analog signal (EASW) is processed further.

2--10
e Siemens AG
Page 51 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
2.4 Special Features when Connecting Auxiliaries or AG--F
In this application, the SIM function block ANAEIN selects the analog value with a fixed-point format
parameterized via the ES 680 from the data block (in the receive mailbox) received from the coupled system.
The functions described in Sections 2.1 to 2.3 are applied to this analog value. The resulting analog value is
entered as a 32-bit floating-point number into the status word for further processing.
Message interface receive mailbox User interface

(SIM function block FB73 ANAEIN)
PAED 15 3 0
2 2 2
PAEW
11 0 Analog value
V 2 ... 2 X F Ü
in floating--point format (32 Bit)
K Additional
V: Sign
F: Failure G status word
X: Irrelevant bits 15 0
Ü: Overflow 2 KG: channel valid 2
Fig. 3: Interfaces for analog signal input in fixed-point format, FB73 ANAEIN
If the failure bit is set or the coupling fails the KG bit in the additional status word is reset.
The fixed-point format is hardware-oriented and can contain the additional qualifier F which signals a fault.
This means that the fixed-point format (15 bit + sign) processed in the coupled system must first be conver-
ted into the abbreviated, hardware-oriented fixed-point format with the nominal range (cf. following table) pri-
or to transmission to the AP.
Parameter AEB Measuring range Range of values Number representation in message interface
(analoger input (0 to 100 %) corresponding to Fig. 3 left
range)
V 211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
0 mA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFX
AEB = 1 to to
+20 mA +2048 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFX
+4 mA +512 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFX
AEB = 2 to to
+20 mA +2560 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFX
--20 mA --2048 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFX
AEB = 8 to to
+20 mA +2048 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XFX

2--11
e Siemens AG
Page 52 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
3 Configuring
Fig. 4 shows the symbol of the function block ANAEIN similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring system
for the acquisition of signals via SIM modules.
KA
Symbol: Coupling module for analog signals
TXP--specific module FB73; SIM
pic_id 2347
Fig. 4: CSF symbol of function block ANAEIN for the acquisition of signals via SIM modules
Fig. 5 shows the symbol of the function block ANAEIN similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring system
for the acquisition of signals via connecting auxiliaries or AG--F systems.
NA.ANAEI Symbol: Analog input (secondary system)

TXP---specific module FB73
PIC---ID 7101
only for use in AP
Fig. 5: CSF symbol of function block ANAEIN for the acqusition of signals via connecting auxiliaries or AG--F systems

2--12
e Siemens AG
Page 53 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
4 Parameterization
Depending on the CSF symbol as shown in Fig. 4 or Fig. 5 an adequate parameterization form KA or
NA.ANAEI is offered.
Fig. 6: Parameterization form FB73 for the acquisition of signals via SIM modules

2--13
e Siemens AG
Page 54 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
Fig. 7: Parameterization form FB73 for the acquisition of signals via connecting auxiliaries or AG--F systems
The parameterization form KA and NA.ANAEI have subordinated I & C forms (not shown here) which can be
opened by the keys LMASKE.KA and LMASKE NA.ANAEI respectively. From the I & C form NA.ANAEI
supplementary parameters are selectable for connecting auxiliaries or AG--F systems.

2--14
e Siemens AG
Page 55 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN

- Analog input range (AEB)
- Value of substitution analog signal (EASW)
- Scanning period (ABZE)
- Delta (DELT)
The following parameters are derived from the configured KKS sign in the ES 680:
For connecting auxiliaries or AG--F systems the following additional parameters have to be configured via
I & C forms:
- Word number in PAE (PAEW)
- AS number for connecting auxiliary (FREMD--CPU)

or AG--F system
- Analog input range

Name: AEB
Function: Defines the signal range
Range of values: 1, 2, 8
Meaning: 1 = 0 to 20 mA
2 = 4 to 20 mA
8 =  20 mA
Basic setting: 2

Name: GL
Range of values: 0.0 to 100 in steps of 0.1 s
Meaning: 0 = no smoothing 100 = 10 s
Basic setting: 0

Name: EAS

2--15
e Siemens AG
Page 56 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
Function: Defines the type of substitution signal with channel faults

Meaning: 0 = no substitution analog signal, the read analog signal is
processed further
1 = the last valid analog value is used as the substitution signal
2 = the substitution analog value defined under EASW is used
Basic setting: 0
- Value of substitution analog signal

Name: EASW
Function: Defines the value of the substitution signal (only effective with EAS = 2). Value is
Range of values: --10 % to +110 % of the physical nominal range with unipolar signals
--110 % to +110 % of the physical nominal range with bipolar signals
Basic setting: 0

Name: EU
Function: Defines how the range monitoring functions are active (downward, upward
violation)
Meaning: 0 = downward not active, upward not active
4 = downward active, upward active
8 = downward active with delay, upward active with delay
Basic setting: 4

Name: EUZE
Function: Defines the delay time on triggering of the input range monitoring function; is
active if ”Active with delay” is parameterized for EU
Range of values: 0 to 60.00 s
Basic setting: 1.00 s

2--16
e Siemens AG
Page 57 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
- Time--tagged data
Name: TTD
Function: Defines whether data with time are to be generated from the input signal
Meaning: 0 ° no TTD generated
1 ° generate TTD for analog input signal
Basic setting: 0
- Scanning period
Name: ABZE
Function: Defines the scanning times for generation of the TTD of the analog signal.
A TTD is only generated if a downward violation / upward violation of the delta
value has occurred.
Range of values: 0 to 60.00 s
- Delta
Name: DELT
Function: A signal TTD is generated with a change in the input signal ≥ delta. Value is set
as physical variable of the nominal range.
Basic setting: 5%
Name: LRV
Basic setting: 0
Name: URV
Basic setting: 0
Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0

2--17
e Siemens AG
Page 58 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB73

Block name: ANAEIN
Library number: E88530--B 8373--A--...
Version: ________________↑
Average run time: Typ. 175 ms
-- Code 1774 bytes

2--18
e Siemens AG
Page 59 of 719
FB73 ANAEIN
6 Abbreviations
AE Analog input
DSL Open-circuit monitoring for signal line
FB Function block
KG Channel valid
PII Process input image
SIM Signal module

2--19
e Siemens AG
Page 60 of 719
Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 61 of 719
SIM Function Block
FB76 ANATHERM (Sensor Conditioning for Thermocouples)
GT
Page 62 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

2--2
e Siemens AG
Page 63 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--5

2.1.2 Measuring Ranges and Linearization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.2 Time--tagged data (TTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.2.1 Signal TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--8
2.2.2 Fault TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--8
2.3.1 Triggering Direction UL (Upper Limit > max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
2.3.2 Triggering Direction LL (Lower Limit < min.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
2.4 Signal Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
2.5.2 Input Signal Line/Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--10
3 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--11
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--19

2--3
e Siemens AG
Page 64 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM

2--4
e Siemens AG
Page 65 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
1 Application
The FB76 function block, signal transmitter conditioning for thermocouples, is used to read in and monitor
thermocouple signals. The ET 200 M modules SIM 331 support the thermocouple types E, J, K and T, and
the ET 200 U module SIM 464 the thermocouple types J and K.
-- Monitoring for open-circuit
-- Adaptation of characteristic and correction of cold junction temperature

2--5
e Siemens AG
Page 66 of 719
2
e
Fig. 1:
Siemens AG
FB76 ANATHERM
D P D D
D D
Analog signal Generation of
Smoothing Standardization
mean value
Block functions FB76

(GL) (NORM)
(MW) P
Linearization
(LIN) Generation of
limit signal

(GSB)
Input signal Substitution
Mode of Operation
Analog
line input range analog signal
(AEB) P (AEB) (EAS) Substituteion
limit signal
(EGS)
P
P
Ü Ü
>1
DMZ DMZ DMZ DMZ* DMZ*
PAE_E PAE_E
PAE_E Process input image of ELE Parameter

P
DMZ Data with time Monitoring
Ü DMZ* Data with time, configurable D Diagnosis point
Ü
2--6
Page 67 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
The block processes signals from thermocouples of type E, J, K and T with ranges 0 °C to 1000 °C (type E),
0 °C to 800 °C (type J) , 0 °C to 1100 °C (type K) and 0 °C to 400 °C (type T). The measuring range can be
selected using the sensor type parameter (GEBER).
The software smoothing function can be used to additionally filter the measured values. The function is a 1st
order timer. Filtering can be selected using the smoothing parameter of the input signals (GL).
2.1.2 Measuring Ranges and Linearization
The measured signal is linearized according to the following table:
Measuring range Thermoelectric voltage Cold junction--

Thermocouple
0 to 100 % (absolute) temperature
Type E 0 °C to 1000 °C 0 mV to 76,358 mV 0 °C *)
Type J 0 °C to 800 °C 0 mV to 45,498 mV 0 °C *), 50 °C, 70 °C
Type K 0 °C to 1100 °C 0 mV to 45,108 mV 0 °C *), 50 °C, 70 °C
Type T 0 °C to 400 °C 0 mV to 20,869mV 0 °C *),
*) At the cold junction temperature 0 °C the function block does not carry out a linearization. In this case the
SIM module must be set ”with linearization” using thereby the built in temperature compensation of the
SIM module. Using the temperature compensation implies that all 4 channels of the SIM module must be
set ”with linearization”.
The measuring range (nominal range) can be exceeded or fallen below by 10%.
A mean value (MW) is generated following standardization and linearization and suppresses small oscilla-
tions in the analog signal. Generation of the mean-value is only effective within a delta band of 20 digits.
2.2 Time--tagged data (TTD)
message processing and display as well as for logging. They are generated by changes in status in all con-
trol levels. The I & C error messages are generated independent of the parameter settings of the module.
They are generated by each detected fault in order to facilitate troubleshooting for the maintenance person-
nel.
The TTDs possible for the function block are listed in Fig. 2.

2--7
e Siemens AG
Page 68 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
2.2.1 Signal TTD
Input signals or signals generated on the module, e.g. limit signals, can be selected using appropriate
parameter settings.
With analog signals, acquisition is possible at selectable intervals or when a selected change in signal
occurs: sampling period (ABZE), delta band (DELT).
Measurement of changes in signal is possible for limits which are required in the process control level for
message output and logging.
2.2.2 Fault TTD
In addition to the TTDs assigned to a signal, there are also fault TTDs which describe the status of the con-
trol system in detailed form for messages and logs using error numbers. The fault TTDs result from events,
i.e. faults detected by monitoring of the analog signal, such as e.g. ”Open-circuit in signal lines”.
Signal TTD

Limit signal 1 GS 1
Limit signal 2 GS 2
Limit signal 3 GS 3
Limit signal 4 GS 4
Channel valid KG
Fault TTD
Failure of cold junction temperature AVT

Open-circuit in signal lines DML
Overflow of signal range USB
Fig. 2: Time--tagged data (TTD)

2--8
e Siemens AG
Page 69 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM

The limit signal generation function can be used to parameterize whether limit signals are to be generated,
the triggering direction and the magnitude of the hysteresis between triggering and resetting of the limit
signal (see Section 4 and Fig. 4). Up to 4 limit signals can be generated (parameters: limit signal generation
GSB, limit LV, hysteresis of limit signal sensor HYS).
2.3.1 Triggering Direction UL (Upper Limit > max.)
Analog signal is > parameterized limit.

The limit signal is transferred to the process input image PAE_E.
- Effect on time--tagged data

A signal TTD “Limit signal n” is generated if parameterized (parameter: time--tagged data TTD).

In the event of a channel fault, the limit signals -- if parameterized (parameter: Substitution limit
signals EGS) -- can be replaced by defined substitution limit signals (parameter: Value of
substitution limit signal EGSWn).
- Reset condition
The message is reset if the analog value is smaller than the parameterized limit minus the set
hysteresis.
2.3.2 Triggering Direction LL (Lower Limit < min.)
Analog signal is < parameterized limit.

The limit signal is transferred to the process input image PAE_E.


In the event of a channel fault, the limit signals -- if parameterized (parameter: Substitution limit
signals EGS) -- can be replaced by defined substitution limit signals (parameter: Value of
substitution limit signal EGSWn).
- Reset condition
The message is reset if the analog value is larger than the parameterized limit plus the set
hysteresis.
2.4 Signal Simulation

Irrespective of the actual input signal an analog value can be simulated as definded by the software. This
simulated value is used instead of the input signal.

2--9
e Siemens AG
Page 70 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM

The bit ”Channel simulated” is set in the process input image PAE_E.
A fault TTD ”Channel simulated” is generated. In addition, a signal TTD ”Channel simulated” is gen-
erated if at least one of the possible signal TTDs of the channel is parameterized (parameter: time--
tagged data TTD).
The simulated signal is processed further like a real signal.

The individual monitoring functions are listed below with details on the trigger conditions and the effects
when triggered. The monitoring functions are part of the corresponding functions AEB which are shown in
Fig. 1.
The input range monitoring parameter (EU) can be used to separately define for downward and upward
violation of the input range whether the monitoring function is to be active with a delay, without a delay or not
at all. The delay can be varied between 0.0 s and 60 s (parameter: Delay input range monitoring EUZE).
- Triggering condition of monitoring function (only when parameterized)
The analog signal exceeds or falls below the nominal range by more than 10 %.
The bit “Channel valid” is reset.
A signal TTD ”Channel invalid” is generated provided at least one of the possible signal TTDs is
parameterized (parameter: time--tagged data TTD). A fault TTD “Downward violation of range limit”
or “Upward violation of range limit” is signalled in addition (see Fig. 2).
The analog signal is limited to --10 % (lower limit) or 110 % (upper limit) of the nominal range.
Depending on the parameter for the substitution analog signal (EAS), the analog signal is
value of the substitution analog signal (EASW) is processed further.
- Reset condition of monitoring function
teresis 5 %), the monitoring function is reset delayed by four times the software smoothing time or
by 3 s whichever is the larger.
2.5.2 Input Signal Line/Sensor
- Triggering condition of monitoring function (only when channel parameterized)

Open-circuit of input signal lines or sensor breakage.
The bit “Channel Valid” is reset.
- Effects on time--tagged data
channel is parameterized (parameter: time--tagged data TTD). A fault TTD “Open-circuit of input
signal line” is signalled in addition (see Fig. 2).

2--10
e Siemens AG
Page 71 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
- Effect on further internal processing

Depending on the parameter for the substitution analog signal (EAS), the analog signal is pro-
cessed further unchanged (no substitution analog signal), or the last valid analog signal or the value
of the substitution analog signal (EASW) is processed further.
3 Configuring
Fig. 3 shows the symbol of the function block ANATHERM similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring
system.
GT Symbol: THERMOELEMENT CONDITIONING

pic_id 2345
only for use in AP
Fig. 3: CSF symbol of function block ANATHERM

2--11
e Siemens AG
Page 72 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
4 Parameterization

2--12
e Siemens AG
Page 73 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
- Sensor type (GEBER)
- Generation of limit signal (GSB) , (ULLL)
- Limit (LV)
- Value of substitution limit signal (EGSW)
- Sampling period (ABZE)
- Delta (DELT)
- Sensor type
Name: GEBER
Function: Defines which type of sensor is connected and the cold junction temperature
Meaning: thermocouple type E, cold junction temp. 0 _C*)
thermocouple type J, cold junction temp. 0 _C*)
thermocouple type J, cold junction temp. 50 _C**)
thermocouple type J, cold junction temp. 70 _C**)
thermocouple type K, cold junction temp. 0 _C*)
thermocouple type K, cold junction temp. 50 _C**)
thermocouple type K, cold junction temp. 70 _C**)
thermocouple type T, cold junction temp. 0 _C*)
Basic setting: no sensor
*) Setting of SIM module: With linearization

**) Setting of SIM module: Without linearization
Note:
The setting ”with/without linearization” on the SIM module applies to all channels simultaneously.

2--13
e Siemens AG
Page 74 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
Name: GL
Function: Defines the time constant
Range of values: 0.0 s to 10.0 s
Basic setting: 0.0 s (no smoothing)
Name: EAS
Function: Defines the type of substitution signal with channel faults
Meaning: 0 = no substitution analog signal, the read analog signal is processed further
1 = the last valid analog value is used as the substitution signal
2 = the substitution analog value defined in the parameter EASW is used
Basic setting: 0
Name: EASW
Function: Defines the value of the substitution signal (only effective with EAS = 2). Value is
Basic setting: 0
Name: EU
Function: Defines how the range monitoring functions are active
Meaning: 0 = downward and upward active
4 = downward and upward active
8 = downward and upward active with delay
Basic setting: 4
Name: EUZE
active if “Delayed” is parameterized for EU

2--14
e Siemens AG
Page 75 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
Name: GSBn, ULLLn; n = 1 to 4 (limit number)

direction
Meaning: GSBn: OFF/ON
ULLLn: triggering direction
”0” = lower limit LL
”1” = upper limit UL
Basic setting: 0
- Limit
Name: LVn; n = 1 to 4
Function: Defines the limit. Value is set as physical variable of the nominal range.
Name: HYS
Function: Defines the hysteresis between triggering and resetting of the limit signal. Value
is set as physical variable of the nominal range.
Range of values: +0,1 % to +20 % of the physical nominal range
Basic setting: +0.5 %
Name: EGSn; n = 1 to 4
Function: Defines the response of limit signals with channel faults
Meaning: 0 = do not use limit signal, the limit signal generation uses the applied analog
or substitution signal
1 = use substitution signal as parameterized under EGSW
Basic setting: 0
- Value of substitution limit signal

Name: EGSWn; n = 1 to 4
Function: Defines the value of the limit signals with faults (only when the parameter EGS
for the limit is set to ”1”)
Meaning: 0 = substitution limit signal “0”
1 = substitution limit signal“1”
Basic setting: 0

2--15
e Siemens AG
Page 76 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
- Time--tagged data
Name: TTD
Function: Defines whether signal TTDs are generated
Meaning: 0 = no time--tagged data
1 = time--tagged data
Basic setting: 0
- Sampling period
Name: ABZE
Function: Defines the sampling steps for generation of the signal TTDs. A TTD is only
generated if a downward violation / upward violation of the delta value has
occurred.
- Delta
Name: DELT
Function: A signal TTD is generated with a change in the signal > delta. Value is set as
physical variable of the nominal range.
Range of values: 0 to +100 % of the physical nominal range
Basic setting: +5 %
Name: LRV
Basic setting: 0
Name: URV
Basic setting: 0

2--16
e Siemens AG
Page 77 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
Name: AWT 1, 2, 3, 4
Function: Defines whether the limits LV1, 2, 3, 4 are classified as alarm, warning or
tolerance messages
Meaning: S = no AWT identification
A = alarm
W = warning
T = tolerance
Basic setting: S
Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

2--17
e Siemens AG
Page 78 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB76

Block name: ANATHERM
Version: ________________ "
-- Code 2756 bytes

2--18
e Siemens AG
Page 79 of 719
FB76 ANATHERM
6 Abbreviations
AE Analog input
AVT Failure of cold junction temperature
DML Open--circuit signal
FB Function block
GS Limit signal
KG Channel valid
KSIM Channel simulated
SIM Signal module
USB Overflow of signal range

2--19
e Siemens AG
Page 80 of 719
Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 81 of 719
SIM Function Block
FB77 ANAWID (Sensor Conditioning for Resistance Thermometers)
RT
Page 82 of 719
FB77 ANAWID

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

3--2
e Siemens AG
Page 83 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5

2.1.3 Signal Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
2.2.1 Signal TTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
2.2.2 Fault TTDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
2.3.1 Generation of Limit Signals for Upper Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10
2.3.2 Generation of Limit Signals for Lower Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11
2.4 Signal Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--12
2.5 Compensation 3--wire--connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--13
2.6.1 Sensor and Sensor Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--14
2.6.3 Effects when Resetting a Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--15
3 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--16
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--23
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--24

3--3
e Siemens AG
Page 84 of 719
FB77 ANAWID

3--4
e Siemens AG
Page 85 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
1 Application
The function block FB77 is used together with the signal modules SIM 331 / SIM 464 to read and monitor
resistance thermometer (Pt100, Cu10) signals.

3--5
e Siemens AG
Page 86 of 719
2
e
Fig. 1:
Limitation
---10 %/+ 10 %
P
Siemens AG
D P D D
FB77 ANAWID
D D
Generation of
Smoothing Standardization
Analog signal mean value
(GL) (NORM)
Block functions
(MW) P
Generation of
limit signal
(GSB)
Analog Substitution
input range analog signal
P (EAS)

Input signal (AEB) Substitution
limit signal
Mode of Operation
line
(AEB) (EGS)
P
P
Ü Ü
>1
DMZ DMZ DMZ* DMZ*
PAE_E PAE_E
PAE_E Process input image of ELE Parameter

P
DMZ Data with time Monitoring
DMZ* Data with time, configurable D Diagnosis point
Ü
3--6
Page 87 of 719
FB77 ANAWID

The block processes signals from resistance thermometers (Pt100, Cu10). The sensor type and the measu-
ring range can be selected using the sensor type parameter (GEBER).
The software smoothing function can be used to additionally filter the digitized measured values. The
function is a 1st order timer with a time range from 0.1 s to 10 s, parameterizable in steps of 0.1 s. Filtering
can be selected individually for each channel using the smoothing parameter of the input signals (GL).

If the signal is outside the overflow range, it is limited to +110 % or --10 % of the physical nominal range.
Nominal range Overflow range

Sensor Temperature Range limits Temperature Range limits %
Resistance %
Pt 100 0 °C to 600 °C 0 to 100 --60 °C to 660 °C --10 to 110
standard 100 Ω to 313,59 Ω
Pt 100 --50 °C to 550 °C 0 to 100 --110 °C to 610 °C --10 to 110
standard 80,31 Ω to 279,39 Ω
Pt 100 --70 °C to 130 °C 0 to 100 --83 °C to 143 °C --10 to 110
climate 72,33 Ω to 149,82 Ω
Cu 10 --140 °C to 260 °C 0 to 100 --166 °C to 286 °C --10 to 110
standard
Cu 10 --50 °C to 150 °C 0 to 100 --65 °C to 165 °C --10 bis 110
climate
2.1.3 Signal Limiting
If the digitized input signal is outside the overflow range, it is limited to the overflow limits ( --10 % or
110 % of the nominal range).
A mean value is generated of the digitized input signal in order to suppress small oscillations in the signal
recorded by the module. Generation of the mean value is only effective within a delta band of 20 digits.

Time--tagged datas are used for the chronological acquisition of process signals and I & C error messages
for message processing and display as well as for logging. They are generated by changes in status in all
control levels. The I & C error messages are generated independent of the parameter settings of the module.
They are generated by each detected fault in order to facilitate troubleshooting for the maintenance
personnel.

3--7
e Siemens AG
Page 88 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
The possible TTDs are listed in Fig. 2.

2.2.1 Signal TTDs
Input signals or limit signals required in the process control level for messages and logging can be
parameterized to generate time--tagged data.
The generation of a TTD is possible for input signals at selectable intervals (parameter: Sampling period AB-
ZE) or when a selected change in signal occurs (parameter: Delta band DELT).
In the case of limit signals, the generation of a TTD can be parameterized for a change in signal.
2.2.2 Fault TTDs
In addition to the TTDs assigned to a signal, there are also fault TTDs which describe the cause of detected
faults in the control system for messages and logs in detailed form using error numbers. For example, an
open circuit in a signal line is signalled by the monitoring function which is automatically set when the sensor
type is parameterized. This function monitors the amplified input signal for faults in the resistance thermome-
ter and outputs the associated fault TTD “Sensor fault” (see Section 2.6, Input Signal Monitoring).

3--8
e Siemens AG
Page 89 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
Signal TTDs (generated by module logic)
Abbrevi-
Comment ation

Limit signal 1 GS 1
Limit signal 2 GS 2
Limit signal 3 GS 3
Limit signal 4 GS 4
Channel valid KG
Contents GS = 0 corresponds to limit signal = no limit signal triggered

Contents GS = 1 corresponds to limit signal = limit violated
Contents KSIM = 0 (bit KSIM = reset) corresponds to channel = not simulated
Contents KSIM = 1 (bit KSIM = set) corresponds to channel = simulated
Contents KG = 0 (bit KG = reset) corresponds to channel = not valid
Contents KG = 1 (bit KG = set) corresponds to channel = valid
Fault TTDs (generated by module logic)
Abbrevi-
Comment ation
Sensor fault GST

Fig. 2: List of TTDs (time--tagged data)

3--9
e Siemens AG
Page 90 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
The standardized input signals can be monitored by the limit signal generation function (GSB) for upward or
downward violation of defined limits. The following can be parameterized:
- Whether limit signals are to be generated (parameter: GSB)
- The desired limits (number < 4); these must lie within the overflow range of the respective
measuring range (see Section 2.1.2) (parameter: LV)
- The triggering direction in which the limit signals are to be generated (definition of limits as upper or
lower limits; parameter: GSB)
- The magnitude of the hysteresis (selectable in the range 0.1 % to 20 % of the nominal measuring
range) between triggering and resetting of the limit signals (parameter: HYS).
2.3.1 Generation of Limit Signals for Upper Limit
- Triggering condition of monitoring function

The input signal and the parameterized upper limit are equal, or the input signal is greater than the
parameterized upper limit.
- Effects on the process image PAE_E

The bit “Limit signal n” is set.


None

The input signal is smaller than the difference between the parameterized upper limit and the
parameterized hysteresis.

The bit “Limit signal n” is reset.


3--10
e Siemens AG
Page 91 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
2.3.2 Generation of Limit Signals for Lower Limit

The input signal and the parameterized lower limit are equal, or the input signal is smaller than the
parameterized lower limit.

The bit “Limit signal n” is set.


None

The input signal is greater than the sum of the parameterized lower limit and the parameterized
hysteresis.

The bit “Limit signal n” is reset.


3--11
e Siemens AG
Page 92 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
2.4 Signal Simulation
Irrespective of the actual input signal an analog value can be simulated as definded by the software. This
simulated value is used instead of the input signal.
- Effects on the process image PAE_E when simulating

The bit “Channel simulated” is set.

A fault TTD “Signal simulated” (fault TTD contents = even number) is generated. In addition, a
signal TTD “Channel simulated” is generated if at least one of the possible signal TTDs of the
channel is parameterized (parameter: time--tagged data TTD).

The simulated signal is processed further and monitored instead of the input signal. Messages
(effects on the process image, time--tagged data) are generated by the simulated input signal
according to the triggering and resetting of the monitoring functions.
- Effects on the process image PAE_E when switching off the simulation
The bit “Channel simulated” is reset.

A fault TTD “Signal simulated” (fault TTD contents = odd number) is generated. In addition, a signal
TTD “Channel simulated” is generated if at least one of the possible signal TTDs of the channel is
parameterized (parameter: time--tagged data TTD).

The input signal is processed further instead of the simulated signal.

3--12
e Siemens AG
Page 93 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
2.5 Compensation 3--wire--connection
Using the SIM 331modules --7KF02, --7KB02 and --7SF00 the Pt 100 -- connection is designed for a 4--wire--
configuration. However, if these modules are wired as a 3--wire--connection, the wire--resistance will cause
an additional measuring error .
Using the parameter COMP_VAL this measuring error can partly be compensated via the software. To
achieve this, the parameter COMP_VAL has to be set to the wire--resistance value Rwire in unit “Ohm”.
However, any change in the resistance of the wire caused by external influences, e.g. temperature, will re-
main.
SIM 331
Rwire
Ic+
Rwire
M+
Pt 100
M--
Rwire
Ic--
Fig. 3: SIM331, Pt 100--connection in a 3--wire--configuration
The module SIM 331--7PF01 provides a standard 3--wire connection. The compensation of the error is car-
ried out by the module itself.
Note: If this module uses 3--wire connection, the module must be jumpered at the Ic+ and M+ terminals.

3--13
e Siemens AG
Page 94 of 719
FB77 ANAWID

The individual monitoring functions are listed below with details on the trigger conditions and the effects
when triggered. The monitoring functions are part of the corresponding functions AEB which are shown in
Fig. 1. The monitoring functions evaluate the recorded signals as well as the simulated signals depending on
the settings of the module parameters.
2.6.1 Sensor and Sensor Lines

Open-circuit/short-circuit of sensor line or sensor breakage.


A signal TTD “Channel invalid” is generated provided at least one of the possible signal TTDs of the
channel is parameterized (parameter: time--tagged data TTD). A fault TTD “Sensor fault” (fault TTD
contents = even number) is generated in addition.

cessed further (no substitution analog signal), or the last valid analog signal is processed further, or
the value of the substitution analog signal (EASW) is processed further.
Depending on the parameter for the substitution limit signal (EGS), either no substitution limit signal
is generated, or a substitution limit signal is generated with the associated value (EGSW).

Following elimination of the fault, the monitoring function is reset delayed by four times the software
smoothing time or by 3 s whichever is the larger.
- See Section 2.6.3 for the effects when resetting the monitoring function.
lation of the overflow range limits of the parameterized measuring range whether the monitoring function is to
be active with a delay, without a delay or not at all.
The delay can be varied between 0.25 s and 60 s (parameter: Delay input range monitoring EUZE).
- Triggering condition of monitoring function (only when parameterized)
The analog signal exceeds or falls below the nominal range by more than 10%.


A signal TTD “Channel invalid” is generated provided at least one of the possible signal TTDs of the
channel is parameterized (parameter: time--tagged data TTD). A fault TTD “Downward violation of
range limit” or “Upward violation of range limit” (fault TTD contents = even number) is signalled in
addition.

3--14
e Siemens AG
Page 95 of 719
FB77 ANAWID

cessed further (no substitution analog signal), or the last valid analog signal is processed further, or
the value of the substitution analog signal (EASWn) is processed further.
Depending on the parameter for the substitution limit signal (EGS), either no substitution limit signal
is generated, or a substitution limit signal is generated with the associated value (EGSW).

teresis 5 %), the monitoring function is reset delayed by four times the software smoothing time or
by 3 s whichever is the larger.
2.6.3 Effects when Resetting a Monitoring Function


A signal TTD “Channel valid” is generated provided at least one of the possible signal TTDs of the
channel is parameterized (parameter: time--tagged data TTD). A fault TTD is signalled in addition
depending on the reset channel monitoring function (fault TTD contents = odd number).

The input signal or the simulated input signal is processed further according to the parameterization
instead of the substitution analog signal and substitution limit signal values defined by the parame-
ters EAS and EGS, and generates the limit signals as parameterized.

3--15
e Siemens AG
Page 96 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
3 Configuring
Fig. 4 shows the symbol of the function block ANAWID similar to the symbol in ES 680 configuring system.
GW Symbol: RESISTANCE THERMOMETER

CONDITIONING
TXP---specific modul FB77
PIC_ID 2346
only for use in AP
Fig. 4: CSF symbol of function block ANAWID

3--16
e Siemens AG
Page 97 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
4 Parameterization
The parameters of the block FB77 are generated by the ES configuring system. The parameters can be set
using convenient forms (see Fig. 5).

3--17
e Siemens AG
Page 98 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
- Sensor type (GEBER)
- Compensation 3--wire--connection (COMP_VAL)
- Generation of limit signal (GSB) , (ULLL)
- Limit (LV)
- Value of substitution limit signal (EGSW)
- Delta (DELT)
- Sensor type
Name: GEBER
Function: Defines which type of sensor is connected with which measuring range.
Meaning: 0 = no sensor/transmitter
1 = Pt 100 standard, measuring range 0 °C to 600 °C
2 = Pt 100 standard, measuring range --50 °C to 550 °C
3 = Pt 100 climate, measuring range --70 °C to 130 °C
4 = Cu 10 standard, measuring range --140 °C to 260 °C
5 = Cu 10 climate, measuring range --50 °C to 150 °C
Basic setting: 0

3--18
e Siemens AG
Page 99 of 719
FB77 ANAWID
- Compensation 3--wire--connection
Name: COMP_VAL
Function: Software--compensation of measuring error caused by 3--wire connection to
Pt100. The wire--resistance value Rwire in unit “Ohm” is set as the parameter va-
lue.
When using a 4--wire--connection or using a SIM 331--7PF01 module with sen-
sor type “Pt 100 , 3--wire” the basic setting must be 0 (zero).
Range of values: 0 to 10Ω

Basic setting: 0
Name: GL
Function: Defines the time constant
Range of values: 0 s to 10 s
Basic setting: 0 s (no smoothing)
Name: EAS
Function: Defines the type of substitution signal with channel faults.
Meaning: 0 = no substitution analog signal, the recorded input signal is processed
further
1 = the last valid input signal value is used as the substitution signal
2 = the value of the substitution analog signal is processed further
(see parameter EASW)
Basic setting: 0
Name: EASWn; n = channel number, 1 < n < 2

Function: Defines the value of the substitution signal (only effective with parameter
EASn = 2). Value is set as physical variable of the nominal range.
Basic setting: 0

Name: EU
Function: Defines how the monitoring function is active when an overflow limit is violated.

3--19
e Siemens AG
Page 100 of 719

FB77 ANAWID
Meaning With ”Downward violation of lower With ”Upward violation of upper

overflow limit” overflow limit”
0 = Not active Not active

1 = Not active Active
2 = Not active Active with delay
3 = Active Not active
4 = Active Active
5 = Active Active with delay
6 = Active with delay Not active
7 = Active with delay Active
8 = Active with delay Active with delay
Basic setting: 4

Name: EUZE
active if ”Delayed” is parameterized for EU.
Range of values: 0.0 s to 60 s
Basic setting: 1s

Name: GSBn, ULLLn; n = 1 to 4 (limit number)
direction
Meaning: GSBn: OFF/ON
ULLLn: triggering direction
”0” = lower limit LL
”1” = upper limit UL
Basic setting: 0
- Limit
Name: LVn; n = 1 to 4
Function: Defines the limit. Value is set as physical variable of the nominal range.

Name: HYS
Function: Defines the hysteresis between triggering and resetting of the limit signal. Value
is set as physical variable of the nominal range.
Range of values: 0,1 % to 20 % of the physical nominal range
Basic setting: 0.5 %

3--20
e Siemens AG
Page 101 of 719

FB77 ANAWID
Name: EGSn; n = 1 to 4
n = limit signal, 1 < n < 4
Function: Defines the response of limit signals with channel faults.
Meaning: 0 = do not use substitution limit signal
1 = use substitution limit signal as parameterized under EGSW
Basic setting: 0
- Value of substitution limit signals
Name: EGSWn; n = 1 to 4
Function: Defines the value of the limit signals with faults; only active when the limit signal
is to be used according to EGS.
Meaning: 0 = substitution limit signal “0”
1 = substitution limit signal “1”
Basic setting: 0
- Time--tagged data
Name: TTD
Function: Defines whether signal TTDs are generated with input signals or limit signals.
Meaning: 0 = no time--tagged data
1 = time--tagged data
Basic setting: 0
- Scanning time
Name: ABZE
Function: Defines the scanning steps with respect to the input signal for generation of a
signal TTD. A TTD is only generated if a downward violation / upward violation of
the delta value has occurred.
Range of values: 0.0 s to 60 s
Basic setting: 1s
- Delta
Name: DELT
Function: A signal TTD is generated with a change in the input signal > delta. Value is set
as physical variable of the nominal range.
Range of values: 0 % to +100 % of the physical nominal range
Basic setting: 5%

Name: LRV
Basic setting: 0

3--21
e Siemens AG
Page 102 of 719

FB77 ANAWID
Name: URV
Basic setting: 0

Name: AWT 1, 2, 3, 4
Function: Defines whether the limits LV1, 2, 3, 4 are classified as alarm, warning or
tolerance messages
A = alarm
W = warning
T = tolerance
Basic setting: S

Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

3--22
e Siemens AG
Page 103 of 719

FB77 ANAWID
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB77

Block name: ANAWID
Version: _________________↑
-- Code 2400 bytes
Other conditions: The function block can only be used in the group control level (AP)
within the system environment for SIM/protection.

3--23
e Siemens AG
Page 104 of 719

FB77 ANAWID
6 Abbreviations
AE Analog input
FB Function block
GS Limit signal
GST Sensor fault
KG Channel valid
SIM Signal module

3--24
e Siemens AG
Page 105 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 106 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB70 BINAUF (Binary Signal Conditioning)
BT
Page 107 of 719

FB70 BINAUF

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

4--2
e Siemens AG
Page 108 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
2 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--6

3.1.1 Signal TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--7
3.1.2 Signal Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--7
3.1.3 Monitoring of Chatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--8
3.2 Startup/Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--9
3.3 Fault Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10
3.3.1 Sensor Chatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10
3.3.2 Short-circuit to P of Sensor Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--11
3.3.3 Short-circuit to M of Sensor Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--12
3.3.4 General Inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--12
3.3.5 Hardware Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--12
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--13
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--17
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--17

4--3
e Siemens AG
Page 109 of 719

FB70 BINAUF

4--4
e Siemens AG
Page 110 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
1 Application
The processing of binary signals in the AS 620 B system (SIM version) is carried out using function blocks
The function block FB70, binary signal conditioning, is used together with the SIM 323 / SIM 482 and
SIM 321 / SIM 431 signal modules to:
-- Provide the supply voltage for 8 changeover contacts
-- Condition the sensor signals
-- Monitor the input signals
-- Simulate the logical sensor signals
-- Output signal faults and channel faults.

4--5
e Siemens AG
Page 111 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
2 Design
The FB70 establishes the connection between the SIM hardware and the automation processor (AP) and is
used to condition the binary input signals. The signals originate from data blocks and are sent to data blocks.
A function block call with its parameter set is required for each channel of the hardware.
PAESIG KONV
EINSIG BWVERZ 1
VERZ
EBS
BESIG
KENNSIM KSIM
WERTSIM KG
Ü
Ü Ü Chatter
²1
&
FEBT
&
TTD TTD TTD TTD
BESIG Binary value in ZUDB KG Channel valid

BWVERZ Delayed binary value KONV Contact voltage
TTD Time--tagged data KSIM Identification of simulation in ZUDB
EBS Substitution binary signal PAESIG Binary signal from PAED
EINSIG Input signal for signal delay Ü Monitoring
FEBT Fault bit VERZ Signal delay
KENNSIM Identification of simulation WERTSIM Simulation value

4--6
e Siemens AG
Page 112 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
In normal operation, the FB fetches the input signals from the PAED, conditions them and and writes them
into the status data block. The signals are then available there for the AP.
-- In the case of changeover contacts, a binary signal is generated from respective pairs of signals from
the contacts and processed further. The NO signal (even SIM input terminal) is decisive for the binary
signal. The second, NC signal, is only used for monitoring purposes.
-- Changes in input signal start the delay time and can be delayed by 0 to 10 s using the parameter
VERZ set to a multiple of the sampling time. The binary signal present at the end of the parameterized
time is processed further.
-- The binary signal is subsequently entered into the ZUDB (in the case of changeover contacts, the NC
contact is the inverted NO signal).
-- If a change in signal is to be output, time--tagged data (TTDs) can be generated if parameterized
accordingly.
-- The KONV bit is entered into the data block ”Process image output” and switches the contact supply
voltage on. This function can be parameterized via the parameterization form.
3.1.1 Signal TTD
Time--tagged data result as a signal TTD following a change in status of the input signal (whether binary si-
gnal of PAE or simulation value from the SIDB) if the parameter TTD is set.
The following signal TTDs are generated:
-- Change in input signal
-- Channel is simulated
-- Channel is valid/invalid
3.1.2 Signal Delay
The signal delay can be set between 0 to 10 s.

-- The parameterized delay time is restarted with each change in input signal.
-- If the input signal remains stable during the monitoring time, it is made available at the output for
monitoring chatter.
EINSIG
t
t_verz t_verz t_verz
t_verz
BWVERZ
Wt
EINSIG Input signal for signal delay

BWVERZ Delayed binary value
t_verz Signal delay time

4--7
e Siemens AG
Page 113 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
Fig. 2: Signal delay principle
3.1.3 Monitoring of Chatter
The number of changes in the signal edge within the parameterized chatter monitoring time is measured:
-- During monitoring, the output signal from the chatter monitoring function follows the input signal
-- If the signal chatters, the monitoring time is increased to three times its value, a substitution binary
signal is processed further, and a fault TTD is generated.
BWVERZ
1. 2. 3. >3
Monitoring time
t
Monitoring time Start 3-fold monitoring time
FLATZEIT_V
t
FLANKZ_V
1 2 0 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 0 1
t
BESIG
EBS

FLATZE IT_V Chatter monitoring time
FLANKZ_V Edge counter
BESIG Binary value in ZUDB
Fig. 3: Principle of chatter suppression
Irrespective of the respective input signal present a binary signal can be simulated via the software.
Simulation via job function ”Simulation selection” has been selected
- Reset condition
Simulation via job function ”Simulation selection” has been disselected
- Effect on the process image

The process value is replaced by the transferred simulation value

The TTD ”Channel simulated” or ”Channel not simulated” is generated, in as far as TTD has been
configured for the binary signal

4--8
e Siemens AG
Page 114 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
- Effect on internal further processing

The simulation value is processed further like a process value
- Signalling on the module

None
3.2 Startup/Restart

4--9
e Siemens AG
Page 115 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
3.3 Fault Response
The following monitoring functions are implemented for the input signal:
short-circuit to M, short-circuit to P and chatter of sensor signal.
The faults detected above have an effect on the process image, TTD and further internal processing.
Fault TTD
In addition to the parameterizable signal TTDs, there are also fault TTDs which describe the status of the
control system for messages and logs in detailed form using error numbers. The fault TTDs result from
events detected by the monitoring routines of the FB70.
The following events are detected and signalled as fault TTDs:
-- Chatter of input signal
Signal text: ”SENSOR CHATTER”
and additionally with changeover contacts:

-- Short-circuit to P of sensor line (double ”1” signal)
Signal text: ”SHORT-CIRCUIT TO P IN LINE”
-- Short-circuit to M of sensor line (double ”0” signal)
Signal text: ”SHORT-CIRCUIT TO M IN LINE”
-- Channel simulated
Signal text: ”SIGNAL SIMULATED”
3.3.1 Sensor Chatter
Monitoring of the sensor signal for chatter can be parameterized for each channel (parameter FLAT = 0
means no monitoring).

More than three changes in signal follow the first change in signal within the parameterized monitor-
ing time. When the monitoring time has expired, it is restarted by the next change in signal.

The bit ”KG” is immediately reset in the status data block ZUDB.

A fault TTD ”FLAT coming” is generated. In addition, a signal TTD ”KG”, channel invalid, is gener-
ated if the binary signal of the channel is parameterized as a TTD.

The substitution binary signal (EBS) is processed further as the sensor signal according to the para-
meterization. The new monitoring time is three times the old value.

4--10
e Siemens AG
Page 116 of 719

FB70 BINAUF

The monitoring function is reset if it is triggered again within three times the parameterized
monitoring time.

The bit ”KG” is immediately set in the status data block ZUDB.

A fault TTD ”FLAT going” is generated. In addition, a signal TTD ”KG”, channel valid, is generated if
the binary signal of the channel is parameterized as a TTD.

The sensor signal entered in the PAED is processed further according to the parameterization
instead of the substitution binary signal defined by the parameter EBS.
3.3.2 Short-circuit to P of Sensor Line
Sending of a TTD is delayed by 200 ms or by one cycle whichever is the larger. A maximum switchover time
of 200 ms is therefore permissible for changeover contacts.

The input signal of a changeover contact is a double ”1”. A ”1” is therefore present in the PAED at
both the even bit position (NO contact) and the odd bit position (NC contact).

The bit ”KG”, channel valid, is reset if the channel is not simulated.

A fault TTD ”PSGL coming”, short-circuit to P, is generated. In addition, a signal TTD ”KG”, channel
invalid, is generated if the binary signal of the channel is parameterized as a TTD.

If the channel is not simulated, the substitution binary signal (EBS) is processed further as the sen-
sor signal according to the parameterization.

The monitoring function is reset when the fault has been eliminated.


A fault TTD ”PSGL going” is generated. In addition, a signal TTD ”KG”, channel valid, is generated if
the binary signal of the channel is parameterized as a TTD.


4--11
e Siemens AG
Page 117 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
3.3.3 Short-circuit to M of Sensor Line
Sending of a TTD is delayed by 200 ms or by one cycle whichever is the larger. A maximum switchover time
of 200 ms is therefore permissible for changeover contacts.

The input signal of a changeover contact is a double ”0”. A ”0” is therefore present in the PAED at
both the even bit position (NO contact) and the odd bit position (NC contact).

The bit ”KG”, channel valid, is reset if the channel is not simulated.

A fault TTD ”BGMS coming”, short-circuit to M, is generated. In addition, a signal TTD ”KG”, chan-
nel invalid, is generated if the binary signal of the channel is parameterized as a TTD.

If the channel is not simulated, the substitution binary signal (EBS) is processed further as the sen-
sor signal according to the parameterization.

The monitoring function is reset when the fault has been eliminated.


A fault TTD ”BGMS going” is generated. In addition, a signal TTD ”KG”, channel valid, is generated
if the binary signal of the channel is parameterized as a TTD.

3.3.4 General Inquiry
During the general inquiry, the AP searches for all existing faults. The FB then generates the fault TTDs of all
current faults.
If a fault is indicated as coming when the block is processed, and if a general inquiry is requested in addition,
only the fault TTD is generated without identification of the general inquiry.
3.3.5 Hardware Fault
The status word DB is deleted if a hardware fault is present and if the block is not simulated. The bit ”KG”,
channel valid, is reset (with signal TTD if parameterized).
In the case of simulation, the hardware fault has no effect on the SIM--FB.

4--12
e Siemens AG
Page 118 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
4 Configuring
Fig. 4 shows the symbol of the function block BINAUF similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring sy-
stem.
GB Symbol: Binary signal conditioning

TXP--specific module FB70; SIM482/431
pic_id 2344
Fig. 4: CSF symbol of function block BINAUF

4--13
e Siemens AG
Page 119 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
5 Parameterization

4--14
e Siemens AG
Page 120 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
- Sensor type (GT)
- Sensor chatter (FLAT)
- Delay of input signals (VERZ)
- Substitution binary signal (EBS)
- Alarm, warning, tolerance (AWT)
- Supply for contact (via/not via parameterization form)
- Sensor type
Name: GT
Function: Defines which type of sensor is connected
Meaning 0,1,3 = irrelevant
2 = changeover contact
4 = single contact
Basic setting: 4
- Sensor chatter
Name: FLAT
Function: Defines the chatter monitoring time
Meaning: 0 = no chatter monitoring
100 = 100 s
Basic setting: 0
- Delay of input signals
Name: VERZ
Function: Defines whether the input signal is delayed and by how much
Meaning: 0 = no delay
10000 = 10 s
Basic setting: 0

4--15
e Siemens AG
Page 121 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
- Substitution binary signal
Name: EBS
Function: Defines the status of the binary signals in the event of a fault
Meaning: 0 = no substitution binary signal
1 = process last valid value further
2 = substitution binary signal ”0”
3 = substitution binary signal ”1”
Basic setting: 0
- Time--tagged data
Name: TTD
Function: Defines whether time--tagged data are to generated
Meaning: 0 = do not generate TTD
1 = generate TTD with every change in signal
Basic setting: 0
- Alarm, warning, tolerance
Name: AWT
Function: Defines whether a signal is classified as an alarm, warning or tolerance
message
A = alarm
W= warning
T= tolerance
Basic setting: S
Name: FUNR
Function: Describes the function area to which the binary value is assigned
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

4--16
e Siemens AG
Page 122 of 719

FB70 BINAUF
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB70

Block name: BINAUF
Version: _________________"
Called blocks: FB133
-- Code 2200 bytes
(AP), within a system environment for closed-loop control.
7 Abbreviations
BGMS Short-circuit to M
EING Binary signals in the PAED
ESV Input signal extension
FEBT Fault bit
FLAT Sensor chatter
FLATZEIT_V Counter for chatter monitoring time
FLANKZ_V Edge counter for chatter monitoring
KANR Channel number
KG Channel valid
PSGL Short-circuit to P
SIM Signal module

4--17
e Siemens AG
Page 123 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 124 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB71 BINAUS (Binary Signal Output)
SIM--HWKBA
Page 125 of 719

FB71 BINAUS

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

4--2
e Siemens AG
Page 126 of 719

FB71 BINAUS
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
2 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5

3.2 Startup/Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--6
3.3 Fault Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--6
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--7
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--9
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--9

4--3
e Siemens AG
Page 127 of 719

FB71 BINAUS

4--4
e Siemens AG
Page 128 of 719

FB71 BINAUS
1 Application
The function block FB71, binary signal output, is used together with the SIM 323 / SIM 482 and SIM 322 /
SIM 451 / SIM 452 signal modules to output binary process signals.The output signal can be simulated via
ES680.
2 Design
used to output binary signals. The signals originate from data blocks and are sent to data blocks. A function
block call with its parameter set is required for each channel of the hardware.
PAE FB71
BASIG
Simulation value
from
ES680 Simulation Simulation KSIM
Data flow
PAE Binary signal from control word

BASIG Binary value in the PAAD

4--5
e Siemens AG
Page 129 of 719

FB71 BINAUS
During the cyclic processing, the FB71 fetches the binary value from the control word data block and stores it
in the data block for the output signals PAAD.
The binary output signal can be simulated via ES680 independent of the current input signal.
Simulation is activated via ES680
- Reset condition
Simulation is deactivated via ES680
- Effects on the output value

The output value is replaced by the simulation value.

A signal TTD ”Channel simulated” is generated. In addition, the output state is generated as a TTD.
3.2 Startup/Restart
3.3 Fault Response

4--6
e Siemens AG
Page 130 of 719

FB71 BINAUS
4 Configuring
Fig. 2 shows the symbol of the function block BINAUS similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring sy-
stem.
SIM---HWKBA Symbol: Coupling module for binary signals

Hardware output
TXP--specific module SIM
PIC---ID 2493
Fig. 2: CSF symbol of function block BINAUS

4--7
e Siemens AG
Page 131 of 719

FB71 BINAUS
5 Parameterization
The following parameters are managed by the ES:

Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

4--8
e Siemens AG
Page 132 of 719

FB71 BINAUS
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB71

Block name: BINAUS
Version: _________________"
Called blocks: None
-- Code 314 bytes
-- Historical values (per call) None
7 Abbreviations
KANR Channel number
SIM Signal module

4--9
e Siemens AG
Page 133 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 134 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB72 BINEIN (Binary Signal Input)
CB
Page 135 of 719

FB72 BINEIN

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

5--2
e Siemens AG
Page 136 of 719

FB72 BINEIN
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--5
2 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--5

3.1.1 Input Signal Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--6
3.1.2 Signal TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--6
3.2 Startup/Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
3.3 Fault Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
3.4 Special Features when Connecting Auxiliaries, AG--F or APT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
3.4.1 Interfaces for Binary Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
3.4.2 External Time Tag Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--9
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--13
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--13

5--3
e Siemens AG
Page 137 of 719

FB72 BINEIN

5--4
e Siemens AG
Page 138 of 719

FB72 BINEIN
1 Application
The function block FB72, binary signal input, is used together with the SIM 323 / SIM 482 and SIM 321 /
SIM 431 signal modules to read in binary process signals.
The function block FB72 is also used to read in binary signals which originate from coupled systems (such as
auxiliaries with SIMATIC S5 and systems with AG--F or APT).
2 Design
used to read in binary signals. The signals originate from data blocks and are sent to data blocks. A function
block call with its parameter set is required for each channel of the hardware.
BESIG
PAESIG
ESV D
FB72
TTD

PAESIG Binary signal from PAED
P Parameter

5--5
e Siemens AG
Page 139 of 719

FB72 BINEIN
The input signals are extended if the ESV is <> 0, i.e. the signal remains unchanged for at least the param-
eterized time following a change in signal (0--1).
The block only processes the status word in case of input change.
3.1.1 Input Signal Extension
The input signal extension only refers to positive edges. The input signal extension can be selected in the
range from 0 to 10 s. All changes in signal within the signal extension time are ignored.
ESV t_ESV
1) t
2)
PAE
t_ESV start t
t_ESV start
BESIG
3) t
ESV Switch-on delay counter

t_ESV Delay time
PAE Binary signal from PAED
ZUDB Status data block
1) Change in edge 0 --> 1

The input signal is extended by the time defined by ESV (0--10000 ms).
The generated time is derived from the scanning time.
2) A current ESV time is retriggered by a new 0--1 edge.
3) Input signal without input signal extension.
The signal is stored here in the status DB (BESIG).
Fig. 2: Input signal extension
3.1.2 Signal TTD
Time--tagged data result as a signal TTD following a change in status of the input signal if the parameter TTD
is set.

5--6
e Siemens AG
Page 140 of 719

FB72 BINEIN
The following signal TTD is generated:

D Change in input signal
The FB72 does not generate fault TTDs.
3.2 Startup/Restart
3.3 Fault Response

3.4 Special Features when Connecting Auxiliaries, AG--F or APT
3.4.1 Interfaces for Binary Signals
In this application, the SIM function block BINEIN selects the binary value parameterized via the ES 680 from
the data block (in the receive mailbox) received from the coupled system, where the associated binary value
is selected according to the channel number KANR. The input signal extension function and the signal DMZ
function described in Section 3 are applied to this binary value if they are configured. The resulting binary
signal is entered at bit position 0 in the status word for further processing.

(SIM function block FB72 BINEIN)
Parameter byte = 1 Parameter byte not rele-
vant with KANR 9 ... 16
PAED 15 8 7 0 15 0
PAEW 2 2 2 2 2 2
Status word
X X
KANR: 8 1 16 9
Example: KANR = 14
Fig. 3: Interfaces for binary signal input, FB72 BINEIN
The SIM function block FB72 transfers the bit identified by PAED/PAEW and the channel number KANR from
the receive mailbox 1:1 into the status word bit 0.
3.4.2 External Time Tag Mode
Area of application
This mode of operation is used in auxiliary plant systems which provide the binary signal changes with an
additional time tag. The binary signal and time tag together are transferred in the telegram interface. A signal
TTD is then generated in the AP from this pair of values. The external time tag mode can be set via the para-
meter AE_ZEIT (see Chapter 5 “Parameterization”).

5--7
e Siemens AG
Page 141 of 719

FB72 BINEIN
Time tag structure

The time tag of the ancillary plant system must be transferred as a double word and contain the number of
milliseconds passed since 0:00 hrs. Bit 31 (highest bit of the double word) contains the binary signal.
Binary signal (input signal)
31 27 Time tag High 16

2 2 2
External time tag
in ms since 0:00 hrs
15 Time tag Low 0
2 2
Fig. 4: Time tag structure
Differences as compared to an operating mode without external time tag

The parameter “Channel number” has no impact.
Signal TTDs are generated irrespective of whether an input signal extension has been configured or not. The
input signal extension only has an effect on the binary signal in the status word of FB72 BINEIN.

5--8
e Siemens AG
Page 142 of 719

FB72 BINEIN
4 Configuring
Fig. 5 shows the symbol of the function block BINEIN similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring system
for the acquisition of signals via SIM modules.
KB Symbol: Coupling module for binary signals

TXP--specific module FB72;
pic_id 2348
Fig. 5: CSF symbol of function block FB72 BINEIN for the acquisition of signals via SIM modules
Fig. 6 shows the symbol of the function block BINEIN similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring system
for the acquisition of signals via connecting auxiliaries (NA), AG--F or APT systems.
NA.KB Symbol: Binary input (secondary system)

TXP---specific module
PIC---ID 7103
only for use in AP
Fig. 6: CSF symbol of function block FB72 BINEIN for the acqusition of signals via connecting auxiliaries AG--F or APR systems

5--9
e Siemens AG
Page 143 of 719

FB72 BINEIN
5 Parameterization
Depending on the CSF symbol as shown in Fig. 5 or Fig. 6 an adequate parameterization form KB or NA.KB
is offered.
Fig. 7: Parameterization form FB72 BINEIN for the acquisition of signals via SIM modules
Fig. 8: Parameterization form FB72 BINEIN for the acqusition of signals via connecting auxiliaries AG--F or APR systems
The parameterization form KB and NA.KB have subordinated I & C forms (not shown here) which can be
opened by the keys LMASKE.KB and LMASKE NA.BINEIN respectively. From the I & C form NA.BINEIN
supplementary parameters are selectable for connecting auxiliaries; AG--F or APT systems.

5--10
e Siemens AG
Page 144 of 719

FB72 BINEIN
The following function must be parameterized:
- Input signal extension (ESV)
- Alarm, warning, tolerance (AWT)
The following parameters are derived from the configured KKS sign in the ES 680:
For connecting auxiliaries, AG--F or APT systems the following additional parameters have to be configured
via I & C forms:
- Channel number (KANR)
- Byte (BYTE)
- Word number in PAE (PAEW)
- AS number for connecting auxiliary, (FREMD--CPU)

AG--F or APT system
- Input signal extension

Name: ESV
Function: Defines whether the input signal is extended, and by how long
Meaning: 0 = no extension
10000 = 10 s; steps 0.25 s
Basic setting: 0
- Time--tagged data
Name: TTD
Function: Defines whether data with time are to be generated
Range of values: 0--1
Meaning: 0 = no TTD generated
1 = generate TTD for every change in signal
Basic setting: 0

5--11
e Siemens AG
Page 145 of 719

FB72 BINEIN
- Alarm, warning, tolerance

Name: AWT
A = alarm
W = warning
T = tolerance
Basic setting: S

Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0
- Byte
Name: BYTE
Function: Must be definded by the user only for connecting auxiliaries, AG--F or APT sys-
tems (see also 3.4). In case of signal acquisition via ET 200 the parameter Byte
is automatically defined from ES 680.
Defines whether the binary signal in KANR 1 . . . 8 is taken from the High or Low
part of the PAE word.
The binary signal in KANR 9 . . . 16 is always taken from the Low part of the PAE
word.
Meaning: 0 = the binary signal in KANR 1 . . . 8 is taken from the Low part of the PAE
word.
1 = the binary signal in KANR 1 . . . 8 is taken from the High part of the PAE
word.
Basic setting: 1

5--12
e Siemens AG
Page 146 of 719

FB72 BINEIN
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB72

Block name: BINEIN
Version: _________________"
-- Code 1208 bytes
7 Abbreviations
AS Automation system
BESIG Binary value in the ZUDB
KANR Channel number
SIM Signal module

5--13
e Siemens AG
Page 147 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 148 of 719

SIM Function Block
DMZ10MS (Event Acquisition in 10 ms)
10MSDMZ
Page 149 of 719

DMZ10MS

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

5--2
e Siemens AG
Page 150 of 719

DMZ10MS
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--5
2 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--5

3.2 Fault Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
3.3 Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
3.4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--9
3.5 Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--9
3.6 Parameterization Form of Function DMZ10MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--10
4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-- 11
5 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--11

5--3
e Siemens AG
Page 151 of 719

DMZ10MS

5--4
e Siemens AG
Page 152 of 719

DMZ10MS
1 Application
The function DMZ10MS (event acquisition in 10 ms) records a binary signal of the SIM ET200 I/O device (in the
AS 620 B) every 10 ms and generates a signal TTD in the event of a change.
. Note
The function DMZ10MS can be executed in the processor (AP) of the AS 620 au-
tomation system.
2 Design
Figs. 1 to 3 show the block diagrams of the function DMZ10MS depending on the parameterized link with their
input and output variables.
X BA
Compare
Valueold ≠ Valuenew ⇒ DMZ
AWT
Fig. 1: Block diagram of function DMZ10MS with parameterization for acquisition
Legend: X Binary input

AWT Identification alarm/warning/tolerance
BA Monitored binary output signal

5--5
e Siemens AG
Page 153 of 719

DMZ10MS
X1
≥ BA
X2
Compare
AWT
Fig. 2: Block diagram of function DMZ10MS with parameterization for OR operation
Legend: X1 Binary input 1

X2 Binary input 2
X1
& BA
X2
Compare
AWT
Fig. 3: Block diagram of function DMZ10MS with parameterization for AND operation
Legend: X1 Binary input 1

X2 Binary input 2

5--6
e Siemens AG
Page 154 of 719

DMZ10MS

Signal TTDs of a SIM ET200 peripheral device (in the AS 620 B) are usually generated by function blocks
which obtain their input values from a process image which is read in by the AP system software every 100
ms (or 50 ms or 200 ms). The time stamp of a signal generated in this manner can thus deviate from the
actual time at which the signal changed by up to 100 ms (or 50 ms or 200 ms). The runtimes of the subordi-
nate bus system must also be added to these values.
If this accuracy is insufficient for a signal TTD, the function DMZ10MS can be used to monitor binary input
signals in the 10 ms cycle of the AP and to provide them with the corresponding time stamp. These changes
are output as a signal TTD by the function DMZ10MS in the free cycle of the AP. The following response of
the function DMZ10MS can be set using parameters:
D Acquisition of signal, and monitoring for changes
D Acquisition and ORing of two binary signals with monitoring of the OR result for changes
D Acquisition and ANDing of two binary signals with monitoring of the AND result for changes.
Only one change from 0 to 1 and/or a change from 1 to 0 can be acquired per free cycle and signal.
The time for data transport between a module and the function DMZ10MS, the runtime of the function
DMZ10MS and thus the loading on the AP must be kept low. To achieve this, reading of the module data
with a subsequent logic operation is always carried out byte-by-byte. A signal byte represents 8 channels of
the module, i.e. a channel occupies one bit position in the signal byte. The following facts result from this
time-optimized, byte-oriented processing:
D One of the following logic functions can be selected per “Signal byte pair”:
“AND”
“OR”
“ACQUISITION”
Thus the selected logic function of a “channel” applies to all “channels” in the signal byte.
D Channels with the same “number” can be linked, i.e. same bit position in the signal byte pair.

5--7
e Siemens AG
Page 155 of 719

DMZ10MS
Fig. 4 shows examples of “circuits” in which the function DMZ10MS is used.
Hardware design Block format
Module 1 GB GB
XG01
Ch. 1 XG01 XG08
Signal
byte 1 GB GB
Ch. 8
XG08 10 ms 10 ms
XG09 XG09 XG016
Ch. 9
Signal Parameterization= Parameterization=
byte 2 AND OR
XG016
Ch. 16
Illegal configuring:
Signal byte 1/2 already
Module 2 occupied by ”AND”
XG017
Ch. 1
Signal
byte 3 GB GB
XG024
Ch. 8 XG024 XG025
XG025
Ch. 9
Signal GB 10 ms 10 ms
byte 4 XG032
XG032
Ch. 16
Parameterization= Parameterization=
OR acquisition
Illegal configuring:
Signal byte 3/4 already
occupied by ”OR”
Fig. 4: Examples of the function DMZ10MS
3.2 Fault Response

A signal TTD is not output by the function DMZ10MS if the binary signal cannot be read in as a result of a
fault.
3.3 Startup
The old value required for the comparison is reset during the startup.

5--8
e Siemens AG
Page 156 of 719

DMZ10MS
3.4 Configuring
Fig 5 shows the function DMZ10MS as the symbol of a control system flowchart on the ES 680 configuring
system.
10MSDMZ Symbol: 10 ms TTD signal

FB 79
PIC---ID 2953
only for use in AP
Fig. 5: CSF symbol of function DMZ10MS
3.5 Parameter Description
Name Meaning Remarks

VART AND = ANDing of two channels and monitoring of the result Enter using toggle
of the logic operation for changes field
OR = ORing of two channels and monitoring of the result
of the logic operation for changes
NONE = No logic operation, i.e. monitoring of input for changes
AWT S = signal Enter using toggle
A = alarm field
W = warning
T = tolerance
Table 1: Parameter description

5--9
e Siemens AG
Page 157 of 719

DMZ10MS
3.6 Parameterization Form of Function DMZ10MS
Fig. 6: Parameterization form of function DMZ10MS
Legend: ken I/O identification

A Output
P Parameter
nam I/O name
TTD Enable form for time-tagged data
AWT Identification class alarm/warning/tolerance
aktiv. Activation
SF Fixed signal in symbol
Pos. Position data
10MSTTD I & C form

5--10
e Siemens AG
Page 158 of 719

DMZ10MS
4 Technical Data
Block name: DMZ10MS
Library number/version: The function DMZ10MS is part of the AP system software
Basic requirements If at least one of the functions DMZ10MS, DMZ10MS_OR or
or DMZ10MS_AND is configured, a data area of approx.
600 words is created in the AP.
Additional requirements In addition to the basic requirements, approx. 25 data words
are occupied per function DMZ10MS.
Average runtime: Data on the time required per function is not meaningful for
signal acquisition in the 10 ms cycle.
Processing of 8 peripheral bytes in the 10 ms cycle by the function
DMZ10MS with parameterization “AND, OR, ACQUISITION” requires
approx. 1 ms. It is assumed that only one bit changes its status per
10 ms.
Other conditions: Up to 32 peripheral bytes can be processed per function DMZ10MS
by the AP.
5 Abbreviations
AWT Alarm, warning, tolerance
CSF Control system flowchart
FB Function block
GLE Group control level
LTF---TTD I & C error TTD
Signal---TTD Configured TTD with change in signal (analog or binary)
TTD Time-tagged data

5--11
e Siemens AG
Page 159 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 160 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB159 CC (Output Section for Continuous Controller)
CC
Page 161 of 719

FB159 KONREG

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

6--2
e Siemens AG
Page 162 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--5
3 Drive Control with Manipulated Variable Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--9

3.1 Commands from the Serial Input System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--14
3.2 Serial Inputs for Manipulated Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--14
3.3 Commands from the Manipulated Variable Desk Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--15
3.4 Scanning of Blocking for Manipulated Variable (only with Desk Tile Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--15
3.5 Commands from the Next Higher Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--16
3.6 Command Priorities in Operating Mode MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--17
3.7 Tracking of Manipulated Variable Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--17
3.8 Message ”Last Status Reached by ...” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--18
3.9 Operating Mode Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--18
3.10 Command Priorities for Operating Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--18
3.11 Scanning of Blocking for Operating Mode (only with Desk Tile Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--19
3.12 Signals and Displays on Desk Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--20
3.13 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--21
3.13.1 Time--tagged data (TTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--21
3.13.2 Monitoring of Fault Switchover (STU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--22
3.13.3 Monitoring of Protective Action (SA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--23
3.13.4 Monitoring of Position Check-Back Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--23
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--32
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--33

6--3
e Siemens AG
Page 163 of 719

FB159 KONREG

6--4
e Siemens AG
Page 164 of 719

FB159 KONREG
1 Application
Continuous controllers are used in control loops with continuous actuators (no stepping motors).
The function block FB159 CC is used as output section and control section for the continuous controller. The
FB159 has no control algorithm. It outputs the manipulated variables and switches the operating modes
“CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL” or “MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL” via appropriate inputs and outputs.
The single loop control is in general devided into four functions, which are implemented in the AS 620 by
the following means:
- Setpoint generation with a manipulated variable adjuster: FB88 O--SPC--G or master controller in a
higher level
- Comparison of setpoint with manipulated variable: AS 620 user defined software
- Control algorithm (e.g. PID): FB178 CCON--G / FB 180 CCTRL
- Drive control with manipulated variable adjuster: FUM or FB159 with SIM (input and output
modules)
Function:
FB178 CCON--G
Controller Control algorithm
FB 180 CCTRL
Drive control with

FB159 manipulated variable
Output section
CC adjuster
SIM 332 / SIM 470 /

SIPART / SIPOS 5 Flash
AUMATIC / AUMA MATIC
Final control element
Fig. 1: Functional structure of controller and output section

6--5
e Siemens AG
Page 165 of 719

FB159 KONREG
The FB159 provides the following inputs and outputs for the connection with a final control element:
- WE/OPEN, WE/CL Acquisition position OPEN, CLOSED
- YA manipulated variable (output to final control element)
Check--back messages are input via SIM input module and binary signal conditioning FB70.
The output of the manipulated variable YA is done via the SIM output module for analog signals either with
0 ... 20 mA or 4 ... 20 mA.
❏ Output section for continuous controller

FB159 KONREG -- Status acquisition/Operating mode memory
-- Manipulated variable adjuster
Output section for
-- Producing TTDs
continuous controller
Output
#
module
SIM 332
SIM 470
Input
modules
SIM 321
SIM 323
SIM 421
SIM 431
SIM 433
SIM 482
Fig. 2: SIM function block FB159 and associated modules
For further information on the application of signal modules (SIM) please refer to:
The Operating Instructions AS 620B--S7(SIM), in the AS 620--S7 System Manual;
The Operating Instructions AS 620B (SIM), in the AS 620--S5 System Manual.

6--6
e Siemens AG
Page 166 of 719

FB159 KONREG
2 Mode of Operation
The following figure shows the software functions or function blocks which can be executed by the function
block FB159.
Desk tile Control word Status word TTD Desk tile

AP
Message output
and signalling
Check--back
Drive control with message
manipulated variable Analog signal output
conditioning/
adjuster monitoring
Positioning section Output and signal conditioning
Manipulated variable Check--back messages
Fig. 3: Software functions

6--7
e Siemens AG
Page 167 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Signalling Commands OM
Setp. W +
PID YR
GLE
XS Protection
adjust. X -- contr.
PAE_ Controlle PAA_ Parameters

E r desk tile E
UL/LL S/OPEN;S/Cl
Analog Final
YR
Drive signal
YA
control
control output element
FB159
Check-back
messages
Limit switches
Fig. 4: Main structure for continuous controls with FB159

6--8
e Siemens AG
Page 168 of 719

FB159 KONREG
3 Drive Control with Manipulated Variable Adjuster
Enable Desk tile Input OM

User
and interface
BHA MLA signalling

BHE MLE
MLS
SIM 323 SIM 323

SIM 482 SIM 482
ET 200
FB 178 K--REG
Desk tile control
FB 180 CCTRL
LADB TADB
Control word / Status word / TTD
Function block FB 159 CC

Output section of continuous controller
Check--back messages Manipulated variable output

AP
Processing of
FB70 control functions
Control
Input modules Output module
SIM 321 / 323 SIM 332 and
SIM 421 / 431 / 433 / 482 SIM 470
check--back
ET 200
Final control element
Fig. 5: Structure of continuous controller with function block FB159 and SiM modules (signal names: see Chap. 6 Abbreviations)

6--9
e Siemens AG
Page 169 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Controller Drive
status word control word CCON CCON
FB 159 YR YA
Controller R RZUW AZUW
control word
S
T
W R
L #
Desk tile
FHD o S
Prot. com-
g Tracking with closed-loop control mands YS #
OP, YS CL
BHE i
URS Limiting
Manipulated
BHA c variable
WE/Cl
Forcing
WE/OPEN
Drive A
control word Target manipulated
S variable
T
W YN YU YO
OM CCON
Fig. 6: Structure of manipulated variable adjuster and operating mode memory
With operating mode CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL, the manipulated variable YR defined by the FB178
(CCON--G) is applied to the output, and the manipulated variable adjuster is tracked at high speed. If protec-
tion commands S/OPEN or S/C are present, the adjuster is driven between the upper and lower limits YOG
and YUG with the gradients parameterized for the protection commands and is connected through. YR beco-
mes effective again when these commands are omitted.
In operating mode OPEN-LOOP CONTROL, the manipulated variable output is always used for the final con-
trol element. This can be driven between the upper and lower limits YOG and YUG at the parameterized
speed using manual and automatic commands. A target manipulated variable YN can also be sent from the
OM and is used by the FB159 as the manipulated variable if it is a valid value. The following priorities are
taken into consideration:
PROTECTION before Tracking before AUTOMATIC before MANUAL OM before MANUAL DESK TILE:
MANUAL OM can be a coded command or the target manipulated variable referred to above. The FB159
uses the input which contains a valid value (0 % to 100 %). Therefore only one valid value must be present,
either in the coded command or in the target manipulated variable.

6--10
e Siemens AG
Page 170 of 719

FB159 KONREG
With NF = ”1”, the value of YR is connected to the output and the manipulated variable tracked to this value if
no protection commands are present.
The effective manipulated variable YA is therefore available as the output, once in the process image for the
output module SIM and once in the process image of the status words. The FB178 (CCON--G) can be read
back from the latter process image, and a flag can be configured using FB75 ANAAUS (Analog Signal Out-
put) and SIM.
With operating mode FORCING, the target manipulated variable YN is directly applied to the output.
FORCING is activated and deactivated via the “FORCE”--button on OM 650.
Warning
! With operating mode FORCING, the protection and automatic commands are
blocked.
. Note
If present, the position check--back messages WE/OPEN and WE/CL of the ad-
juster are both configured as binary signal acquisition together with the function
block FB70 BINAUF and connected with the FB159. It is admissible to use only one
of the check--back messages (e.g. only WE/OPEN).
FB70 FB70
BE BE
SIG SIG
WE/CL WE/OPEN
FB159 CC
CL OPEN
Fig. 7: Configuring of check--back messages

6--11
e Siemens AG
Page 171 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Parameter Abbreviation Meaning

Analog TYSH Ramp-up time with protection
TYST Ramp-down time with protection
TYH Ramp-up time
TYT Ramp-down time
DLTY Unit function response (delta) of man. variable with SIMP
Binary PBR: 0/1 Priority of command direction:
decrease before increase/increase before decrease
YREV: 0/1 Manipulated variable not reversed/reversed
Inputs Abbreviation Meaning

Analog YOG Upper limit
YUG Lower limit
YR/YN Man. var. controller/target man. var. with OM input
Binary EXT/FAUL External fault

Controller A/CLC Automatic command CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
control A/MAN Automatic command MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
word EN/CLC Process enable CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
(RSTW) EN/MAN Process enable MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
RNF Controller tracking
Binary SQ Collective acknowledgement

Drive BL/OM Disable OM input
control BL/DT Disable desk tile input
word LP Lamp test
(ASTW) BL/AP Disable signalling of protective action
A/OPEN Automatic command OPEN/INCREASE
A/Cl Automatic command CLOSED/DECREASE
A/STOP Automatic command STOP
SR_AN Operating mode OPEN/CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL on startup
P/OPEN Protection OPEN/INCREASE
P/Cl Protection CLOSED/DECREASE
EN/OPEN Process enable OPEN/INCREASE
EN/Cl Process enable CLOSED/DECREASE
Check-- WE/OPEN Acquisition position OPEN
back WE/Cl Acquisition position CLOSED
messages
Fig. 8: Explanation of abbreviations for the drive control , part 1 (parameters and inputs)

6--12
e Siemens AG
Page 172 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Outputs Abbreviation Meaning

Analog YA Manipulated variable
Binary CB/CLC Check-back message CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL

Controller CB/MAN Check-back message OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
status BL/CLC Disable closed-loop control mode
word CHOV/FAUL Fault switchover to open-loop control
NO/FAUL No controller fault
YO Manipulated variable at upper limit
YU Manipulated variable at lower limit
BL/AUTO Automatic commands disabled
IZG Actual status valid
P/SIMR Controller status word simulated
Binary CB/OP Check-back message OPEN
Drive CB/CL Check-back message CLOSED
status SG/LH Manipulated variable increasing
word SG/LT Manipulated variable decreasing
ZES Status achieved by PROTECTION
ZEA Status achieved by AUTOMATIC
ZEH Status achieved by MANUAL
SBS Serial input STOP
SBH Serial input INCREASE
SBT Serial input DECREASE
NOAPC No signalling of protective action
P/SIMA Drive status word simulated
FORCING FORCING mode active
Fig. 9: Explanation of abbreviations for the drive control, part 2 (outputs)
Four positioning times can be defined for the manipulated variable adjuster (see Section 4, Parameteriza-
tion). The positioning times “Ramp-up time TYH” and “Ramp-down time TYT” are applicable in operating mo-
de MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL, the positioning times “Ramp-up time TYSH” and “Ramp-down time
TYST” in the case of protective interventions. The adjuster is only activated with the parameterized times
TYST/TYSH if the protection commands are present.
Opposite command directions are blocked for the duration of the protective intervention (see Section 3.6,
Command Priority). If two protection commands are present simultaneously, the command parameterized
with the higher priority (parameter: Command direction priority PBR) is executed. An acknowledgement is
not required at the end of the protective intervention in order to be able to modify the manipulated variable
from the desk tile or using a serial input.
The output variable of the ramp-function generator can be limited using the signals YOG/YUG in the control
word. When the set limits are reached by the manipulated variable Y, a message is output via the signals YO/
YU in the controller status word. The manipulated variable can no longer be changed if both limits have been
triggered. With operating mode CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL, a switch is made in the case of YOG < YUG to
the operating mode MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL and ”Disable closed-loop control mode” is signalled
(bit SPR in the PAE_E). The commands which are blocked in this case can be recognized at the same time
on the screen or by means of scanning of blocking. A change in operating mode is no longer possible until
the fault has been eliminated.
The signals SG/LH and SG/LT signal via the process image PAE_E that the manipulated variable Y is increa-
sing or decreasing as a result of a manual adjustment to it. The control signal SP/OM in the control word can
be used to disable the serial input for the manipulated variable, and the control signal SP/TS to disable a
desk tile input for the manipulated variable adjuster.
The manipulated variable can be reversed using the parameter YREV.

6--13
e Siemens AG
Page 173 of 719

FB159 KONREG
3.1 Commands from the Serial Input System
Coded commands in the drive control word:
Manual OPEN
Manual CLOSE
Manual STOP (manipulated variable)
SIMP OPEN (increase manipulated variable by the value DLTY)
SIMP CLOSE (decrease manipulated variable by the value DLTY)
Acknowledgement of fault switchover or protective action
Switchover FORCING active -- FORCING inactive
Coded commands in the controller control word:
Switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL -- CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL

Disable switchover MANUAL/CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL via automatic commands
Definition of:
Target manipulated variable YN (from OM)
The manual commands OPEN/CLOSE entered via the screen only become valid when the corresponding
process enable (EN/OPEN, EN/Cl) is present via the control word.
The command for switching over between MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL and CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
requires the enable signals EN/CLC and EN/MAN.
The command ”Disable switchover MANUAL/CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL via automatic commands” prevents
switching-over of the operating mode by the higher-level automatic system. The command is stored and can
only be reset by another transmission.
A parameterized delta value (operating pulse) is added or subtracted to the target--value memory of the ma-
nipulated variable adjuster with the commands SIMP OPEN and SIMP CLOSE. Then the ramp--up adjuster
starts toward the new manipulated variable with the speed set for manual commands.
When entering a new target manipulated variable YN, the value memory of the manipulated variable adjuster
is loaded and starts toward the desired value. The target run can be aborted at any time due to a new input
of the target manipulated variable or to a STOP input. In this case the target--value memory is set to the
achieved manipulated variable. The target run is also terminated if one of the limits UL/LL is reached.
Target variable inputs lying outside the OG/UG limits are accepted but the manipulated variable stops when
a limit is reached. The run is terminated normally when a started run activates a serial (OM) control SP/OM
with a serial entry.
Coded screen commands are transmitted together with the process enables in the control word from the next
higher level to the individual control level. If the bit “Disable serial (OM) input for manipulated variable” (BL/
OM) is set in the control word, inputs for the manipulated variable adjuster from the screen are disabled.
3.2 Serial Inputs for Manipulated Variable
The commands which are possible as a result of the status acquisition function are signalled to the serial in-
put system via the status word (“Serial input OPEN” SBH, “Serial input CLOSED” SBT, “Serial input STOP”
SBS).
Serial inputs for the manipulated variable adjuster are not possible:

6--14
e Siemens AG
Page 174 of 719

FB159 KONREG
- If both limits for the manipulated variable (UL/LL) have been reached
- If ”Disable serial (OM) input for manipulated variable” is present (BL/OM = 1 in the control word)
- If the operating mode memory is set to CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
- The corresponding command direction is disabled in operating mode MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP

CONTROL if
D a direction-dependent process enable EN/OPEN, EN/Cl is missing or
D the manipulated variable has reached one of the limits UL/LL
- If a command with a higher priority (protection or automatic command) is present.
- If an actuator status word is simulated.
Exception is the operating mode FORCING. With this mode, the target manipulated variable YN is directly
applied to the output. Protection and automatic commands are blocked.
The STOP command for the manipulated variable can only be entered from the screen if the manipulated
variable in operating mode MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL is actually running higher or lower as a result
of a corresponding manual command or a command from an automatic open-loop control function.
3.3 Commands from the Manipulated Variable Desk Tile
Manual OPEN BHE

Manual CLOSED BHA
Switchover CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL -- MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL URS
To make the BHE/BHA commands valid the module requires the corresponding hardware signal ”Enable MA-
NUAL” FHD in addition to the corresponding process enables F/OPEN;F/Cl from the proces image PAA_E.
Manual commands are generated by the positive edge of the hardware signal.
In versions with a desk tile connection, open-loop control can be prevented by setting the bit “Disable
manipulated variable from desk tile” (SP/TF). This status is signalled by permanent lighting-up of the signal
lamp ”Fault” (STÖ) on the manipulated variable desk tile.
. Note
Operating the manipulated variable adjuster is not possible when the status word is
simulated or in operating mode FORCING.
3.4 Scanning of Blocking for Manipulated Variable (only with Desk Tile Input)
By pressing the command pushbuttons ”Manual OPEN” or ”Manual CLOSED” without an enable pushbutton,
the operator can determine whether the desired command direction is enabled for manual control.
Scanning of blocking is also effective if a real command (with enable pushbutton) is present.

6--15
e Siemens AG
Page 175 of 719

FB159 KONREG
- Triggering conditions
D Both limits UL/LL have been reached (YBO = 1, YBU = 1 in the PAE_E)
D The manipulated variable desk tile is disabled (STB = 1 in the PAA_E)
D The operating mode memory is at CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
D In operating mode MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
-- a direction-dependent process enable EN/OPEN, EN/Cl is missing or
-- the manipulated variable has reached one of the limits UL/LL, and the corresponding
command direction is disabled
D An automatic command STOP or an automatic command in the opposite direction is present
D A serial input command is present in the opposite direction.
- Effects on the status word
None
None
None
- Signalling on the desk tile
The signal lamp “Fault” lights up permanently
- Reset condition
Releasing of desk tile pushbutton
3.5 Commands from the Next Higher Level
Automatic OPEN/OPEN UP A/OPEN

Automatic CLOSED/CLOSE A/Cl
Automatic STOP A/STOP
Protection OPEN/INCREASE P/OPEN
Protection CLOSED/DECREASE P/Cl
The commands from the higher-level automatic system ”Automatic OPEN/CLOSED/STOP” are only transmit-
ted with the control word. These commands also require the direction-dependent process enables
EN/OPEN, EN/Cl.
The protection commands Protection OPEN and Protection CLOSED are transmitted with the control word
and do not require a process enable.
Further commands are additionally transmitted in a control word of the closed-loop controller:
Automatic CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL A/CLC

Automatic MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL A/MAN
These commands require the process enables EN/CLC, EN/MAN which are also transmitted with the control
word.
Warning
! With operating mode FORCING, the protection and automatic commands are
blocked.

6--16
e Siemens AG
Page 176 of 719

FB159 KONREG
3.6 Command Priorities in Operating Mode MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
Protection commands *) Protection CLOSED/DECREASE P/Cl

before Protection OPEN/INCREASE P/OPEN
Automatic STOP A/STOP

Automatic commands *) Automatic CLOSED/CLOSE A/Cl
before Automatic OPEN/OPEN UP A/OPEN
Manual commands Manual STOP

from serial input Manual CLOSED
before Manual OPEN
Manual commands *) Manual CLOSED BHA

from desk tile Manual OPEN BHE
*) disabled in operating mode FORCING
Fig. 10: Types of command
The priority CLOSED before OPEN can be reversed by parameterizing (parameter: Command direction
priority PBR -- decrease or increase).
3.7 Tracking of Manipulated Variable Adjuster
- Tracking to master controller in the AP
When the signal ”Tracking” (RNF) is set in the control word of the controller the manipulated vari-
able adjuster is tracked independent of the mode of operation CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL or
MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL given from the AP.
- Operating mode CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
In operating mode CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL, the manipulated variable adjuster is made to track
the controller output value YR. Protection commands are effective. Manual and automatic
commands OPEN/CLOSE/STOP are disabled.
3.8 Message ”Last Status Reached by ...”
Each time a status changes or a new position is reached, the cause leading to this change in status is pas-
sed on via the control word. The information is derived from the last active command.
The message “Last status achieved by ...” is only output if, in operating mode MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP
CONTROL, the manipulated variable has actually been modified by a protection command, a manual
command or from an automatic control function in the group control level (GLE).
All messages “Last status achieved by ...” are reset in operating mode CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL.
The message ”Last status achieved by” is derived from the following criteria:

6--17
e Siemens AG
Page 177 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Cause of the change in status: Last status achieved by:

MANUAL OPEN, STOP, CLOSED MANUAL (from desk tile or screen)
AUTOMATIC OPEN, STOP, CLOSED AUTOMATIC (from automatic controller)
PROTECTION OPEN, CLOSED PROTECTION
3.9 Operating Mode Logic

Either the operating mode MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL or CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL is selected
depending on commands from the desk tile, from the serial input or from an automatic function implemented
in the next higher level.
3.10 Command Priorities for Operating Mode Selection
Commands from GLE Fault switchover to MAN/O-L CONTROL (external fault) EXT/FAUL
Protection commands Protection CLOSED/DECREASE P/Cl
Protection OPEN/INCREASE P/OPEN
Automatic commands Automatic MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL A/MAN

Automatic CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL A/CLC
Manual commands MAN/O-L CONTROL -- CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL (serial input) S/R

CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL -- MAN/O-L CONTROL (desk tile) URS
Fig. 11: Commands for operating mode selection
The selection command “Disable automatic commands” disables or connects the automatic commands
A/CLC, A/MAN.
3.11 Scanning of Blocking for Operating Mode (only with Desk Tile Input)
The operator can determine whether the desired command direction for manual open-loop control is availa-
ble by pressing the command pushbutton “Switchover CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL -- MANUAL/ OPEN-LOOP
CONTROL” (URS) without an enable pushbutton. Scanning of the blocking is also effective if a valid com-
mand with enable pushbutton is present.
The operating mode cannot be switched over if one of the following triggering conditions applies:
- Triggering conditions
D The operating mode memory is set to CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL and the process enable
EN/MAN is missing
D The automatic command CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL is present (A/REG = 1) and the automatic
commands are not disabled (RMSP/ABEF = 0)
D The operating mode memory is set to MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL and the process
enable EN/CLC is missing
D The operating mode memory is set to MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL and the change in
mode is blocked by:
-- YBO = YBU = 1 (manipulated variable has reached limits)
-- WBO = WBU = 1 (setpoint has reached limits)
-- Protection commands Protection OPEN/Protection CLOSED
-- Automatic command MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL(with RMSP/ABEF = 0).

6--18
e Siemens AG
Page 178 of 719

FB159 KONREG
- Effects on status word, time--tagged data, further internal processing

None
- Signalling on desk tile

The signal lamp “Fault” lights up permanently on the manipulated variable desk tile (”Closed-loop
control tile”).
- Reset condition
Releasing of desk tile pushbutton

6--19
e Siemens AG
Page 179 of 719

FB159 KONREG
3.12 Signals and Displays on Desk Tiles
The signals and patterns on the desk tiles are summarized in the following Fig. The signal lamps ”OPEN”,
”CLOSED” and ”FLT” indicate actual statuses by permanent lighting-up of the lamps and faults by flashing
(2 Hz).
The signal lamp “STÖ” lights up permanently if ”Disable desk tile input” is present. The signal lamp “MSPR”
lights up permanently if ”Disable closed-loop control tile” is present.
Signal pattern Meaning
CLOSED INTERMEDIATE OPEN Actual position

CL FLT OPEN CL FLT OPEN CL FLT OPEN
Position
CLOSED/OPEN/INTERMEDIATE
Double ”1” check-back fault
SIM module faulty
Scanning of blocking (manipulated variable)
Lamp test(OK)
Lamp off Permanently on Flashing 2 Hz

CL = signal lamp ”CLOSED” FLT = signal lamp ”Fault” OPEN = signal lamp ”OPEN”
Signal pattern Meaning (lamp test as above)
O-L CONTROL C-L CONTROL
Operating mode MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
Operating mode CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL

Disable c-l control mode in op. mode MAN/OPEN-- When signal
LOOP CONTROL (controller desk tile disabled) lamp “STÖ”
Scanning of blocking lights up
Scanning of blocking (controller desk tile disabled) permanently
Fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL (also following

end of fault without acknowledgement)
Following acknowledgement with fault
Following acknowledgement without fault
Without acknowledgement; without fault; with switchover to closed-

loop control
Fig. 12: Signal patterns on the desk tile

6--20
e Siemens AG
Page 180 of 719

FB159 KONREG
3.13 Communication
Data exchange with the block is carried out using the control word and status word. With a desk tile connec-
tion, communication is additionally carried out via an LADB and TADB.
3.13.1 Time--tagged data (TTD)
control levels.
- Signal TTD
Parameters can be set to select the binary or analog input signals as well as signals generated on the modu-
le (e.g. statuses) if they are required in the process control level for message output and logging.
- Fault TTD
In addition to the signal TTDs, there are also fault TTDs which describe the status of the control system in
detailed form for messages and logs using error numbers. The fault TTDs are generated as the result of
events (faults) recognized by the monitoring equipment, such as e.g. input or output signal monitoring func-
tions.

6--21
e Siemens AG
Page 181 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Signal TTDs
Comment Abbrevi-
ation
Closed-loop control CB/CLC
Manual/open-loop control CB/MAN
Disable closed-loop control mode RMSP/CLC
Fault FAUL
Fault switchover to MAN/O-L CONTROL CHOV/FAUL
No controller fault NO/FAUL
Manipulated var. has reached upper limit YBO
Manipulated var. has reached lower limit YBU
Disable switchover MANUAL/CLOSED-LOOP
CONTROL via automatic commands RMSP/ABEF
Actual status valid IZG
Actual status OPEN CB/OP

Actual statusI CLOSED CB/CL
Last status achieved by PROTECTION ZES
Last status achieved by AUTOMATIC ZEA
Last status achieved by MANUAL ZEH
Process image simulation PSIM
Manipulated variable YA
Signalling of protective action SA
FORCING mode active FORCING
Fault TTDs
Comment Abbrevi-
ation
Check-back fault RMF
Signalling of protective action OPEN MSE
Signalling of protective action CLOSED MSA
Fig. 13: Time--tagged data for continuous controller
3.13.2 Monitoring of Fault Switchover (STU)
- Triggering conditions of monitoring function (in closed-loop control mode)

D A protection command (control word) is present
D Fault switchover with external fault from group control level (EXT/FAUL)
D The manipulated variable limits (YO < YU) have been reached
D The setpoint limits (WO < WU) have been reached.

In operating mode CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL, the bit “Closed-loop control” is reset in the controller
status word, the bits “Manual/open-loop control”, ”Fault switchover to MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP
CONTROL” and ”Disable closed-loop control mode” are set.
In operating mode MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL, only the bit “Disable closed-loop control” is
set.

The TTDs “Manual/open-loop control”, ”Fault switchover to OPEN-LOOP CONTROL” and ”Disable
closed-loop control mode” are set provided the status bits are parameterized as TTDs.

6--22
e Siemens AG
Page 182 of 719

FB159 KONREG

A switch is made from operating mode CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL to MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP
CONTROL, the operating mode switchover is blocked.
- Signalling on desk tile

Signalling on the manipulated variable desk tile according to the triggering conditions defined
above.
On the setpoint desk tile, the fault switchover is indicated on the signal lamps “MSPR” and
“CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” by flashing at 2 Hz.
- Reset conditions of monitoring function

It is possible to switch over to CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL without an acknowledgement if the fault
has been eliminated.
D Collective acknowledgement or
D Acknowledgement with the serial input system (OM) or
D Acknowledgement on desk tile with “Setpoint switchover CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL --
MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL URS” without enable pushbutton (omitted with disabling of
desk tile input).
3.13.3 Monitoring of Protective Action (SA)
- Triggering condition of monitoring function (only if limit switch parameterized)

Protection command has driven the final control element in the envisaged direction and has either
left or reached a limit position (omitted with disabling of signalling of protective action).
- Effect on process image

The bit “No signalling of protective action” is reset, the bits “Last status achieved by PROTECTION”,
“Actual status OPEN or CLOSED” are set.

The signal TTDs “Actual status OPEN” or “Actual status CLOSED”, “Last status achieved by
PROTECTION”, “Signalling of protective action” are generated if the corresponding status bit is
parameterized as a TTD.
A fault TTD ”Signalling of protective action OPEN or CLOSED” is generated in addition.

Commands in the opposite direction are blocked.
- Signalling
The LED ”Module fault” flashes at 2 Hz. The fault is indicated depending on the direction in the case
of desk tile inputs. The setpoint position display flashes at 2 Hz until acknowledged.
- Reset conditions
D Collective acknowledgement or
D Acknowledgement with the serial input system (OM) or
D Acknowledgement on desk tile.
3.13.4 Monitoring of Position Check-Back Messages

The position check-back messages WE/OPEN and WE/Cl are monitored for plausibility. The check--
back messages OPEN and CLOSED are present simultaneously.

6--23
e Siemens AG
Page 183 of 719

FB159 KONREG

The bit “Actual status valid” in the controller status word is reset.

A fault TTD is generated with the cause “Check-back fault OPEN or CLOSED”.

None
- Signalling
The signal lamp ”Fault” on the manipulated variable desk tile flashes at 2 Hz.

Fault elimination

6--24
e Siemens AG
Page 184 of 719

FB159 KONREG
4 Parameterization
Fig. 14 shows the symbol of the function block KONREG similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring sy-
stem.
CC Symbol: Continuous controller

pic_id 2288 without desk tile
pic_id 2287 with desk tile
Fig. 14: CSF symbol of function block KONREG

6--25
e Siemens AG
Page 185 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Fig. 15: Parameterization form FB159 CC without desk tile

6--26
e Siemens AG
Page 186 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Fig. 16: Parameterization form FB159 CC with desk tile

6--27
e Siemens AG
Page 187 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0
- Reversing of manipulated variable YA (YREV)
- Command direction priority (PBR)
- Ramp-up time (TYH)
- Ramp-down time (TYT)
- Ramp-up time with protection (TYSH)
- Ramp-down time with protection (TYST)
- Delta value with SIMP on manipulated variable adjuster (DLTY)
- Sampling PERIOD for manipulated variable YA (ABZYA)
- Delta band for manipulated variable YA (DELTYA)

6--28
e Siemens AG
Page 188 of 719

FB159 KONREG
Name: TTD
Function: TTD generation
Meaning: 0 = no TTD
1 = generate TTD
CB/CLC = closed-loop control mode
CB/MAN = manual/open-loop control mode
BL/CLC = disable closed-loop control mode
CHOV/FAUL = fault switchover to open-loop control
NO/FAUL = no control drive fault
YO = manipulated variable at upper limit
YU = manipulated variable at lower limit
RMSP/ABEF = disable switchover MANUAL/CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
via automatic commands
IZG = actual status valid
P/SIMR = controller statusword simulated
CB/OPEN = actual status open
CB/Cl = actual status closed
SG/LH = control variable running high
SG/LT = control variable running low
ZES = last status achieved by PROTECTION command
ZEA = last status achieved by AUTOMATIC command
ZEH = last status achieved by MANUAL command
P/SIM = process image simulated
P/SIMA = drive status word simulated
NOAPC = no signalling of protective action
Bit 15 = protective action SA
YA = manipulated variable
FOC = Forcing mode
Basic setting: 0
- Reversing of manipulated variable YA (YREV)
Name: YREV
Function: Defines whether the manipulated variable YA is to be reversed
Meaning: 0 = do not reverse manipulated variable YA
1 = reverse manipulated variable YA
Basic setting: 0
Name: PBR
Function: Defines which command direction has the higher priority
Meaning: 0 = CLOSED before OPEN
1 = OPEN before CLOSED
Basic setting: 0

6--29
e Siemens AG
Page 189 of 719

FB159 KONREG
- Ramp-up time (TYH)
Name: TYH
Function: In operating mode OPEN-LOOP CONTROL, a change in manipulated variable
from 0 % to 100 % is achieved after the time TYH
Range of values: 0 to 65,000
Meaning: 10 = 1 s, 65,000 = 6,500 s
Basic setting: 1000
- Ramp-down time (TYT)
Name: TYT
Function: In operating mode OPEN-LOOP CONTROL, a change in manipulated variable
from 100 % to 0 % is achieved after the time TYT
Meaning: 10 = 1 s, 65,000 = 6,500 s
Basic setting: 1000
- Ramp-up time with protection (TYSH)
Name: TYSH
Function: Following a protection command, a change in manipulated variable from 0 % to
100 % is achieved after the time TYSH
Meaning: 10 = 1 s, 65,000 = 6,500 s
Basic setting: 100
- Ramp-down time with protection (TYST)
Name: TYST
Function: Following a protection command, a change in manipulated variable from 100 % to
0 % is achieved after the time TYST
Meaning: 10 = 1 s, 65,000 = 6,500 s
Basic setting: 100
- Delta value with SIMP on manipulated variable adjuster (DLTY)
Name: DLTY
Function: Change in manipulated variable with a SIMP. Value is set as physical variable
of the nominal range.
Basic setting: 100 %

6--30
e Siemens AG
Page 190 of 719

FB159 KONREG
- Sampling period for manipulated variable YA (ABZYA)
Name: ABZYA
Function: Defines the sampling steps for generation of the TTD
Range of values: 0 to 60,000, adjusting step as multiple of processing cycle
Meaning: 200 = 0.2 s, 60,000 = 60 s
Basic setting: 1s
- Delta band for manipulated variable YA (DELTYA)
Name: DELTYA
Function: A TTD is generated with a change in signal >= delta. Value is set as
physical variable of the nominal range.
Basic setting: 0

6--31
e Siemens AG
Page 191 of 719

FB159 KONREG
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB159

Block name: CC
Version: ________________↑
-- Code 5400 bytes

6--32
e Siemens AG
Page 192 of 719

FB159 KONREG
6 Abbreviations
ASTEW Drive control word
AZUW Drive status word
A/CLC Automatic CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
A/OPEN Automatic OPEN/INCREASE
A/MAN Automatic MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
A/STOP Automatic STOP
A/Cl Automatic CLOSED/DECREASE
BHA Manual CLOSED from desk tile

BHE Manual OPEN from desk tile
BHÖI SIMP OPEN
BHÖP Manual OPEN (from OM)
BHS Manual STOP from desk tile
BHSI SIMP CLOSED
BHSP Manual CLOSED (from OM)
BL/OM Disable serial (OM) input
CB/OP Check-back message (actual status) OPEN

CB/MAN Manual/open-loop control mode
CB/CLC Closed-loop control mode
CB/CL Check-back message (actual status) CLOSED
DELTYA Delta band for manipulated variable YA
EXT/FAUL Fault switchover to MANUAL/O-L CONTROL with external fault from group control level
FB Function block
FHD Enable MANUAL
EN/CLC Process enable CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
EN/OPEN Process enable OPEN/INCREASE (in manual/open-loop control mode)
EN/MAN Process enable MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
EN/Cl Process enable CLOSED/DECREASE (in manual/open-loop control mode)
IZG Actual status valid
KG Channel valid
KRS No controller fault
KSA No signalling of protective action
LADB Data block for lamp signals

LL Lower limit for manipulated variable
LP Test lamps
MHS Signal lamp ”OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”

MLA Signal lamp ”CLOSED”
MLE Signal lamp ”OPEN”

6--33
e Siemens AG
Page 193 of 719

FB159 KONREG
MLS Signal lamp ”FAULT”

MRE Signal lamp ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”
MSA Signalling of protective action CLOSED
MSE Signalling of protective action OPEN
MSPR Signal lamp ”Disable closed-loop control mode or closed-loop control tile”
NS/BRS No serial input for switchover from CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL to MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP

CONTROL
OM Operating and monitoring system
PAA_E Process output image to individual control level (ELE)

PAE_E Process input image from individual control level (ELE)
PBR Command direction priority
RMA Check-back message CLOSED

RME Check-back message OPEN
RMF Check-back fault
RMSP/ABEF Disable automatic commands
RSTEW Control word of closed-loop controller
RZUW Controller status word
SA Signalling of protective action

SAB1 Disable automatic command from OM (for mode switchover)
SBH Serial input OPEN (incl. SIMP etc.)
SBS Serial input STOP Y
SBT Serial input CLOSED (incl. SIMP etc.)
SIM Signal module
SG/LH Manipulated variable increasing
SG/LT Manipulated variable decreasing
SMS Disable signalling of protective action
SPR Disable closed-loop control mode
SQ Collective acknowledgement
STB Disable desk tile input
STU Fault switchover to MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
SWH Increase setpoint from desk tile
SWT Decrease setpoint from desk tile
S/OPEN Protection OPEN from group control level/next higher level
S/Cl Protection CLOSED/DECREASE
S/R Mode switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL -- CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL (serial
input)
TADB Data block for command pushbuttons

TYH Ramp-up time (with manipulated variable adjuster)
TYSH Ramp-up time for protection (with manipulated variable adjuster)
TYT Ramp-down time (with manipulated variable adjuster)
TYST Ramp-down time for protection (with manipulated variable adjuster)
URS Mode switchover CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL -- MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL from

desk tile

6--34
e Siemens AG
Page 194 of 719

FB159 KONREG
WN Target setpoint from OM

WNF Start signal for target setpoint WN (OM)
XS Internal setpoint (following input ramp)
YA Manipulated variable
YO Manipulated variable has reached OG (upper limit)
YU Manipulated variable has reached UG (lower limit)
YN Track manipulated variable with closed-loop controller
YN(OM) Target manipulated variable from OM
YR Manipulated variable at output of closed-loop controller
YREV Reversing of manipulated variable
YR/YN Manipulated variable of closed-loop controller/target manipulated variable
YSTOP Manual STOP from OM
ZEA Last status achieved by AUTOMATIC command

ZEH Last status achieved by MANUAL command
ZES Last status achieved by PROTECTION command

6--35
e Siemens AG
Page 195 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 196 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB153 MOTOR (Control Motor/Solenoid Valve)
ESG---MO
Page 197 of 719

FB153 MOTOR

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

6--2
e Siemens AG
Page 198 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--5

2.1 Motor Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--8
2.2 Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--8
3 Functions of the Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--9

3.1 Command Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--10
3.1.1 Commands from the Serial Input System (OM 650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--11
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Open-loop Control Tile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--11
3.1.3 Commands from the Next Higher Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--12
3.1.4 Command from the Undervoltage Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--12
3.2 Command Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--13
3.3 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--13
3.4 Check-back Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--14
3.4.1 Drive-based Check-back Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--14
3.4.1.1 Plausibility Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--14
3.4.2 Feeder-based Check-back Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--15
3.4.2.1 Check-back Messages ”Switchgear Faulty” (SAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--15
3.4.2.2 Check-back Message ”Feeder Not Ready” (ANB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--15
3.5 Status Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--16
3.5.1 Actual Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--16
3.5.2 Setpoint Status Direction (for Solenoid Valve only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--16
3.5.3 Serial (OM) Control Possible ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--17
3.5.4 Last Status Achieved by ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--17
3.6 Drive Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--18
3.6.1 Undervoltage Monitoring (AC 230 V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--18
3.6.2 Signalling of Protective Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--20
3.6.3 Status Discrepancy Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--21
3.6.4 Run--time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--22
3.6.4.1 Run--time Monitoring -- Total Run Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--22
3.6.4.2 Run--time Monitoring -- Leaving of Limit Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--23
3.6.5 Scanning of Blocking (only with Desk Tile Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--24
3.7 Connections to the SIM Module for Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--25
3.8 Communication (with AP and OM 650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--26
3.8.2 Signalling on OM 650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--26
3.9 Messages and Signals on the Desk Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--29
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--38
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--39
7 Appendix: Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--41

6--3
e Siemens AG
Page 199 of 719

FB153 MOTOR

6--4
e Siemens AG
Page 200 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
1 Application
The drive control for motor/solenoid valve can be carried out in the AS 620 B system using the function block
FB153 in conjunction with the signal modules (SIM) in the ET 200 I/O device.
The follwing input and output signals can be configured for the connection of a motor/solenoid valve:
RME / RMA: Check--back message ON / Check--back message OFF
ALE / ALA: Load switch ON output / Load switch OFF output
SAG / ANB: Switchgear fault / Feeder not ready
KV: Contact power supply
These signals can be input with the voltages +24 V DC and output with the voltage + 24 V DC.
The signals RME, RMA und SAG can be configured as NO contact or “not wired”.
Not wired inputs of the signals are replaced by the function block as follows:
RME = RMA
RMA = RME
In the case of not wired check--back messages the command outputs are used for the generation of
check--back messages:
RME = ALE
RMA = ALA
❏ Motor/solenoid valve drive control

FB153 MOTOR -- Status acquisition
-- Monitoring:
Drive control for Run time, end position, undervoltage
motor/solenoid valve -- Command conditioning (manual signals and
automatic/protection signals)
SIM 323 -- Signalling and indicating
SIM 482 M -- Producing TTDs
Fig. 1: SIM function block FB153 MOTOR and associated module
Please refer to the Operating Instructions AS 620 B (SIM) in the AS 620--S5 System Manual for further
information about signal modules (SIM).

6--5
e Siemens AG
Page 201 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
2 Mode of Operation
The function block FB153 can be used in the AP (automation processor) within a control program. The func-
tion block FB153 communicates with the associated signal modules (SIM) via the PROFIBUS--DP and head
end modules as shown in the following figure.
Control programm
Function block AP
FB153
Drive control
module
SIM 323 / 482
Fig. 2: Overwiew of the function block FB153 with signal modules (SIM)

6--6
e Siemens AG
Page 202 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
The following figure shows the functions which can be executed by the function block FB153.
Desk tile Control word AP Status word TTD Desk tile
Message output and

signalling
Command generation
Command Drive
priority monitoring
Scanning
of
blocking
Command output
Status acquisition
Command section Check-back signal

conditioning/
monitoring
Monitoring
Control command Drive Switchgear

feeder
DRIVE
Check-back
messages
Fig. 3: Software functions of the FB153

6--7
e Siemens AG
Page 203 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
2.1 Motor Drive
Standard Application:
- Switchgear:
Plug-in unit with 2 contactor relays (one per command direction)
1 main contactor
- Latching: in the switchgear
- Limit switch on main contactor: 1 NO contact
In the case of latching in the switchgear the command output may be reset when the check-back message
arrives because of power losses on the module. This function can be parameterized.
“Undervoltage monitoring (AC 230 V)”
Fast switching-off of the main contactor affected by an AC 230 V undervoltage can be achieved together with
an external undervoltage monitoring function, thus preventing charring of the contacts as a result of the smal-
ler contact pressure. The drive is restarted automatically if the voltage returns within a parameterizable maxi-
mum permissible failure time.
The drive remains switched-off if the power failure is present for longer than the permissible failure time, and
the message “Undervoltage protective action” is sent. The function additionally permits the staggered
starting-up of drives supplied from the same AC 230 V busbar when the voltage returns. It is thus possible to
prevent an overload on the busbar. The staggering times can be parameterized.
The check-back messages are generated by an NO contact of the main contactor. The actual statuses for
the displays and messages are derived from these.
2.2 Solenoid Valve
- Switchgear:
Plug-in unit with 2 contactor relays,
1 main contactor
or 2 contactor relays
or 1 contactor relay
1 main contactor
- Limit switches: 1 NO contact on the main contactor or

1 NO contact on the valve
In the case of the versions where the switchgear becomes latched, the control command can be reset on the
module according to parameterization when the check-back message arrives.
The control command is permanently output by the module (parameterizable) in the case of switchgear
without latching. In this case, a change in the command output only takes place with the countercommand.
The logic functions correspond to those of a motor drive. Applications exist where only one contactor relay is
connected to the command output ON.

6--8
e Siemens AG
Page 204 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3 Functions of the Drive Control
Enable Desk tile OM

Input
and User
interface
signalling
BHA MLA
BHE MLE
MLS
SIM 323
SIM 482 SIM 323 / 482
ET200U
Automatic, controller,
Desk tile control
protective interlock
LADB TADB
Function block FB 153 MOTOR
Processing of
AP control functions
Control
Drive control module
SIM 323/482 and
check--back
ET 200U
SAG RMA, RMNA ALE

ANB RME, RMNE ALA
KV
Switchgear
Fig. 4: Structure of MOTOR drive control with function blocks (signal names: see Chap. 6 Abbreviations)

6--9
e Siemens AG
Page 205 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.1 Command Generation
There are three types of command:
- Manual commands
- Automatic commands
- Protection commands
Different enabling criteria, e.g. process enable, manual enable, are required before a command becomes
effective and depend on the type and priority of the command.
All commands apart from manual commands from the desk tile are input via the control word.
Seriel Desk tile Higher--level Undervoltage

input system Automatic monitoring
OM 650 system (AS 620) function
Manual enable
MANUAL MANUAL AUTOM ATIC PROTECTION
Enable logik (Process enable)
Priority logic
(1. before 2. before 3. before 4.)
1. Protection commands
2. Automatic commands
3. Manual commands from ”OM650” or ”Desk tile”
4. Autom. reclosing command following undervoltage
Command output
Effective
control command
Drive
Fig. 5: Overview of the command generation and priority for the drive (simplified)

6--10
e Siemens AG
Page 206 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.1.1 Commands from the Serial Input System (OM 650)
Manual ON
Manual OFF
A command entered via OM 650 only becomes valid when the corresponding process enable (F/EIN; F/AUS)
in the PAA_E process image is present.
. Note
The OM 650 input can be blocked by setting the bit ”Disable serial (OM) input” in
the control word.
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Open-loop Control Tile)
Manual ON
Manual OFF
In addition to the corresponding process enable (F/EIN; F/AUS) in the control word, the module requires the
manual enable (signal FHD) so that the commands sent from the desk tile become valid.
Manual commands are generated with the positive edge of the hardware signal.
. Note
The manual enable pushbutton must be activated simultaneously with the
respective command pushbutton.
. Note
Control from the desk tile can be blocked by setting the bit ”Disable desk tile input”
in the control word.

6--11
e Siemens AG
Page 207 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.1.3 Commands from the Next Higher Level
Automatic ON
Automatic OFF
The commands from the higher-level automatic system ”Automatic ON” and ”Automatic OFF” are transmitted
like the required process enable with the control word.
Protection ON
Protection OFF
The protection commands Protection ON and Protection OFF are transmitted with the control word and do
not require a process enable.
In conjunction with the protection commands, the bit “Disable signalling of protective action” can be
transmitted in the control word. The result is that an executed protection command need not be
acknowledged.
3.1.4 Command from the Undervoltage Monitoring Function
Undervoltage protection OFF
The protection command ”Undervoltage protection OFF” (UA) immediately switches off the drive in the event
of an undervoltage.
This arrives via the control word as “ULS”.
The protection command UA does not require a process enable. As long as this command is present, all
other current or arriving commands are suppressed.

6--12
e Siemens AG
Page 208 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.2 Command Priorities

Fig. 6 lists the types of command according to their priority, where the control command with the highest prio-
rity is at the top.
Undervoltage protection UA Undervoltage protection OFF
Protection commands Protection OFF
Protection ON
Automatic commands Automatic OFF
Automatic ON
Manual commands Manual OFF
Manual ON
Automatic restart following undervoltage

(ON command)
. Note
The priority OFF before ON can be reversed using the parameter PBR (priority of
command direction).
3.3 Command Output

The command output function outputs the control command.
With the parameter BAV the user specifies the command output versions:
BAV = 0 —> Reset of the switch command when reaching the limit position
BAV = 1 —> Continuous command (no reset of the switch command when reaching
the limit position)
BAV = 2 -- 4 see Chap. 4
. Note
With valves which must be opened in case of module failure and malfunction
generation in order to protect the installation or a part of it, the inverted command
must be realized by configuring of an ESG for motor/solenoid valve
(HW connection).
Here, the following requirements must be met:
-- The triggering of the valve must be done via the output ALA (OFF).
-- As ESG operating mode maintained command has to be configured i.e.
the parameter BAV must be set to 1, inverting (parameter BAV = 0) must not
be present, and command termination effected via check--back messages is
not allowed.

6--13
e Siemens AG
Page 209 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.4 Check-back Messages
3.4.1 Drive-based Check-back Messages
The objective of the conditioning/monitoring of check-back signals (travel limit) is to provide information on
the actual state of the drive as quickly as possible and as accurately as possible. The signals from the travel
limit switches are monitored for this purpose.
Unavoidable bounce occurs when switching the limit switches. The bounce may last up to 300 ms. The
signals from the limit switches must therefore be delayed so that unintentional triggering of the monitoring
equipment does not occur during the bounce phase.
If the limit positions are not monitored (feeders without check-back messages), the missing check-back
signals are derived from the command output.
If only one limit position is monitored with check--back contacts, the position that is not monitored (ON or
OFF) is derived from the one--sided acquired check--back message.
3.4.1.1 Plausibility Check
The check-back signals RME and RMA are monitored for plausibility.
In addition it can also be parameterized if a plausibility check of double ”0” signal is made for a detection with
NO contacts.
Both check-back messages have ”1” signals
D Effects on status word

The bit “No feeder fault” is reset. With a double ”1” signal, the following bits are set:
-- Check-back message (actual status) ON
-- Check-back message (actual status) OFF
D Effects on time--tagged data
The following signal TTDs are generated if the respective status bit of the drive is parameterized
as a TTD:
-- No feeder fault
-- Check-back message (actual status) ON or
The cause is signalled as a fault TTD:
-- Check-back fault 1 (RMF1) ON or
-- Check-back fault 1 (RMF1) OFF
D Effects on further internal processing
The check-back fault RMF1
-- Blocks the command output
-- Blocks all signalling of protective action
-- Blocks the output of status discrepancies dependent on the direction.
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the signal lamp” Fault” flashes at 2 Hz. The signal lamps ”ON” or ”OFF”
lights up according to the actual statuses in the status word.
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2 Hz. In the detail window and LT--MFA a
message text is indicated (see Manual OM 650 Process Control).

Repair (removal of the invalid check--back)

6--14
e Siemens AG
Page 210 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.4.2 Feeder-based Check-back Messages
3.4.2.1 Check-back Messages ”Switchgear Faulty” (SAG)
The fault is detected via the HW input of the SIM module (SAG).
D Effects on the status word

The bit “No feeder fault” is reset.

The following signal TTDs are generated provided the respective status bit of the drive has been
parameterized as a TTD:
-- No feeder fault
-- Switchgear fault

-- Resets the command memory
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the signal lamp ”Fault” flashes at 2 Hz.
- Reset condition
Repair (removal of the switchgear fault)
3.4.2.2 Check-back Message ”Feeder Not Ready” (ANB)
Switchgear plug-in in test position. The input ANB is not set.

The bit “Feeder ready” is reset.

The following signal TTD is generated provided the respective status bit of the drive has been
-- Feeder ready

None
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the signal lamp ”Faulty” lights up permanently.
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph frame blue. In the detail window a message text is
indicated (see Manual OM 650 Process Control).
- Reset condition
Reset of test position (restore operating position of insert switchgear).

6--15
e Siemens AG
Page 211 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.5 Status Acquisition
Check---back message (actual status) / System status
Setpoint status direction
Serial (OM) control possible ...
Last status achieved by ... Manual / Automatic / Protection
3.5.1 Actual Status
Check---back message (actual status) ON (CB/ON)
Check---back message (actual status) OFF (CB/OFF)
The actual status of the drive is used by the respective check-back signals which are generated by the
check-back signal conditioning function and are valid.
The actual status is made available via the status word, and is displayed on the tile signal lamps in the case
of desk tile inputs.
OM 650 indication is made by colour change of the associated pictograph frame and by check--back of OFF /
ON in the detail window.
3.5.2 Setpoint Status Direction (for Solenoid Valve only)
The information ”Setpoint status” is derived from the control commands output by the function block. The
information ”Setpoint status” is deleted if the drive has reached the limit position defined by the control
command.
The signal ”Setpoint status direction” is required to display the movement and the direction from one limit
position to the other on the OM 650 and desk tile (if present).
This results in:
Setpoint status direction ON (DS/ON)
Setpoint status direction OFF (DS/OFF)
The Setpoint status is made available via the status word, and is displayed on the tile signal lamps in the ca-
se of desk tile inputs.

6--16
e Siemens AG
Page 212 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.5.3 Serial (OM) Control Possible ...
The function block signals to the serial (OM) input system those commands, as far as the drive is concerned,
which are possible as a result of the status acquisition or are necessary as a result of the triggered drive mo-
nitoring functions (for control tracking in the OM 650). The corresponding bits are then set in the status word.
In the OM 650 operation window the associated control pushbutton is displayed in blue colour (control possi-
ble).
Serial (OM) control possible ON (SCON)
Serial (OM) control possible OFF (SCOFF)
Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement (SCA)
3.5.4 Last Status Achieved by ...
The information “Last status achieved by” indicates the reason for achievement of the last status (protection,
automatic or manual), and is made available via the status word. If a status discrepancy is present, no
information is output on achievement of the last status.
Cause of change in status: Last status achieved by:
Manual ON, STOP, OFF MANUAL

Automatic ON, STOP, OFF AUTOMATIC
Protection ON, OFF, UA PROTECTION
Restart following undervoltage No message
Status discrepancy No message

6--17
e Siemens AG
Page 213 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.6 Drive Monitoring
3.6.1 Undervoltage Monitoring (AC 230 V)
If an undervoltage limit signal is present, a command ”Undervoltage protection OFF” (UA) is generated which
immediately switches off a switched-on drive. A monitoring time (parameter TUM: Max. undervoltage time)
is started at the same time. The drive can be automatically restarted if the undervoltage limit signal disap-
pears within this time.
The drives can be staggered when restarting to prevent overloading of the busbar, i.e. a switch-on delay
time can be set for each drive using the parameter TWS. If a switch-on delay is parameterized, the control
command ”UA” is only cancelled following expiry of this delay time in the undervoltage monitoring function,
and restarting is then enabled.
TimeUGS < TUM TimeUGS > TUM
TUM TUM
UGS UGS
UA UA
MOTOR TWS MOTOR

ON ON
automatic
restarting
Fig. 7: Undervoltage monitoring: Influence of parameters TUM and TWS
. Note
Restarting has the lowest priority and only takes place if no commands with a higher
priority are present (see Section 3.2 ”Command Priorities”).
. Note
In the case of simultaneous switchgear fault (SAG) the command memory is reset.
No automatic restarting occurs.

The signal “UGS” arrives via the control word.

6--18
e Siemens AG
Page 214 of 719

FB153 MOTOR

Within the permissible undervoltage time (parameter TUM):
The following bits are set:
-- “Check--back message (actual status) OFF”
-- “Undervoltage time running” (only with drives which were previously ON)
-- “Last status achieved by PROTECTION” (only with drives which were previously ON)
-- “Undervoltage limit signal” (also with drives which were previously OFF)
Following expiry of the permissible undervoltage time:
The following bits remain set or are set:
-- “Last status achieved by PROTECTION”
-- “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” (omitted with disabling of serial input)
The bits “No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action” (omitted with disabling of sig-
nalling of protective action) and “Undervoltage time running” are reset.

-- Check--back message (actual status) OFF
-- Last status achieved by PROTECTION
-- Undervoltage time running
-- Undervoltage limit signal
Following expiry of the parameterized permissible undervoltage time:
-- No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action
-- Undervoltage protective action OFF

Within the permissible undervoltage time:
If the undervoltage limit signal disappears within the parameterized permissible undervoltage
time, the bit “Last status achieved by PROTECTION” is reset.
The command ”Undervoltage protection OFF” UA deletes the ON command memory following
expiry of the parameterized permissible undervoltage time, sets the OFF command memory
and generates the message “Status discrepancy or signalling of protective action”.
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the display is as with “Status discrepancy from ON to OFF” (see Chap.
3.7). Within the permissible undervoltage time OM 650 displays the associated pictograph (OFF)
white. During this process the detail window shows a message text . Afterwards these signallings
are removed (signal UGS has disappeared).
No signalling occurs in LT--MFA.
Following expiry of the permissible undervoltage time OM 650 displays the associated picto-
graph at red/2Hz (Fault). After this process the detail window and the LT--MFA show a message
text (see Manual OM 650 Process Control).

D Within the parameterized permissible undervoltage time:
-- Return of control voltage
D Following expiry of the parameterized permissible undervoltage time:
-- Acknowledgement on OM 650 (omitted with disabling of serial (OM) input)
-- Acknowledgement -- automatic common acknowledgement (control word)
-- Acknowledgement on desk tile (omitted with disabling of desk tile input).
With desk tile inputs, acknowledgements are carried out using the OFF pushbutton (without
enable pushbutton).

6--19
e Siemens AG
Page 215 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.6.2 Signalling of Protective Action
The message “Status discrepancy or signalling of protective action” can be blocked using the bit “SP/MS”
(disable signalling of protective action) in the control word.

The drive has been switched on or off by means of a protection command from the next--higher lev-
el, or it has been switched off because of an undervoltage and restarting could not take place within
the permissible undervoltage time.

The bit “No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action” is reset (omitted with disabling
of signalling of protective action).
-- “Check--back message (actual status) OFF” or “Check--back message (actual
status) ON”
-- “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement”.

-- No feeder fault
-- Check--back message (actual status) OFF or
-- Check--back message (actual status) ON
-- Protective action ON or
-- Protective action OFF

Blocks the command channel in the opposite direction.
D Signalling (omitted with disabling of signalling of protective action)

With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed depending on the direction (see Chap. 3.7).
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2Hz (Fault).
The detail window shows a message text. No signalling occurs in LT--MFA.
In OP--MFA a message text is displayed (see Manual OM 650 Process Control).
- Reset condition (omitted with disabling of signalling of protective action)

D Acknowledgement on OM 650 (omitted with disabling of serial (OM) input)
D Acknowledgement -- automatic common acknowledgement (control word)
D Acknowledgement on desk tile (omitted with disabling of desk tile input).
With desk tile inputs, the command pushbutton (without enable pushbutton) which corresponds to
the current position of the drive is used for the acknowledgement.

6--20
e Siemens AG
Page 216 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.6.3 Status Discrepancy Monitoring
A status discrepancy is present if the actual status changes without a corresponding command (actual status
¸ command memory). It is assumed that the new actual position has been signalled by non--faulty
check-back messages.
A status discrepancy is not generated if a check-back fault is present.
The status discrepancy monitoring function can be disabled by appropriate parameterization
(parameter WEF).
The following table shows when a status discrepancy is generated following a change in position without a
command.
Actual position Status discrepancy

Before After Status discrep. Status discrep. Status
(setpoint position in from OFF to from ON to discrep.
reference memory) ON (EFAnE) OFF (EFEnA) (EF)
Actual pos. OFF Actual pos. ON Yes Yes

Actual pos. ON Actual pos. OFF Yes Yes
Actual pos. OFF Intermediate position * Yes Yes

Actual pos. ON Intermediate position * Yes Yes
* only if check--back message contacts are parameterized without double--”0” monitoring
Fig. 8: Status discrepancies

Deviation of check-back message for the actual position of the drive from the setpoint position
stored in the reference memory.

The bit “No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action” as well as all bits “Last status
achieved by ...” are reset. The bit “Serial (OM) input acknowledgement” is set. If the drive is at a
limit position, the bits “Actual status ON or OFF” are also set.

-- Status discrepancy from OFF to ON or
-- Status discrepancy from ON/ to OFF

Disables the original command direction.
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed dependent on the direction (see Chap. 3.7).
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2Hz. The detail window and LT--MFA show a
message text (see Manual OM 650 Process Control).

6--21
e Siemens AG
Page 217 of 719

FB153 MOTOR

D Acknowledgement on desk tile (omitted with disabling of desk tile input)
The acknowledgement is carried out using the command pushbutton (without enable
pushbutton) which corresponds to the current position of the drive
D No deviation between setpoint and actual position (fault no longer present).
3.6.4 Run--time Monitoring
The run time monitoring function comprises two monitoring functions:
- Monitoring of max. permissible total run time

- Monitoring the leaving of a limit position.
3.6.4.1 Run--time Monitoring -- Total Run Time
This function is used to monitor the switching procedure from the time of command output up to the arrival of
the valid check-back message from the desired position.
The switching time can be parameterized using the parameter TGL (total run time of drive) and is the same
for both command directions.

Violation of the run time set for the drive between command output and the check-back message
valid for this direction.The monitoring function is only triggered if a check-back fault is not present in
the command direction.
The bits “No run time/blocking” and ”Setpoint status, running direction ON or OFF” are reset. The
bit “Serial control possible acknowledgement” is set.
The following signal TTDs are generated providing the respective status bit of the drive is para-
meterized as a TTD:
-- No run time/blocking
-- Run time violation, total
Disables the display for direction of travel.
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is additionally displayed dependent on the direction
(see Chap. 3.7). OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2Hz. The detail window and
LT--MFA show a message text (see Manual OM 650 Process Control).

Acknowledgement is only possible if the original input command is no longer present.
D Acknowledgement -- automatic common acknowledgement
With desk tile inputs, the command pushbutton (without enable pushbutton) which corresponds
to the current position of the drive is used for the acknowledgement
D Limit position is still reached.

6--22
e Siemens AG
Page 218 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.6.4.2 Run--time Monitoring -- Leaving of Limit Position
This monitoring function monitors leaving of the limit position starting at the time the command is output.

The monitoring function is activated if a control command is output and the original (old) limit posi-
tion has not yet been left. The monitoring function is not started if a check-back fault is present in
the opposite command direction. A run time error is generated if the limit position has not been left
within the parameterized run time TVE.

The bits “No run time/blocking” and ”Setpoint status in ON or OFF direction” are reset. The bit
“Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” is set.

The following signal TTDs (Fig. 11) are generated provided the respective status bit of the drive
is parameterized as a TTD:
-- Run--time violation, leaving of limit position

-- The status command remains active.
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed dependent on the direction (see Fig. 12).
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2Hz. The detail window and LT--MFA show a
message text (see Manual OM 650 Process Control).
- Reset condition of monitoring

to the current position of the drive is used for the acknowledgement.

6--23
e Siemens AG
Page 219 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.6.5 Scanning of Blocking (only with Desk Tile Input)
By pressing the command pushbutton ON or OFF on the open-loop control tile without an enable
pushbutton, the operator can determine whether the desired command direction is enabled for manual
control.
The signal lamp ”Fault” lights up permanently if blocking is present.
- Triggering conditions in ON direction

D Process enable PFE missing
D Protection command present in OFF direction
D Automatic command present in OFF direction
D ”Undervoltage protection OFF” (UA) present
- Triggering conditions in OFF direction

D Process enable PFA missing
D Protection command present in ON direction
D Automatic command present in ON direction

None

None

None
- Reset condition
Release desk tile pushbutton

6--24
e Siemens AG
Page 220 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.7 Connections to the SIM Module for Drive Control
Control program
Function block AP
FB153
Switchgear fault E
Branch not E
operational
RM OFF E
RM ON E Module
SIM 482
A
M
Command OFF A
M
Command ON A
Channel 1
E = Input terminals of the module

A = Output terminals of the module
RM = Check--back message
Fig. 9: Connections to module SIM 482 as drive for 1 motor (up to a maximum of 4 motors possible)

6--25
e Siemens AG
Page 221 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.8 Communication (with AP and OM 650)
Data exchange with the block is carried out using the control word and status word.
control levels. The time stamp of the time--tagged data has a resolution of 1 ms.
- Signal TTD
Parameters can be set to select special signals that are required in the process control level for message
output and logging in addition to the check--back messages. These signals are generated on the SIM
module.
- Fault TTD
events (faults) recognized by the monitoring equipment, such as e.g. input or output signal monitoring
functions.
3.8.2 Signalling on OM 650
Signal TTDs and fault TTDs are used in the OM 650:

-- to update the pictographs of plant displays as well as buttons/texts in operation windows
-- to display message texts in detail windows, message sequences, and loggings.
Please refer to the Chapter “Individual Motor Drive Controller” or “Individual Drive Controller for Solenoid Val-
ves” in the Manual OM 650 Process Control for further information about the displays on OM 650 (picto-
graphs, input pushbuttons, signallings and message texts).

6--26
e Siemens AG
Page 222 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
ABBREVI-
BIT DATA WORD SUBSYSTEM DESIGNATION ATION
Status word (PAE_E process image)
0 Status bit Check---back message (act. status) ON CB/ON
1 Check---back mes. (act. status) OFF CB/OFF
2 Setpoint status in ON direction DS/ON
3 Setpoint status in OFF direction DS/OFF
EB0 4 Last status achieved by PROTECTION ZES
5 Last status achieved by AUTOMATIC ZEA
6 Last status achieved by MANUAL ZEH
7 Undervoltage time running USZ
0 Undervoltage limit signal ULS

1 Serial (OM) control possible ON SCON
2 Serial (OM) control possible OFF SCOFF
3 Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement SCA
EB1 4 Feeder ready AZB
5 No status discrep. or signalling of prot. action NOSD
6 No feeder fault NOFF
7 No run time/blocking KLB
Status bit
Control word (PAA_E process image)

3 Status bit Collective acknowledgement SQ
4 Disable (OM) serial input BL/OM
AB0 5 Disable desk tile input BL/DT
6 Lamp test LP*
7 Disable signalling of protective action BL/AP
0 Automatic ON A/ON
1 Automatic OFF A/OFF
4 Protection ON P/ON
AB1
5 Protection OFF P/OFF
6 Process enable ON EN/ON
7 Status bit Process enable OFF EN/OFF
Fig. 10: Data of process image, motor/solenoid valve/switchgear

* Only with desk tile

6--27
e Siemens AG
Page 223 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
Signal TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation
Check--back message (actual status) ON CB/ON
Check--back message (actual status) OFF CB/OFF
Setpoint status in ON direction DS/ON
Setpoint status in OFF direction DS/OFF
Undervoltage time running USZ
Undervoltage limit signal ULS
Feeder ready AZB
No status discrep. or signalling of protective action NOSD
No feeder fault NOF
No run time/blocking KLB
Fault TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation
Status discrepancy from OFF to ON EFAE

Status discrepancy from ON to OFF EFEA
Run--time violation on leaving of limit position LZV
Run--time violation, total LZG
Switchgear fault SAF
Protective action ON MSE
Protective action OFF MSA
Check-back fault 1 ON RMF1E
Check-back fault 1 OFF RMF1A
Undervoltage protective action OFF MUSA
Fig. 11: Time--tagged data, motor/solenoid valve/switchgear

6--28
e Siemens AG
Page 224 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
3.9 Messages and Signals on the Desk Tile
The signal lamps ”ON”, ”OFF” and ”Fault” on the open-loop control tile indicate:
- Actual statuses with steady light
- Setpoint statuses in running direction (only with solenoid valve with two changeover contacts) with
flashing light (8 Hz)
- Faults with flashing light (2 Hz).

If ”Disable desk tile input” is present, the signal lamp ”Fault” is on permanently. There are no other fault
displays in addition. The actual and setpoint statuses are still signalled as described above. Lamp testing has
to be configured via ES at the input LP of the ESG modul.
Signal representation Meaning

Actual position
OFF ON
OFF Fault ON OFF Fault ON
Normal position OFF/ON
Run in setpoint direction OPEN
Run in setpoint direction OPEN

check--back fault
Status discrepancy
Run time
Double 0 check--back fault
SIM module faulty
m.c.b. assembly tripped or check--back error
Block inquiry
Lamp test (o.k.)
OFF Steady ON 2 Hz blinking 8 Hz flickering
OFF = signal lamp ”OFF” Fault = signal lamp ”Fault” ON = signal lamp ”ON”
Fig. 12: Signal representation at the desk tile, drive control Motor/solenoid valve/switchgear with desk tile input

6--29
e Siemens AG
Page 225 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
4 Parameterization
The parameters of the function block MOTVENTR are generated by the configuring system ES 680. The pa-
rameters can be configured via convenient parameterization forms (see Fig. 14 and Fig. 15).
Fig. 13 shows the symbol of the function block motor/solenoid valve similar to the symbol in the ES 680 con-
figuring system.
ESG---MO Symbol: Drive control module motor, solenoid valve

TXP--specific module SIM, FB153
Fig. 13: CSF symbol of function block motor/solenoid valve

6--30
e Siemens AG
Page 226 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
Fig. 14: Parameterization form FB153 -- motor without desk tile

6--31
e Siemens AG
Page 227 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
Fig. 15: Parameterization form FB153 -- motor with desk tile

6--32
e Siemens AG
Page 228 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

- Channel assignment (BEL)
- Command output versions (BAV)
- Max. undervoltage time (TUM)
- Stagger time for restart (TWS)
- Check-back contact Travel limit ON (RWE)
- Check-back contact Travel limit OFF (RWA)
- Effect of check-back fault (WE) on command execution (WRBxxx)
- Effect of status discrepancy (WEFxxx)
- Total run time (TGL)
- Time for leaving of limit position (TVE)
- Command generation version (BBV) irrelevant

6--33
e Siemens AG
Page 229 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
Name: BEL
Function: Defines the assignment of the SIM block
BEL is generated by the ES depending on the function diagram pictograph
“MOTOR/SOLENOID VALVE” or “MOTOR/SOLENIOD VALVE with desk tile”
as selected by the user.
Meaning: 1 = motor, solenoid valve, switchgear without desk tile input
2 = motor, solenoid valve, switchgear with desk tile input
Basic setting: 1
Name: PBR
Function: Defines the priority of the command direction
Range of values: cmd. priority: off / on
cmd. priority: on / off
Basic setting: cmd. priority: off / on
Name: BAV
Function: Defines: -- Command output as permanent command
-- Logic of command output (inversion)
Range of values: pers.cmd:N -- inv.:N
pers.cmd:Y -- inv.:N
pers.cmd:N -- inv.:Y
pers.cmd:Y -- inv.:Y
Basic setting: pers.cmd:N -- inv.:N
Name: TUM
Function: Defines the max. permissible voltage failure time for automatic
restarting.
Meaning: 0 = 0 s (no restart)
10,000 = 1,000 s
Basic setting: 0; adjusting steps: 0.1 s

6--34
e Siemens AG
Page 230 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
Name: TWS
Function: Defines the time by which the automatic restart is delayed
(stagger times)
Meaning: 0 = 0 s (no stagger time)
10,000 = 1,000 s

Name: RWE
Function: Defines whether the ON check-back message of the controlled drive can be
detected, and with which type of switch
Range of values: 0:No detection / monitoring
1:Detect. through NO contact
3:as 1; howev.only monitoring for double 0
Basic setting: 1:Detect. through NO contact
Name: RWA
Function: Defines whether the OFF check-back message of the controlled drive can be
- Effect of Check-back message WE on command execution (WRBxxx)
Name: WRBHAEA
WRBHAAZ
WRBSEA
WRBSAZ
Function: Defines whether commands are to be executed with a check-back fault RMF1 in
the command direction
Range of values: blocked
not blocked
Meaning: WRBHAEA=check--back fault does not block MANUAL/AUTOMATIC ON
WRBHAAZ=check--back fault does not block MANUAL/AUTOMATIC OFF
WRBSEA=check--back fault does not block PROTECTION ON
WRBSAZ=check--back fault does not block PROTECTION OFF
Basic setting: blocked

6--35
e Siemens AG
Page 231 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
- Effect of status discrepancy/monitoring (WEFxxx)
Name: WEFSPERR
WEFNSEA
WEFNSAZ
Function: Defines whether limits are monitored and the effects of a detected status
discrepancy
Range of values: not blocked
blocked
Meaning: WEFSPERR=status discrepancy monitoring
WEFNSEA=status discrepancy blocks PROTECTION ON command
WEFNSAZ=status discrepancy blocks PROTECTION OFF command
Basic setting: not blocked
- Total drive run time (TGL)
Name: TGL
Function: Defines the total run time of the drive between the limit positions
(only with RME or RMA = 3)
Meaning: 0 = no run time monitoring
60,000 = 6,000 s
Basic setting: 10 = 1 s; adjusting steps: 1 s

Name: TVE
Function: Defines the time in which the drive must have left the limit position after a
command output
Range of values: 0 bis 600
600 = 60 s
- Command generation version (BBV)

Name: BBV
Function: irrrelevant

6--36
e Siemens AG
Page 232 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
Name: TTD
Function: Defines whether TTDs are generated
1 = generate TTD
CB/ON = check--back message (actual status) ON
CB/OFF = check--back message (actual status) OFF
DS/ON = setpoint status ON (only with solenoid valve)
DS/OFF = setpoint status OFF (with 2 changeover contacts)
UZS = undervoltage time running
ULS = undervoltage limit signal
AZB = feeder ready
NOSD = no status discrepancy or signalling of protective action
NOFF = no feeder fault
KLB = no run time/blocking
Basic setting: All bits = 0

6--37
e Siemens AG
Page 233 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB153

Block name: MOTOR
Version: ________________↑
Average run time: 130 ms (condition: no signal change, no fault status)
typ. 370 ms
-- Code 6300 bytes
(AP) within the system environment for SIM/protection

6--38
e Siemens AG
Page 234 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
6 Abbreviations
ANB Feeder not ready

AZB Feeder ready
A/ON Automatic command ON
A/OFF Automatic command OFF
BAV Command output version

BBV Command generation version
BHA Manual command OFF
BHE Manual command ON
BL/AP Disable signalling of protective action
BL/DT Disable desk tile input
CB/OFF Check-back message OFF

CB/ON Check-back message ON
DW Data word
DS/OFF Setpoint status OFF
DS/ON Setpoint status ON
EFAE Status discrepancy from OFF to ON

EFEA Status discrepancy from ON to OFF
EIZ Detection of actual status
EN/OFF Process enable OFF
EN/ON Process enable ON
FB Function block
FHD Process enable Manual
KLB No run time/blocking

KV Contact supply

LP Lamp test
LZB Run time/blocking
LZV Run--time violation, leaving of limit position
MLA Signal lamp OFF

MLE Signal lamp ON
MLS Signal lamp FAULT
MSA Protective action in OFF direction
MSE Protective action in ON direction
MUSA Message for undervoltage protective action OFF
NOFF No feeder fault

NOSD No status discrepancy

6--39
e Siemens AG
Page 235 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
PAA_E Process image of outputs to individual control level (status wort)

PAE_E Process image of inputs from individual control level (status wort)
PBR Priority of command direction
PON Protection ON
P/OFF Protection OFF
P/ON Protection ON
RMA Check-back message OFF

RME Check-back message ON
RMF1A Check-back fault OFF, travel
RMF1E Check-back fault ON, travel
SAG Switchgear fault

SCOFF Serial control possible OFF
SCON Serial control possible ON
SCA Serial control possible acknowledgement
SIM Signal module
TA Pushbutton
TAAUS Command pushbutton OFF
TAEIN Command pushbutton ON
TGL Total run time of drive

TUM Undervoltage time
TVE Time for leaving of limit position
TWS Time for staggered restarting
UA Undervoltage protection OFF/STOP

ULS Undervoltage limit signal
USZ Undervoltage time running
WEF Effect of status discrepancy

WRB Effect of check-back faults on command execution
ZEA Last status achieved by automatic command

ZEH Last status achieved by manual command
ZES Last status achieved by protection command

6--40
e Siemens AG
Page 236 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
7 Appendix: Circuit Diagrams

Fig. 16 Drive, command generation
Fig. 17 Command generation, manual commands
Fig. 18 Overview command output (simplified)
Fig. 19 Drive, fault signal generation
Automatic commands
A/OFF
& OFF
EN/OFF
A/ON
& & ON
EN/ON
Manual commands
from OM
OM OFF
& OFF
EN/OFF
OM ON
& & ON
EN/ON
SP/OM
Manual commands
from desk tile
DESK TILE OFF
FHD OFF
EN/OFF
&
DESK TILE ON
FHD & & ON
EN/ON
SP/TF
Legend:
A = Automatic, EN = Process enable
FHD = Manual input enable SP/TF = Disable desk tile input
SP/OM = Disable OM input
Fig. 16: Drive, command generation

6--41
e Siemens AG
Page 237 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
approx. 20ms
Manual commands
from OM
Manual
commands
>1
Manual commands &

from desk tile
Manual commands (OFF or ON) are input via OM or desk tile
If a manual command from the desk tile is present and a Manual command
from OM is input simultaneously, then the last present command is output.
In this case the hardware signal of an OM command always consists of a short pulse.
Fig. 17: Command generation, manual commands

6--42
e Siemens AG
Page 238 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
Command OUTPUT
memory Load switch
UNDERVOLT.PROTECT. ”OFF”
”OFF” (AL)
Priority
PROTECTION-- logic ”OFF”
AUTOMATIC--”OFF” ALA
MANUAL--
S ”OFF”
>1 R
RESTARTING
Command
PROTECTION-- memory
AUTOMATIC--”ON”
MANUAL-- ”ON”
Parameter PBR ”ON” ALE
”OFF before ON”/ S ”ON”
”ON before OFF”
>1 R
No Fault 1
Check--back message ”OFF”

Parameter BAV &
”NO CONTINUOUS
COMMAND”
Check--back message ”ON”

Parameter BAV &
”NO CONTINUOUS
COMMAND”
Fig. 18: Overview command output (simplified)

6--43
e Siemens AG
Page 239 of 719

FB153 MOTOR
Plausibility/RM fault
feeder fault
>1
Switchgear faulty
Monitoring of status discrepancy

Undervolt.prot. OFF Status discrepancy Fault
>1 >1 >1
Protection ON/OFF
&
Block/MS Connection
Run time error and display
Total run time violated in OM 650
Time for leaving of limit position overrun >1
Connection in AS 620
Fig. 19: Drive, fauft signal generation

6--44
e Siemens AG
Page 240 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 241 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB163 MOTVENTR (Control Motor/Solenoid Valve, configurable)
DCM MO
Page 242 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

7--2
e Siemens AG
Page 243 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4
2.1 Motor Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--5
2.2 Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--6

3.1.1 Commands from the Serial Input System (OM 650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Open--loop Control Tile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
3.1.3 Commands from the Next--Higher Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
3.1.4 Commands from the Local Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
3.3 Addidional Features with Parameter RMS “Tag--Out YES” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--12
3.3.1 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--12
3.3.2 FORCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--12
3.3.3 TAG--OUT (Disable Command Logic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--13
3.3.4 Behavior in the event of a fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--13
3.4 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--14
3.5.2.2 Check-back Message ”Feeder Not Ready” (ANB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--17
3.6.1 Actual Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--18
3.6.2 Setpoint Status Direction (for Solenoid Valve only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--18
3.7.4.1 Run--time Monitoring -- Total Run Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--25
3.7.4.2 Run--time Monitoring -- Leaving of Limit Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--26
3.8 Connections to SIM Modules for Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--28
3.9 Communication (with AP and OM 650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--29
3.9.1 Time--tagged Data (TTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--29
3.9.2 Signalling on OM 650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--29
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--43
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--44

7--3
e Siemens AG
Page 244 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
1 Application
The drive control for motor/solenoid valve can be carried out in the AS 620 B system using the function block
FB163 in conjunction with the the signal modules (SIM) in the ET 200 I/O device.
The follwing input and output signals can be configured for the connection of a motor/solenoid valve:
FB/ON , FB/OFF: Check--back message ON , Check--back message OFF
ALE / ALA: Load switch ON output / Load switch OFF output
SAG / ANB: Switchgear fault / Feeder not ready
KV: Contact power supply
These signals can be input with the voltages +24 V DC, +115 V DC, 115 V AC, + 230 V DC and 230 V AC
(according to the module used) and output with the voltages + 24 V DC, 115 V AC and 230 V AC
The signals FB/ON, FB/OFF und SAG can be configured as NO/NC contact.
The corresponding Signal Modules (SIM) offer free allocation of the inputs and outputs (configurable).
Instead of direct allocation to SIM I/O modules, preprocessing o r further processing of the inputs and
outputs via logic is also possible. This is called decoupling.
SAG = “0”, i. e. not faulty
ANB = “0”, i. e. not faulty
FB/ON = FB/OFF
FB/OFF = FB/ON
In the case of not wired check--back messages the command outputs are used for the generation of
check--back messages:
FB/ON = ALE
FB/OFF = ALA
o Free allocation of the connection pins on

FB163 MOTVENTR SIM modules (input and output of binary signals)
Drive control for -- Status acquisition
motor / solenoid valve -- Monitoring:
Run time, end position, undervoltage
SIM input -- Command conditioning (manual signals and
module automatic/protection signals)
M -- Signalling and indicating
321 / 323
421 / 431 / 433 -- Producing TTDs
-- Parameterization with and without desk tile
SIM output
module
322 / 323
440 / 441 / 450
451 / 452 / 453
Fig. 1: SIM function block FB163 MOTVENTR and associated modules

7--4
e Siemens AG
Page 245 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
2 Mode of Operation
2.1 Motor Drive
- Switchgear:
1 main contactor
- Limit switch on main contactor: 1 NO/NC contact
In the case of latching in the switchgear the command output may be reset when the check-back message
arrives because of power losses on the module. This function can be parameterized.
“Undervoltage monitoring (AC 230 V)”
Fast switching-off of the main contactor affected by an AC 230 V undervoltage can be achieved together with
an external undervoltage monitoring function, thus preventing charring of the contacts as a result of the smal-
ler contact pressure. The drive is restarted automatically if the voltage returns within a parameterizable maxi-
mum permissible failure time.
The drive remains switched-off if the power failure is present for longer than the permissible failure time, and
the message “Undervoltage protective action” is sent. The function additionally permits the staggered
starting-up of drives supplied from the same AC 230 V busbar when the voltage returns. It is thus possible to
prevent an overload on the busbar. The staggering times can be parameterized.
The check-back messages are generated by an NO/NC contact of the main contactor. The actual statuses
for the displays and messages are derived from these.

7--5
e Siemens AG
Page 246 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
2.2 Solenoid Valve
- Switchgear:
Plug-in unit with 2 contactor relays,
1 main contactor
or 2 contactor relays
1 main contactor
- Limit switches: 1 NO/NC contact on the main contactor or

1 NO/NC contact on the valve
In the case of the versions where the switchgear becomes latched, the control command can be reset accor-
ding to parameterization when the check-back message arrives.
The control command is permanently output by the module (parameterizable) in the case of switchgear
without latching. In this case, a change in the command output only takes place with the countercommand.
The logic functions correspond to those of a motor drive. Applications exist where only one contactor relay is
connected to the command output ON.

7--6
e Siemens AG
Page 247 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Enable Desk tile OM

Input
and User
interface
signalling
BHA MLA
BHE MLE
MLS
2x SIM 323 / SIM 482
SIM 323 SIM 323

SIM 482 SIM 482
ET200
Desk tile control
LADB TADB
Function block FB 163 MOTVENTR
Processing of
SIM input modules SIM output modules Control

SIM 321 / 323 SIM 322 / 323
SIM 421 / 431 / 433 SIM 440 / 441 / 450 and
451 / 452 / 453
check--back
ET 200
SAG FB/OFF, CB/OFFN ALE

ANB FB/ON, CB/ONN ALA
KV
Switchgear
Fig. 2: Structure of MOTVENTR drive control with function blocks (signal names: see Chap. 6 Abbreviations)

7--7
e Siemens AG
Page 248 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
There are four types of command:
- Manual commands
- Commands from a local control unit
Serial Local control unit Higher--level Undervoltage

input system Desk tile Automatic monitoring
Manual enable

FORCING
Enable logic (Process enable)
Priority logic
(1. to 6. --> high to low priority)
1. FORCING commands from ”OM650”
3. Local commands from the “local control unit”
6. Autom. reclosing command following undervoltage
Command output
Effective
control command
Drive
Fig. 3: Overview of the command generation and priority for the drive (simplified)

7--8
e Siemens AG
Page 249 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
3.1.1 Commands from the Serial Input System (OM 650)
Manual ON
Manual OFF
TAG---OUT *)
Switchover Automatic or Manual *)
Switchover FORCING active / inactive *)
*) Additional features, see chapter 3.3
A command entered via OM 650 only becomes valid when the corresponding process enable (EN/ON; EN/
OFF) in the PAA_E process image is present.
With operating mode FORCING, the drive can be operated via the OM650--commands “Manual ON” and
“Manual OFF” irrespective of the process enable. Protection and automatic commands are blocked.
FORCING--commands always take effect as continuous commands. No resetting of the command when re-
aching the limit position.
. Note
The OM 650 input can be blocked by setting the bit ”Disable serial (OM) input” in
the control word.
When the local control unit is selected or if the drive status word is simulated than
the OM 650 input is blocked.
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Open--loop Control Tile)
Manual ON
Manual OFF
In addition to the corresponding process enable (EN/ON; EN/OFF) in the control word, the module requires
the manual enable (signal FHD) so that the commands sent from the desk tile become valid.
. Note
. Note
The desk tile input is blocked when a drive status is simulated.

7--9
e Siemens AG
Page 250 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
. Note
The desk tile command is blocked in operating mode FORCING or if the TAG--OUT
function is switched on.
3.1.3 Commands from the Next--Higher Level
Automatic ON
Automatic OFF
The commands from the higher-level automatic system ”Automatic ON” and ”Automatic OFF” are transmitted
like the required process enable with the control word.
Protection ON
Protection OFF
The protection commands Protection ON and Protection OFF are transmitted with the control word and do
not require a process enable.
acknowledged.
Warning
! The protection, manual, and automatic commands are blocked in operating mode
FORCING or if the TAG--OUT function is switched on.
3.1.4 Commands from the Local Control Unit
In the case of drives having a local control unit the local control unit can be enabled through the process
image by setting the ”VOS” bit in the drive control word (PAA_E). The local control unit can either be con-
nected via the desk--tile connections of the module or intervene directly in the switchgear.
When the local control has been selected, screen (OM) input as well as the execution of automatic com-
mands are disabled.
Desk--tile operation is enabled. This means that any ”Disable desk--tile operation” command is cleared and
the process releases are enabled.
Status discrepancy monitoring is disabled and the monitoring devices are tracked to the actual system sta-
tus. This ensures that status discrepancies are avoided under direct intervention in the switchgear.

7--10
e Siemens AG
Page 251 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
The protection command ”Undervoltage protection OFF” (UA) immediately switches off the drive in the event
of an undervoltage.
This arrives via the control word as “ULS”.
The protection command UA does not require a process enable. As long as this command is present, all
other current or arriving commands are suppressed.
rity is at the top.
Undervoltage protection UA Undervoltage protection OFF
FORCING *) Manual OFF
Manual ON
Protection ON
Local control Manual OFF
Manual ON
Automatic commands *) Automatic OFF
Automatic ON
Manual commands *) Manual OFF
Manual ON
Automatic reclosing following undervoltage

(ON command)
*) With the set parameter RMS “TAG--OUT YES”, the operating mode logic “automatic or manual” functions
as described in chapter 3.3.
. Note
command direction).

7--11
e Siemens AG
Page 252 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
3.3 Addidional Features with Parameter RMS “Tag--Out YES”
3.3.1 Operating Modes
Operating mode memory

Automatic/Manual
AUTO
S Q
Input status word
Switchover automatic
or manual via OM
MAN D
Input status word RM/AUTO
1 R Q
Start--up (in the status word)
to the command logic
Fig. 5: Operating mode logic “automatic or manual”
Depending om the parameter OP_MODE, the function block has following operating modes:
OP_MODE RM/AUTO Automatic commands Manual commands

AUTO / MAN reset deactivated activated
set activated deactivated
SEMI / MAN reset deactivated activated
set activated activated
SEMI not relevant activated activated
. Note
The OM 650 operation “MAN/AUTO changeover” can be disabled by setting the
MAUS parameter “MAN/AUTO”.
3.3.2 FORCING
The FORCING mode can be activated or deactivated via the “FORCE” button on OM650. The default state is
“FORCING OFF”. With operating mode FORCING, the drive can be operated via the OM650--commands
“Manual ON” and “Manual OFF” irrespective of the process enable. Protection and automatic commands are
blocked. FORCING--commands always take effect as continuous commands. No resetting of the command
when reaching the limit position.
. Note
FORCING is not possible if outputs are decoupled, see chapter 3.8.

7--12
e Siemens AG
Page 253 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
3.3.3 TAG--OUT (Disable Command Logic)
The TAG--OUT function allows the drive block to be switched to inactive. This means that neither Manual
nor Automatic commands can control the drive corresponding to a logical disconnect. Nevertheless the
check-back messages of the system are updated and indicated on the OM 650 for the operator.
The TAG--OUT function can only be used after adequate parameterization (RMS=”Tag--Out YES” and
TOUS=”activated”).
The switchover and the signalling of the function TAG--OUT is done via the operating window of the OM 650.
The function TAG--OUT (output SP/BFLO is set) can only be switched on in the operating mode “Manual”
with the condition motor/solenoid valve OFF.
TAG--OUT switched on
-- blocks the command processing and output i. e. the motor/solenoid valve is not operable from
the OM 650 or from the AS 620 or from desk tile.
-- inhibits the limit position monitoring and sets the monitoring equipment on tracking.
So the status discrepancy is avoided for a direct intervention on the switchgear.
The acquisition and signalling of check--back messages e.g. “MOTOR ON” is continued inde-
pendently.
-- signal lamp “Fault” is on continually when operating with desk tile
. Note
The OM 650 operation “TAG--OUT changeover” can be disabled by setting the
TOUS parameter “TAG--OUT changeover not activated”.
3.3.4 Behavior in the event of a fault
With the parameter VBAF selected “activated”,the command outputs ALE and ALA will not be deactivated if
the following faults occur:
-- Status discrepancy
-- Checkback error
-- Switchgear fault.
With the parameter BSFG selected “activated”, it is possible to initiate a manual “OFF” command from
OM650 while a switchgear fault is present.
With the parameter REJ/MAN selected “activated”, the operating mode memory is reset if the following faults
occur: -- Status Discrepancy
-- Feedback Fault
-- Switchgear Fault
-- Undervoltage Protection
-- Runtime Failure
-- Protective Action.

7--13
e Siemens AG
Page 254 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
3.4 Command Output

the limit position)
. Note
With the parameter NLZ a slowing--down time can be parameterized. In that case
the drive is only switched off when the limit position is reached and when the set
time has elapsed.
. Note
With valves which must be opened in case of module failure and malfunction
generation in order to protect the installation or a part of it, the inverted command
must be realized by configuring of an ESG for motor/solenoid valve
(HW connection).
Here, the following requirements must be met:
-- The triggering of the valve must be done via the output ALA (OFF).
-- As ESG operating mode maintained command has to be configured i.e.
the parameter BAV must be set to 1, inverting (parameter BAV = 0) must not
be present, and command termination effected via check--back messages is
not allowed.
the actual state of the drive as quickly as possible and as accurately as possible. The signals from the travel
limit switches are monitored for this purpose.
If only one limit position is monitored with check--back contacts, the position that is not monitored (ON or
OFF) is derived from the one--sided acquired check--back message.

7--14
e Siemens AG
Page 255 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
The check-back signals FB/ON and FB/OFF are monitored for plausibility.
In addition it can also be parameterized if a plausibility check of double ”0” signal is made for a detection with
NO contacts.
Both check-back messages have ”1” signals
D Effects on status word

-- Check-back message (actual status) ON

The following signal TTDs are generated if the respective status bit of the drive is parameterized
as a TTD:
-- No feeder fault
-- Check-back message (actual status) ON or
-- Check-back fault 1 (RMF1) ON or
-- Check-back fault 1 (RMF1) OFF

-- Blocks all signalling of protective action
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the signal lamp” Fault” flashes at 2 Hz. The signal lamps ”ON” or ”OFF”
lights up according to the actual statuses in the status word.
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2 Hz. In the detail window and LT--MFA the
text “check--back error 1” is indicated.

Repair (removal of the invalid check--back)
. Note
If an error occurs, the command output is not disabled if the parameter VBAF is
“activated”.

7--15
e Siemens AG
Page 256 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
. Note
With the parameter RMS (check--back contact of the switchgear) the user can de-
cide on the type of switch (NO/NC contact) for the acquisition of check--back mes-
sages “switchgear faulty” in the switchgear.


-- No feeder fault
-- Switchgear fault

D Signalling
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2 Hz. In the detail window and LT--MFA the
text “check--back error” is indicated.
- Reset condition
. Note
“activated”.
With the parameter BSGF selected “activated”, it is possible to initiate a manual
“OFF” command from OM650 while a switchgear fault is present.

7--16
e Siemens AG
Page 257 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
3.5.2.2 Check-back Message ”Feeder Not Ready” (ANB)
Switchgear plug-in in test position. The input ANB is not set.


The following signal TTD is generated provided the respective status bit of the drive has been
-- Feeder ready

None
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the signal lamp ”Faulty” lights up permanently.
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph frame blue. In the detail window the text “test posi-
tion” is shown.
- Reset condition
Reset of test position (restore operating position of insert switchgear).

7--17
e Siemens AG
Page 258 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Check---back message (actual status) / System status
Last status achieved by ... Manual / Automatic / Protection
3.6.1 Actual Status
Check---back message (actual status) ON (CB/ON); actual status NOT ON
Check---back message (actual status) OFF (CB/OFF); actual status NOT OFF
The actual status of the drive is used by the respective check-back signals which are generated by the
OM 650 indication is made by colour change of the associated pictograph frame and by check--back of OFF /
ON in the detail window.
3.6.2 Setpoint Status Direction (for Solenoid Valve only)
command.
This results in:
Setpoint status direction ON (DS/ON)
Setpoint status direction OFF (DS/OFF)
The setpoint status is made available via the status word, and is displayed on the tile signal lamps in the ca-

7--18
e Siemens AG
Page 259 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
ble).
Serial (OM) control possible ON (SCON)
Serial (OM) control possible OFF (SCOFF)
Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement (SCA)
automatic or manual), and is made available via the status word. If a status discrepancy is present, no
information is output on achievement of the last status.
Manual ON, STOP, OFF MANUAL

Automatic ON, STOP, OFF AUTOMATIC
Protection ON, OFF, UA PROTECTION

7--19
e Siemens AG
Page 260 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
If an undervoltage limit signal is present, a command ”Undervoltage protection OFF” (UA) is generated which
immediately switches off a switched-on drive. A monitoring time (parameter TUM: Max. undervoltage time)
is started at the same time. The drive can be automatically restarted if the undervoltage limit signal disap-
pears within this time.
The drives can be staggered when restarting to prevent overloading of the busbar, i.e. a switch-on delay
time can be set for each drive using the parameter TWS. If a switch-on delay is parameterized, the control
TimeUGS < TUM TimeUGS > TUM
TUM TUM
UGS UGS
UA UA
MOTOR TWS MOTOR

ON ON
automatic
restarting
Fig. 6: Undervoltage monitoring: Influence of parameters TUM and TWS
. Note
Restarting has the lowest priority and only takes place if no commands with a higher

7--20
e Siemens AG
Page 261 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
. Note
In the case of simultaneous switchgear fault (SAG) the command memory is reset.
No automatic restarting occurs.

The signal “UGS” arrives via the control word.

Within the permissible undervoltage time (parameter TUM):
-- “Undervoltage time running” (only with drives which were previously ON)
-- “Last status achieved by PROTECTION” (only with drives which were previously ON)
-- “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” (omitted with disabling of serial input)
The bits “No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action” (omitted with disabling of sig-
nalling of protective action) and “Undervoltage time running” are reset.

-- Check--back message (actual status) OFF
-- Undervoltage protective action OFF

Within the permissible undervoltage time:
The command ”Undervoltage protection OFF” UA deletes the ON command memory following
expiry of the parameterized permissible undervoltage time, sets the OFF command memory
and generates the message “Status discrepancy or signalling of protective action”.
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the display is as with “Status discrepancy from ON to OFF” (see Chap.
3.8). Within the permissible undervoltage time OM 650 displays the associated pictograph (OFF)
white. During this process the detail window shows the text “Undervoltage time running” and
“Undervoltage”. Afterwards these signallings are removed (signal UGS has disappeared). No
signalling occurs in LT--MFA.
Following expiry of the permissible undervoltage time OM 650 displays the associated picto-
graph at red/2Hz (Fault). After this process the detail window shows the text “Undervoltage” and
LT--MFA indictates “USP Protection OFF”.

7--21
e Siemens AG
Page 262 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR

-- Acknowledgement on OM 650 (omitted with disabling of serial (OM) input)
-- Acknowledgement -- automatic common acknowledgement (control word)
-- Acknowledgement on desk tile (omitted with disabling of desk tile input).
With desk tile inputs, acknowledgements are carried out using the OFF pushbutton (without
enable pushbutton).

The drive has been switched on or off by means of a protection command from the next--higher lev-
el, or it has been switched off because of an undervoltage and restarting could not take place within
the permissible undervoltage time.

The bit “No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action” is reset (omitted with disabling
of signalling of protective action).
-- “Check--back message (actual status) OFF” or “Check--back message (actual
status) ON”
-- “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement”.

-- No feeder fault
-- Protective action ON or
-- Protective action OFF

Blocks the command channel in the opposite direction.

With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed depending on the direction (see Chap. 3.8).
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2Hz (Fault).
The detail window shows the texts “Protection OFF” or “Protection ON” and “Protection com-
mand”
No signalling occurs in LT--MFA.
In OP--MFA the text “Protection/Status discrepancy” is displayed.

7--22
e Siemens AG
Page 263 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR

the current position of the drive is used for the acknowledgement.
A status discrepancy is not generated if a check-back fault is present.
The status discrepancy monitoring function can be disabled by appropriate parameterization
(parameter WEF).
command.

(setpoint position in from OFF to from ON to discrep.
reference memory) ON (EFAE) OFF (EFEA) (EF)
Actual pos. OFF Actual pos. ON Yes Yes

Actual pos. ON Actual pos. OFF Yes Yes
Actual pos. OFF Intermediate position * Yes Yes

Actual pos. ON Intermediate position * Yes Yes
* only if check--back message contacts are parameterized without double--”0” monitoring


achieved by ...” are reset. The bit “Serial (OM) input acknowledgement” is set. If the drive is at a
limit position, the bits “Actual status ON or OFF” are also set.

-- Status discrepancy from OFF to ON or
-- Status discrepancy from ON to OFF

7--23
e Siemens AG
Page 264 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR

D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed dependent on the direction (see Chap. 3.8).
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2Hz. The detail window and LT--MFA indicate
the text “ELF OFF --> ON” or “ELF ON --> OFF”.

. Note
“activated”.

7--24
e Siemens AG
Page 265 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
The run--time monitoring function comprises two monitoring functions:
3.7.4.1 Run--time Monitoring -- Total Run Time
This function is used to monitor the switching procedure from the time of command output up to the arrival of
the valid check-back message from the desired position.
The switching time can be parameterized using the parameter TGL (total run time of drive) and is the same
for both command directions.


The bits “No run time/blocking” and ”Setpoint status, running direction ON or OFF” are reset. The
bit “Serial control possible acknowledgement” is set.

The following signal TTDs are generated providing the respective status bit of the drive is para-
meterized as a TTD:

Disables the display for direction of travel. The command output is disabled if reset of the run
time is parameterized (see parameter BAV).
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is additionally displayed dependent on the direction
(see Chap. 3.8). OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2Hz. The detail window and
LT--MFA indicate the text “Total Run Time Violation”.

to the current position of the drive is used for the acknowledgement
D Limit position is still reached.

7--25
e Siemens AG
Page 266 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
3.7.4.2 Run--time Monitoring -- Leaving of Limit Position

tion has not yet been left. The monitoring function is not started if a check-back fault is present in
the opposite command direction. A run time error is generated if the limit position has not been left
within the parameterized run time TVE.

The bits “No run time/blocking” and ”Setpoint status in ON or OFF direction” are reset. The bit
“Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” is set.

The following signal TTDs (Fig. 10) are generated provided the respective status bit of the drive
-- Run--time violation, leaving of limit position

-- The status command remains active.
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed dependent on the direction (see Fig. 11).
OM 650 displays the associated pictograph at red/2Hz. The detail window and LT--MFA indicate
the text “Total Run Time Violation, Leaving of Limit Position”.
- Reset condition of monitoring


7--26
e Siemens AG
Page 267 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
By pressing the command pushbutton ON or OFF on the open-loop control tile without an enable
pushbutton, the operator can determine whether the desired command direction is enabled for manual
control.
- Triggering conditions in ON direction

D Process enable PFE missing
D Protection command present in OFF direction
D Automatic command present in OFF direction
D ”Undervoltage protection OFF” (UA) present
- Triggering conditions in OFF direction

D Process enable PFA missing
D Protection command present in ON direction
D Automatic command present in ON direction

None

None

None
- Reset condition

7--27
e Siemens AG
Page 268 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
3.8 Connections to SIM Modules for Drive Control
Control program
Function block AP
FB163
M
Switchgear fault I O ALA
M
Branch not I O ALE
operational
FB OFF I
FB ON I O KV
Input module Output module
I = Input terminals of the module FB = Feedback

O = Output terminals of the module (check--back message)
Fig. 8: Connections to SIM module as drive for 1 motor (up to a maximum of 4 motors possible)
To perform the drive control functions, one FB163 MOTVENTR function block is invoked in the AP for each
system. Provided that the function block’s parameters have been set accordingly (continuous command), this
variant and the FB163 function block may also be used for controlling solenoid valves. The outputs for the
OFF command will not be used in this case. Systems (inputs and outputs) that are not used for drive control
may be used for binary I/O.
There are two possibilities of input and output allocation:
1. Direct allocation of the block inputs and outputs to SIM I/O modules. This is made via the
parameter masks shown in Fig. 13 and Fig. 14.
2. Decoupling. The inputs are acquired via binary input blocks and can be connected to the FB163
function block after a possible processing. In the same way, the command output can be done
via binary output blocks.
Mixed application of decoupling and direct allocation is possible.

7--28
e Siemens AG
Page 269 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
. Note
FORCING is not possible if outputs are decoupled.
3.9 Communication (with AP and OM 650)
Data exchange with the function block is carried out using the control word and status word and in addition to
this using time--tagged data (see Fig. 2).
3.9.1 Time--tagged Data (TTD)
- Signal TTD
module.
- Fault TTD
functions.

Please refer to the Chapter “Individual Motor Drive Controller” or “Individual Drive Controller for Solenoid Val-
ves” in the Manual OM 650 Process Control for further information about the displays on OM 650 (picto-
graphs, input pushbuttons, signallings and message texts).

7--29
e Siemens AG
Page 270 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
ABBREVI--
0 Status bit Check---back message (act. status) ON CB/ON
1 Check---back mes. (act. status) OFF CB/OFF
2 Setpoint status in ON direction DS/ON
IB0 3 Setpoint status in OFF direction DS/OFF
4 Last status achieved by PROTECTION ZES
1 Serial (OM) control possible ON SCON
2 Serial (OM) control possible OFF SCOFF
IB1 3 Serial (OM) control possible acknowledge SCA
4 Feeder ready AZB
0 Command output ON ALE
IB2
1 Command output OFF ALA
3 FORCING mode FOC
4 Serial (OM) control possible FORCING FOUS
6 Check---back message NOT ON CB/ON_N
7 Check---back message NOT OFF CB/OFF_N
0 Serial (OM) control possible AUTOMATIC SC AUTO
IB3 1 Serial (OM) control possible TAG OUT SC TAG
4 Local control VOS
5 Drive status word simulated PSIM
6 Disable command logic SP/BFLO
7 Status bit Automatic mode of operation RM/AUTO

3 Status bit Common acknowledgement SQ
5 Disable desk tile input BL/DT*
OB0 6 Lamp test LT*
0 Automatic ON A/ON
1 Automatic OFF A/OFF
3 Local control VOS
OB1 Protection ON P/ON
4
5 Protection OFF P/OFF
6 Process enable ON EN/ON
7 Process enable OFF EN/OFF
0 Automatic mode AUTO
OB2 1 Manual mode MAN
4 Switchgear fault SGF
5 Feeder not ready for operation ANB
6 Feedback OFF FB/OFF
7 Status bit Feedback ON FB/ON
Fig. 9: Data of process image, motor/solenoid valve/switchgear


7--30
e Siemens AG
Page 271 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Signal TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation
Check--back message (actual status) ON CB/ON

Check--back message (actual status) OFF CB/OFF
Setpoint status in ON direction DS/ON
Setpoint status in OFF direction DS/OFF
Feeder ready AZB
No feeder fault NOFF
Local control VOS
Status word simulated PSIM
Disable command logic SP/BFLO
Automatic mode of operation RM/AUTO
FORCING mode FOC
Fault TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation

Protective action ON MSE
Protective action OFF MSA
Check-back fault 1 ON RMF1E
Check-back fault 1 OFF RMF1A
Undervoltage protective action OFF MUSA
Fig. 10: Time--tagged data, motor/solenoid valve/switchgear

7--31
e Siemens AG
Page 272 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Data exchange with the function block is carried out using the data blocks TADB and LADB (see Fig. 2). The
signal lamps ”ON”, ”OFF” and ”Fault” on the open-loop control tile indicate:
- Setpoint statuses in running direction (only with solenoid valve with two changeover contacts) with
flashing light (8 Hz)
If ”Disable desk tile input” is present, the signal lamp ”Fault” is on permanently. There are no other fault
displays in addition. The actual and setpoint statuses are still signalled as described above. Lamp testing has
to be configured via ES at the input LP of the ESG modul.

Actual position
OFF ON
OFF Fault ON OFF Fault ON
Normal position OFF/ON
Run in setpoint direction OPEN or CLOSED
Run in setpoint direction OPEN or CLOSED

check--back fault
Status discrepancy
Run time
SIM module faulty
m.c.b. assembly tripped or check--back error
Blocking scanning or TAG--OUT switched on
Lamp test (o.k.)
OFF = signal lamp ”OFF” Fault = signal lamp ”Fault” ON = signal lamp ”ON”
Fig. 11: Signal representation at the desk tile, drive control Motor/solenoid valve/switchgear with desk tile input

7--32
e Siemens AG
Page 273 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
4 Parameterization
The parameters of the function block MOTVENTR are generated by the configuring system ES 680.
The parameters can be configured via convenient parameterization forms (see Fig. 15 and Fig. 16).
Fig. 12 shows the symbol of the function block MOTVENTR similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring
system.
DCM MO Symbol: Drive control module motor, solenoid valve

Fig. 12: CSF symbol of function block MOTVENTR

7--33
e Siemens AG
Page 274 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Fig. 13 shows as an example the parameterization form for configuring the output signals of the FB163. The
signals can be freely assigned and therfore allocated to several modules.
ALA
ALE
KV
Fig. 13: Parameterization form of the output module for 8 binary signals SIM 441 (6ES5441--8MA11)
Fig. 14 shows as an example the parameterization form for configuring the input signals of the FB163. The
ANB
SAG
RMA
RME
Fig. 14: Parameterization form of the input/output module for 8 binary signals SIM 421 (6ES5421--8MA12)

7--34
e Siemens AG
Page 275 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Fig. 15: Parameterization form FB163 MOTVENTR without desk tile

7--35
e Siemens AG
Page 276 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Fig. 16: Parameterization form FB163 MOTVENTR with desk tile

7--36
e Siemens AG
Page 277 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR

Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0
- Selection type of drive (FUNCTION)
Stagger time for restart (TWS)
- Slowing--down time for travel--dependent disconnection (NLZ)
- Check-back contact switchgear (RMS)
- Command output in case of failure (VBAF)
- Manual / Auto changeover (MAUS)

7--37
e Siemens AG
Page 278 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
- TAG--OUT changeover (TOUS)
- Reject to manual (REJ/MAN)
- Operation mode (OP_MODE)
- Behavior on switchgear fault (BSFG)
Name: TTD
1 = generate TTD
CB/ON = check--back message (actual status) ON
CB/OFF = check--back message (actual status) OFF
DS/ON = setpoint status ON (only with solenoid valve)
DS/OFF = setpoint status OFF (with 2 changeover contacts)
USZ = undervoltage time running
AZB = feeder ready
VOS = local control
PSIM = status word simulated
BL/COLO = disable command logic
CB/AUTO = automatic mode of operation
FOC = forcing mode
- Selection of actuator type (FUNCTION)
Name: FUNCTION
Function: Defines the actuator type. This information is used for the labeling of the OM650
detail window and the command buttons.
Range of values: Motor / Solenoid
Motor
Solenoid
Switch / Breaker
Basic setting: Motor / Solenoid

7--38
e Siemens AG
Page 279 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Name: PBR
Name: BAV
Range of values: pers.cmd:N -- inv.:N -- RT.err--reset:N
pers.cmd:Y -- inv.:N -- RT.err--reset:N
pers.cmd:N -- inv.:Y -- RT.err--reset:N
pers.cmd:Y -- inv.:Y -- RT.err--reset:N
pers.cmd:N -- inv.:N -- RT.err--reset:Y
pers.cmd:Y -- inv.:N -- RT.err--reset:Y
Basic setting: pers.cmd:N -- inv.:N -- RT.err--reset:N
Name: TUM
Function: Defines the max. permissible voltage failure time for automatic
restarting.
10,000 = 1,000 s
Name: TWS
(stagger times)
10,000 = 1,000 s

7--39
e Siemens AG
Page 280 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR

Name: RWE
4:Detect. through NC contact

Name: RWA
Time for leaving of limit position (TVE)

Name: TVE
Function: Defines the time in which the drive must have left the limit position after a
command output
Range of values: 0 bis 600
600 = 60 s
Name: TGL
(only with FB/ON or FB/OFF = 3)
60,000 = 6,000 s

7--40
e Siemens AG
Page 281 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Name: WRBHAEA
WRBHAAZ
WRBSEA
WRBSAZ
not blocked
Meaning: WRBHAEA=check--back fault does not block MANUAL/AUTOMATIC ON
WRBHAAZ=check--back fault does not block MANUAL/AUTOMATIC OFF
WRBSEA=check--back fault does not block PROTECTION ON
WRBSAZ=check--back fault does not block PROTECTION OFF
Basic setting: blocked
Name: WEFSPERR
WEFNSEA
WEFNSAZ
discrepancy
blocked
Slowing--down time for travel--dependent disconnection (NLZ)

Name: NLZ
Function: Defines how long the disconnection is delayed
Meaning: 0 = undelayed disconnection
100 = 10 s disconnection delay
Basic setting: 0

7--41
e Siemens AG
Page 282 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Check-back contact switchgear (RMS)

Name: RMS
Function: Defines whether the ”SAG” check-back message of the blown fuse in the switch--
gear can be detected, and with which type of switch. Additionally it is determined
here whether the additional features (chapter 3.3), e.g Tag--Out can be used.
Range of values: NO--Cont. / Tag--Out no
NC--Cont. / Tag--Out no
NO--Cont. / Tag--Out yes
NC--Cont. / Tag--Out yes
Basic setting: NO--Cont. / Tag--Out no
Command output response in case of a fault (VBAF) *)

Name: VBAF
Function: Defines the reponse of the command outputs in the event of a fault. If the
parameter is activated the command outputs ALE and ALA will not be deactivated
if following faults occur:
Status discrepancy
Checkback error
Switchgear faulty.
Range of values: Not activated
activated
Basic setting: Not activated.
MAN/AUTO changeover (MAUS) *)

Name: MAUS
Function: Defines whether the MAN/AUTO button in the operation window is operable.
activated
Basic setting: MAN/AUTO changeover activated
TAG--OUT changeover (TOUS) *)

Name: TOUS
Function: Defines whether the TAG--OUT button in the operation window is operable.
activated
Basic setting: TAG--OUT changeover activated

7--42
e Siemens AG
Page 283 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Reject to manual (REJ/MAN) *)

Name: REJ/MAN
Function: Defines whether the operation mode memory is reset to manual in the event of a
failure.
activated
Basic setting: Not activated
Operation mode (OP_MODE) *)

Name: OP_MODE
Function: Defines the possible operating modes.
Range of values: AUTO / MAN
SEMI
SEMI / MAN
Basic setting: AUTO / MAN
Behavior on switchgear fault (BSFG) *)

Name: BSFG
Function: Defines whether it is possible to initiate a manual “OFF” command from OM650
while a switchgear fault is present.
activated
*) Additional features, only enabled if activated via parameter RMS.
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB163

Block name: MOTVENTR
Version: ________________↑
Average run time: 190 ms (condition: no signal change, no fault status)
typ. 490 ms
-- Code 8700 bytes
(AP) within the system environment for SIM/protection

7--43
e Siemens AG
Page 284 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
6 Abbreviations
ALA Load switch OFF output

ALE Load switch ON output
AZB Feeder ready
A/ON Automatic command ON
A/OFF Automatic command OFF

BBV Command generation version
BHA Manual command OFF
BHE Manual command ON
CB/AUTO Automatic mode of operation

CB/OFF Check-back message (actual status) OFF
CB/ON Check-back message (actual status) ON
DW Data word
DS/OFF Setpoint status OFF
DS/ON Setpoint status ON

EN/OFF Process enable OFF
EN/ON Process enable ON
FB Function block
FB/OFF Feedback (check-back message) OFF
FB/ON Feedback (check-back message) ON
FHD Process enable Manual

KV Contact supply

LP Lamp test
LZV Run--time violation, leaving of limit position
MLA Signal lamp OFF

MLE Signal lamp ON
MLS Signal lamp FAULT

7--44
e Siemens AG
Page 285 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR

PAA_E Process image of outputs to individual control level (status wort)

PAE_E Process image of inputs from individual control level (status wort)
PON Protection ON
P/OFF Protection OFF
P/ON Protection ON
RMF1A Check-back fault OFF, travel
RMF1E Check-back fault ON, travel

SCOFF Serial control possible OFF
SCON Serial control possible ON
SIM Signal module
SP/BFLO Disable command logic
SQ Common acknowledgement
TA Pushbutton
TVE Time for leaving the limit position




7--45
e Siemens AG
Page 286 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR

Fig. 17 Drive, command generation
Fig. 18 Command generation, manual commands
Fig. 20 Drive, fault signal generation

7--46
e Siemens AG
Page 287 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Automatic commands
A/OFF
& OFF
EN/OFF
A/ON
& & ON
EN/ON
VOS
SP/BFLO
>1
Manual commands
from OM
OM OFF
EN/OFF
& OFF
OM ON
& & ON
EN/ON
SP/OM
VOS
>1
SP/BFLO
Manual commands
from desk tile
DESK TILE OFF
FHD OFF
EN/OFF
&
>1
DESK TILE ON
FHD & & ON
EN/ON >1
VOS
SP/TF &
>1
SP/BFLO
Legend:
FHD = Manual input enable VOS = Local control
SP/OM = Disable OM input SP/TF = Disable desk tile input
SP/BFLO = Disable command logic
Fig. 17: Drive, command generation

7--47
e Siemens AG
Page 288 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
approx. 20ms
Manual commands
from OM
Manual
commands
>1
Manual commands &

from desk tile
Manual commands (OFF or ON) are input via OM or desk tile
If a manual command from the desk tile is present and a Manual command
from OM is input simultaneously, then the last present command is output.
In this case the hardware signal of an OM command always consists of a short pulse.
Fig. 18: Command generation, manual commands

7--48
e Siemens AG
Page 289 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Command OUTPUT
memory Load switch
UNDERVOLT.PROTECT. ”OFF”
”OFF” (AL)
Priority
PROTECTION-- logic ”OFF”
AUTOMATIC--”OFF” ALA
MANUAL--
S ”OFF”
>1 R
RESTARTING
Command
PROTECTION-- memory
AUTOMATIC--”ON”
MANUAL-- ”ON”
Parameter PBR ”ON” ALE
”OFF before ON”/ S ”ON”
”ON before OFF”
>1 R
No Fault
>1
SP/BFLO
Check--back message ”OFF”

Parameter BAV &
”NO CONTINUOUS
COMMAND”
Check--back message ”ON”

Parameter BAV &
”NO CONTINUOUS
COMMAND”

7--49
e Siemens AG
Page 290 of 719

FB163 MOTVENTR
Plausibility/CB fault
feeder fault
>1
Switchgear faulty
Monitoring of status discrepancy

Undervolt.prot. OFF Status discrepancy Fault
>1 >1 >1
Protection ON/OFF
&
Block/MS Connection
Run time error and display
Total run time violated in OM 650
Time for leaving of limit position overrun >1
Connection in AS 620
Fig. 20: Drive, fauft signal generation

7--50
e Siemens AG
Page 291 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 292 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB165 REGELANR (Servo--Drive Control, configurable)
ESG---RA
Page 293 of 719

FB165 REGELANR

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

7--2
e Siemens AG
Page 294 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--5

2.1 Servo-drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
2.2 TAG--OUT (Disable Command Logic -- SP--BFLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--11

3.1.1 Commands from the Serial (OM) Input System (Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--13
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Closed-loop Control Tile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--13
3.1.3 Commands from the Next--higher Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--14
3.3 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--16
3.4.1 Servo-drive-based Check-back Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--16
3.5.1 Check--back Message Actual Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--17
3.5.2 Setpoint Status Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--17
3.6 Servo-drive Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--18
3.6.1 Motor Temperature Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--18
3.6.2 Monitoring of Fault Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--18
3.6.3 Scanning of Blocking on Servo-drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--19
3.7 Connections to the SIM Modules for Servo--drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--20
3.8 Communication with AP and OM 650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--21
3.8.1 Time--tagged Data (TTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--21
3.8.2 Signalling on OM 650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--21
3.9 Messages and Signals on the Desk Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--25
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--37
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--38

7--3
e Siemens AG
Page 295 of 719

FB165 REGELANR

7--4
e Siemens AG
Page 296 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
1 Application
Step controllers (S--controllers) are used for drive controls with servo--motors.
The function block FB165 REGELANR is used as output section and control section for the step controller.
The FB165 has no control algorithm. It outputs the positioning pulses and switches the operating modes via
appropriate inputs and outputs.
The single loop control is in general devided into four functions, which are implemented in AS 620 B by the
following means:
- Setpoint generation with set--point adjuster: FB88 O--SPC--G or master controller in a higher level
- Comparison of setpoint value with actual value: AS 620 user defined software
- Control algorithm (e.g. PID): FB90 SCON
- Drive control (with positioning pulse output): FUM or FB165 with SIM modules
Function:
FB90
SCON
Drive control
Output section FB165 with positioning
REGELANR pulse output
SIM modules
Manipulated variable adjuster
The drive control for the servo--drive can be carried out in the AS 620 B system using the function block
The following input and output signals can be configured for the connection of a servo--drive control:

7--5
e Siemens AG
Page 297 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
Input signals:
- CBOP, CBCL: Check--back message ON/OPEN, Check--back message OFF/CLOSED
- CBOPNI, CBCLNI: Check--back message NOT ON/OPEN, Check--back message

NOT OFF/CLOSED (resting position of changeover contact)
- DEAUF, DEZU: maximum torque not reached in ON direction,

maximum torque not reached in CLOSED direction
- SAG: Switchgear fault
- MTU: Motor temperature monitoring
Output signals:
- ALES, ALAS: Load switch ON/OPEN output, Load switch OFF/CLOSED output
- KV1, KV2: Contact power supply
(according to the module used) and output with the voltages + 24 V DC, 115 V AC and 230 V AC
The check--back messages can be configured as follows:
-- single contacts as NO/NC contacts (CBOP, CBCL)
-- changeover contacts (CBOP or CBOPNI, CBCL or CBCLNI)
The signals DEAUF / DEZU and the signal SAG can be configured as NO contact or NC contact. The signal
MTU is a NO contacts. If the DEAUF / DEZU signals ,the SAG signal or the MTU signal are not used, then
these signals do not require parameterization in the hardware and the corresponding inputs of the SIM mo-
dules do not need to be wired.
SAG = “0”, i.e. not faulty
MTU = “0”, i.e. not faulty
DEAUF, DEZU: = maximum torque not reached
CBOP = CBCL
CBCL = CBOP
In the case of not wired check--back messages CBOP and CBCL a control operating mode is not possible.

7--6
e Siemens AG
Page 298 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
o Free allocation of the connection pins on

FB165 REGELANR SIM modules (input and output of binary signals)
-- Output for higher level control (step controller)
Drive control for -- Status acquisition
servo--drive -- Monitoring:
SIM input Torque, run time, end position
module M -- Command conditioning (manual signals and
321 / 323 automatic/protection signals)
421 / 431 / 433 -- Signalling and indicating
SIM output -- Producing TTDs
module -- Parameterization with and without desk tile
322 / 323
440 / 441 / 450
451 / 452 / 453
Fig. 2: SIM function block FB165 REGELANR and associated modules

7--7
e Siemens AG
Page 299 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
2 Mode of Operation
tion block FB165 communicates with the associated signal module (SIM) via the PROFIBUS--DP and head
Control program
Function block AP
FB165
Input/output modules
SIM
Fig. 3: Overview of the function block FB165 with signal modules

7--8
e Siemens AG
Page 300 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
Fig. 4 shows the software functions or function blocks which can be executed by the function block FB165.
Message output
and signalling
Command generation
Command
priority Servo-drive
monitoring
Command output Status acquisition
Check-back signal
conditioning/
Command section monitoring
Monitoring
Servo- Switchgear
Control command
drive feeder
DRIVE CONTROL
Check-back messages
Fig. 4: Software functions FB165

7--9
e Siemens AG
Page 301 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
2.1 Servo-drive
The servo-drive has two operating modes:
- MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
- CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
In operating mode “MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”, the function block acts completely like an actuator
(see FB164 STELANTR).
In operating mode “CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”, the function block only processes commands from the next
higher function block FB90 SCON. The duration and the direction of the command are defined by the FB90
via the control word. The function block FB165 converts this value into a corresponding positioning pulse and
transfers it to the logic section of the open-loop control function of the actuator where, apart from run--time
monitoring, all functions of the control and monitoring section are available as with the actuator FB164.
The servo-drive has a motor temperature monitoring function to protect the motor. Temperature sensors
are fitted in the motor winding which output a signal (MTU) to the function block when a specific temperature
has been reached. The function block then switches over from “CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” to “MANUAL/
OPEN-LOOP CONTROL” and outputs a corresponding message.
A desk tile can be connected to the function block to commit manual inputs:
- Open-loop control tile as with the actuator and
- Closed-loop control tile for mode selector.
The operating mode (CLOSED-LOOP or OPEN-LOOP CONTROL) is displayed on the closed-loop control
tile.
. Note
All manual commands are disabled by setting the bit ”Disable closed-loop control
tile” in the control word.

7--10
e Siemens AG
Page 302 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
2.2 TAG--OUT (Disable Command Logic -- SP--BFLO)
The TAG--OUT function allows the drive block to be switched inactive. This means that neither Manual
To use the TAG--OUT function you need to set the corresponding parameter (for activation of the TAG--OUT func-
tion please refer to the parameter RMS).
The OM operation window is used for changeover and indication of the TAG--OUT operating mode.
Before you switch on the TAG--OUT function (output SP/BFLO is set) please ensure that the operating mode is in
“manual”, the status is “CLOSED” and the closed--loop controller is on “manual/OLC” and not on “CLC”.
-- blocks the command processing and output i.e. the motor/solenoid valve is not operable from
the OM 650 or from the AS 620 or from desk tile.
-- inhibits the limit position monitoring and sets the monitoring equipment on straighten.
The acquisition and signalling of check--back messages e.g. “MOTOR ON” is continued inde-
pendently.
-- signal lamp “Fault” is set on permanently when operating with desk tile
TAG--OUT switched off
-- the drive block is active. The command processing takes in account the operating mode “Auto-
matic” and “Manual”. “Automatic” means that automatic commands are effective and manual
commands are disabled. “Manual” means that manual commands are functional and automatic
commands are disabled.
The switchover and the signalling of the operating mode “Automatic” or “Manual” is done via the
operating window of the OM 650.
No distinction between the operating modes “Automatic” and “Manual” can be made if the TAG--OUT function
is not activated in the parameter RMS.
. Note
The OM 650 operation “TAG--OUT changeover” can be blocked by setting the

7--11
e Siemens AG
Page 303 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
.
Enable Closed--loop control tile Input Open--loop control tile OM
and
Operation
signalling window
MHS BHA MLA

FHD URS MSPR BHS MLS
MRE BHE MLE
SIM 323 SIM 323

SIM 482 SIM 482
ET200
Desk tile control protective interlock
LADB TADB
Function block FB 165 REGELANR
Processing of
Control
SIM input modules SIM output modules
SIM 322 / 323
and
SIM 321 / 323
SIM 421 / 431 / 433 SIM 440 / 441 / 450 check--back
451 / 452 / 453
ET 200
DENZU CBCL ALAS

DENAUF CBCLNI ALES
SAG CBOP KV1, KV2
MTU CBOPNI
Switchgear
Fig. 5: Structure of servo-drive control REGELANR with function blocks (singal names: see Chap. 6 abbreviations)

7--12
e Siemens AG
Page 304 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
The functions of the actuator apply to the servo-drive in operating mode ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP
CONTROL”. Only the functions for operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” are therefore described
below.
3.1.1 Commands from the Serial (OM) Input System (Screen)
Operating mode switchover command URS
Disable switchover MANUAL/CLOSED---LOOP CONTROL

via automatic command BL/AUTO
TAG---OUT
Switchover Automatic or Manual (with parameter “TAG---OUT switchable active”

set)
All commands from the screen are transmitted coded (bits 0, 1, 2) with the control word.
The switchover command URS for the operating mode memory requires the corresponding process enable
(EN/CLC; EN/MAN) in the control word.
The command ”Disable switchover MANUAL/CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL via automatic command” prevents
. Note
The screen input can be blocked by setting the bit SSB ”Disable (OM) serial input”
The bit BL/OM ”Disable serial controller input” in the control word disables both the
operating mode switchover and the setpoint input from the screen.
When the local control unit is selected or if the drive status word is simulated then
the screen input is blocked.
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Closed-loop Control Tile)
In addition to the corresponding process enable (EN/CLC; EN/MAN) in the control word, the function block
requires the manual enable so that the switchover command URS sent from the desk tile becomes valid.
. Note

7--13
e Siemens AG
Page 305 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
. Note
All manual commands are disabled when the bit ”Disable closed--loop control desk”
in the control word is set.
. Note
The desk tile command is blocked if the TAG--OUT function is switched on.
3.1.3 Commands from the Next--higher Level
Automatic CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
Automatic MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
In operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”, the following control information is transferred to the
function block FB165 from the higher-level control system:
New pulse
Pulse length equal to TA
Pulse duration
Disable control command in OPEN direction
Disable control command in CLOSED direction
Every change (positive or negative edge) of the bit ”New pulse” in the control word signals to the function
block FB165 that a new control pulse must be output.
If the pulse length calculated by the control system corresponds to the scanning time TA of the closed-loop
controller, the bit ”Pulse length equal to TA” is set in the control word (PAA_E). The function block FB165
outputs the corresponding positioning command until the bit ”New pulse” changes.
The ”Pulse duration” is transmitted from the FB90 to the function block FB165 and defines the duration (in s)
and the direction of the positioning command to be output. If the pulse duration changes without a change in
the bit ”New pulse”, the function block FB165 still outputs the corresponding positioning command.
A positioning command is not output in the associated direction if one of the bits ”Disable control command
in OPEN direction” or ”Disable control command in CLOSED direction” is set.
The bit ”Heartbeat of group control level” is reset if there is a fault or failure in the group control level. If the
function block FB165 is in operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”, it carries out a fault switchover to
”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”.

7--14
e Siemens AG
Page 306 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
The command with the highest priority is selected from the applied commands for operating mode switchover
(from the command generation function) and stored.
In Fig. 6, the switchover command with the highest priority is at the top.
Switchover command Fault switchover from CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL to

MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
Switchover commands *) Automatic command MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL

Automatic command CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
Switchover command *) URS by serial (OM) input
Switchover command *) URS by desk tile input
Fig. 6: Commands for operating mode switchover
*) With the set parameter “TAG--OUT switchable active” the operating mode logic “automatic or manual”
functions in the following way.
Operating mode
Memory Automatic/Manual
AUTO *)
S Q
Input status word
Switchover automatic or manual

via OM
D
Start--up RM/AUTO
R Q
(in the status word)
*) This input is implemented beginning from release 4 to the command logic
With the set parameter “TAG--OUT switchable activ” (SP/BFLO switchable active) the following applies:
RM/AUTO Automatic commands Manual commands

reset disabled effectiv
set effectiv disabled
In start--up the operating mode is switched to “manual”.
. Note
A change in priority can be the reason for disabled commands (see Chap. 3.1)
The current mode of the operating mode memory is signalled by the status word.

7--15
e Siemens AG
Page 307 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
. Note
The OM 650 operation “MAN/AUTO changeover” can be blocked by setting the
MAUS parameter “MAN/AUTO changeover not activated”.
3.3 Command Output
In operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” (CB/CLC), the output of control commands (positionig pul-
se) is according to the defined direction ”OPEN” or ”CLOSED” and duration.
A STOP command is generated internally at the end of the positioning time (pulse duration), and the
command output is terminated.
. Note
A slowing--down time can be parameterized for a travel-dependent reset. In that
case the servo--drive is only switched off when the limit position is reached and
when the set time has elapsed.
. Note
In case of an error, the command output is not disabled if the parameter VBAF is
“activated”.
3.4.1 Servo-drive-based Check-back Messages
Non-equivalence monitoring and plausibility check for travel limit switches and torque limit switches are
identical to the respective function units of the actuator (see description FB164).
The triggering and reset conditions, as well as the effects on status word, time--tagged data and further inter-
nal processing of check-back message ”Switchgear faulty” (SAG) are identical to those of the actuator con-
trol (see FB164 STELANTR).

7--16
e Siemens AG
Page 308 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
- Check--back message (actual status)

- Setpoint status direction
- Serial (OM) control possible ...
- Last status achieved by ...
3.5.1 Check--back Message Actual Status
Check---back messages (actual status) OPEN (CB/OP) and NOT OPEN (CB/OP_N)
Check---back messages (actual status) CLOSED (CB/CL) and NOT CLOSED (CB/CL_N)
Check---back message (actual status) CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL (CB/CLC)
Check---back message (actual status) MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL (CB/MAN)
The ’”Actual status” of the servo-drive is used by the respective check-back signals which are generated by
the check-back signal conditioning function and are valid.
The operating mode is additionally displayed with the servo-drive by means of ”Check--back message (actual
status CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” (CB/CLC) and ”Check--back message (actual status) MANUAL/OPEN-
LOOP CONTROL” (CB/MAN).
3.5.2 Setpoint Status Direction
Setpoint status in OPEN direction (DS/OP) or
Setpoint status in CLOSED direction (DS/CL)
The setpoint status is made available via the control word, and is displayed on the tile signal lamps in the
case of desk tile inputs.
Serial (OM) control possible STOP
Serial (OM) control possible OPEN
Serial (OM) control possible CLOSED
Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement
The bits ”Serial (OM) control possible ...” are not set if a servo-drive is in operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP
CONTROL”.
A message ”Last status achieved by ...” is not generated in operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”.

7--17
e Siemens AG
Page 309 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
3.6 Servo-drive Monitoring

The functions for torque monitoring, signalling of protective action, status discrepancy and run--time
monitoring for the servo-drive correspond to the respective function units of the actuator (see FB164).
. Note
If the servo--drive is in “CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL” operating mode, a fault
changeover to “MAN/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL” is not carried out in case of a
protection intervention (P/OP or P/CL).
The protection commands are executed without a message being issued. After the
protection commands have been cancelled the drive carries out the commands
from the controller again. Acknowledgement is not required.
3.6.1 Motor Temperature Monitoring
In order to protect the motor, the servo-drive has an additional motor temperature monitoring function (MTU)
which results in a switchover from ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” to ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”
when triggered.
A signal “MTU” is present.
The following signal TTDs are generated provided the respective status bit of the servo-drive has
been parameterized as a TTD:
-- No feeder fault
-- Motor temperature violated
Fault switchover from ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” to ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the signal lamp ”Fault” flashes at 2 Hz in addition (see Chap. 3.7).
The signal ”MTU” is no longer present.
3.6.2 Monitoring of Fault Switchover
If one of the faults listed below occurs, a switchover is made to operating mode ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP
CONTROL” if the module is in operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”.
-- Failure of next higher level or group control level (LGL in control word)
-- An external fault is present (EXS in control word)
-- A protection command (control word) is present
-- The motor temperature monitoring function has been triggered
-- One of the following bits in the status word is not set:
-- ”No status discrepancy”
-- ”No feeder fault”
-- ”No run time/blocking”.

7--18
e Siemens AG
Page 310 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
D Effect on the status word

In operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”:
The bits “Actual status CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” and “No fault” are reset. The following bits
are set:
-- ”Actual status MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”
-- ”Fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”
-- ”Disable closed-loop control mode”
-- ”Serial input acknowledgement” (omitted with disabling of serial input)
In operating mode ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”:
Only the bit ”Disable closed-loop control mode” is set.
D Effect on time--tagged data

-- Actual status MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
-- Fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
-- Fault

A fault switchover (delayed by 200 ms) is made from operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CON-
TROL” to ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”. Setpoint inputs from the desk tile and the screen
as well as the mode switchover are blocked.
D Signalling
Signalling on the open-loop control tile is according to the fault. The fault switchover is signalled
by flashing at 2 Hz of the signal lamps ”Disable closed-loop control mode” (MSPR) and
”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” on the closed-loop control tile. If the function block was already in
operating mode ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL” the signal lamp ”Disable closed-loop con-
trol mode” (MSPR) lights up permanently (see Chap. 3.7).
D Acknowledgement on screen (omitted with disabling of serial (OM) input)
D Acknowledgement on desk tile using URS pushbutton (omitted with disabling of desk tile input)
D Acknowledgement via control word (automatic collective acknowledgement)
It is possible to switch back to operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” again once the
fault has been eliminated and if protection commands are no longer present.
3.6.3 Scanning of Blocking on Servo-drive
In closed-loop control mode, the open-loop control pushbuttons CLOSED and OPEN are blocked.
The blocking is signalled by permanent lighting-up of the signal lamp ”CLOSED” when pressing the CLOSED
pushbutton, and permanent lighting-up of the signal lamp ”OPEN” when pressing the OPEN pushbutton
(signal only as long as the pushbutton is pressed).

7--19
e Siemens AG
Page 311 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
3.7 Connections to the SIM Modules for Servo--drive
Control program
Function block AP
FB165
RM CLOSED E A KV1
M
RM NOT CLOSED * E A ALAS
RM OPEN E A ALES
RM NOT OPEN * E A
DREMO NOT CLOSED * E A
DREMO NOT OPEN * E A
SA faulty E A
MTU E A
KV2

E = Input terminals of the module A = Output terminals of the module
RM = Check--back signal ALAS = Load switch OFF/CLOSED output
DREMO = Torque ALES = Load switch ON/OPEN output
SA = Switchgear KV1, KV2 = Contact power supply
MTU = Motor temperature monitoring
* NC contact
Fig. 8: Connections of the SIM modules for servo--drive

7--20
e Siemens AG
Page 312 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
3.8 Communication with AP and OM 650
3.8.1 Time--tagged Data (TTD)
- Signal TTD
module.
- Fault TTD
functions.

Please refer to the Chapters “Control Functions”, and “Step Controller” in the Manual OM 650 Process Con-
trol for further information about the displays on OM 650 (pictographs, input pushbuttons, signallings and
message texts).

7--21
e Siemens AG
Page 313 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
ABBREVI-
Status bit Check---back message (actual status) OPEN CB/OP
0
1 Check---back message (actual status) CLOSED CB/CL
2 Setpoint status in OPEN direction DS/OP
EB0 3 Setpoint status in CLOSED direction DS/CL
0 Serial (OM) control possible STOP SCSTOP
1 Serial (OM) control possible OPEN SCOP
2 Serial (OM) control possible CLOSED SCCL
3 Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement SCA
EB1 Feeder ready
4 AZB
5 No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action NOSD
0 Check---back mes. (act. status) closed-loop control CB/CLC
1 Check---back mes. (act. status) man./op.-loop control CB/MAN
2 Disable closed-loop control mode BL/CLC
EB2 3 Fault switchover manual/open-loop control STU
4 No fault NO/FAUL
6 Check---back message (actual status) NOT OPEN CB/OP_N
7 Check---back message (actual status) NOT CLOSED CB/CL_N
0 Serial (OM) control possible Automatic SC AUTO

1 Serial (OM) control possible TAG OUT SC TAG
2 Disable automatic commands BL/AUTO
EB3 4 Local control VOS
6 Disable command logic SP/BFLO
Fig. 9: Data of process image PAE_E -- servo--drive

7--22
e Siemens AG
Page 314 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
ABBREVI-
3 Status bit Collective acknowledgement BL/OM
4 Disable serial (OM) control possible BL/DT
AB0 5 Disable desk tile input STB *
6 Lamp test LP *
0 Automatic ON/OPEN A/OP
1 Automatic OFF/CLOSED A/CL
2 Automatic STOP A/STOP
3 Local control VOS
AB1 4 Protection OPEN P/OP
5 Protection CLOSED P/CL
6 Process enable OPEN EN/OP
7 Process enable CLOSED EN/CL
3 Disable closed-loop control tile BL/DT
4 Disable serial (OM) controller input BL/OM
AB2 5 Disable control command in OPEN direction BL/COP
6 Disable control command in CLOSED direction BL/CCL
7 Status double word External fault EXT/FAUL
0 Automatic command closed-loop control A/CLC
1 Automatic command manual/open-loop control A/MAN
3 Heartbeat higher level LGL
AB3 4 New pulse NIMP
5 Pulse length equal to TA IMPTA
6 Process enable closed-loop control EN/CLC
7 Status bit Process enable manual/open-loop control EN/MAN
AB4/5 Status word Pulse duration IPD
AB6 Automatic mode of operation ** AUTO
Fig. 10: Data of process image PAA_E -- servo--drive, *only with desk tile
** Only with release 4 or higher

7--23
e Siemens AG
Page 315 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
Signal TTDs
Comment Abbrevi-
ation
Check--back message (actual status) OPEN CB/OP

Check--back message (actual status) CLOSED CB/CL
Setpoint status in OPEN direction DS/OP
Setpoint status in CLOSED direction DS/CL
No status discrepancy or signalling of prot. action NOSD
Check--back mes. (act. status) CLOS.-LOOP CTRL CB/CLC
Check--back mes. (act. status) MAN/OP.-LOOP CTRL CB/MAN
Fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL STU
No fault NO/FAUL
Disable automatic command BL/AUTO
Local control VOS
Fault TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation
Status discrepancy from CLOSED to OPEN EFAE

Status discrepancy from OPEN to CLOSED EFEA
Run time violation on leaving the limit position LZV
Run time violation, total LZG
Protective action OPEN MSE
Protective action CLOSED MSA
Check-back error 1 OPEN RMF1E
Check-back error 1 CLOSED RMF1A
Torque switch OPEN fault DEAS
Torque switch CLOSED fault DEZS
Maximum torque triggered in spite of
resetting by check-back message travel limit DEABS
Motor monitoring triggered MTU
Fig. 11: Time--tagged data, servo-drive

7--24
e Siemens AG
Page 316 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
3.9 Messages and Signals on the Desk Tiles
Data exchange with the function block is carried out via an LADB and TADB (see Fig. 5).
The signal lamps ”CLOSED”, ”OPEN” and ”Fault” on the open loop/closed-loop control tile indicate:
- Setpoint statuses in running direction with flashing light (8 Hz)
If ”Disable desk tile input” is present, the signal lamp ”Fault” lights up permanently on the open-loop control
tile or the signal lamp ”Disable closed-loop control mode” on the closed-loop control tile. The actual and
setpoint statuses are still signalled as described above. Lamp testing is carried out with bit 6 in the control
word.
If ”Disable closed-loop control tile” is present, the signal lamp ”Disable closed-loop control mode” (MSPR)
lights up permanently on the closed-loop control tile.

7--25
e Siemens AG
Page 317 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
Signal representation open--loop control tile (servo--drive) Meaning

ACTUAL position
CLOSED BETWEEN (ZW) OPEN
SETPOINT direction
OPEN CLOSED
CL. Fault OPEN CL. Fault OPEN CL. Fault OPEN CL. Fault OPEN
State in position
CLOSED/OPEN/BETWEEN
Run direction OPEN/CLOSED
and check--back fault
Status discrepancy
Run time/blocking
(plausibility)
SIM module faulty
m.c.b. assembly tripped
or check--back error
Scanning of blocking or
Lamp test (o.k.)
CL. = signal lamp ”CLOSED” Fault = signal lamp ”Fault” OPEN = signal lamp ”OPEN”
Signal closed--loop tile Meaning (Lamp test as shown above)

OPEN--LOOP MSPR CLOSED-- MSPR: ”Disable closed--loop control mode or controller desk tile”
CONTROL LOOP CONT. signal lamp
MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL mode
Closed--loop control mode
Disable clos.--loop control in MAN./OPEN--LOOP CONTROL mode
Disable closed--loop control tile
or TAG--OUT switched on
Manual/open--loop control fault switchover
SIM module faulty
Scanning of blocking (disable closed--loop control tile)
Fig. 12: Signal representation at the open--loop control and setpoint desk tile, drive type 6 Servo--drive with desk tile and screen input

7--26
e Siemens AG
Page 318 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
4 Parameterization
Fig. 13 shows the symbol of the function block REGELANR similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring
system.
ESG.RA Symbol: Drive control modul control drive

PIC_ID 2562 without desk tile
PIC_ID 2565 with desk tile
Fig. 13: CSF symbol of function block REGELANR

7--27
e Siemens AG
Page 319 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
Fig. 14: Parameterization form FB165 -- servo-drive without desk tile

7--28
e Siemens AG
Page 320 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
Fig. 15: Parameterization form FB165 -- servo-drive with desk tile

7--29
e Siemens AG
Page 321 of 719

FB165 REGELANR

Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0

Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

- Desk tile STOP pushbutton (TST)
- Control pulse duration (SID)
- Check-back contact torque (RDE)
- Acquisition of actual status (EIZ)
- Time to leave limit position (TVE)
- Torque delay time in OPEN direction (TDA)
- Torque delay time in CLOSED direction (TDZ)
- MAN/AUTO changeover (MAUS)
- Command output response in case of a fault (VBAF)

7--30
e Siemens AG
Page 322 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
- Time--tagged data, servo--drive (TTD)

Name: BEL
Function: Defines the assignment of the SIM function block. BEL is generated dependent on
the FUP pictograph “SERVO--DRIVE CONTROL“ or
“SERVO--DRIVE CONTROL with desk tile“ as selected by the user
Meaning: 5 = servo-drive without desk tile input
6 = servo-drive with desk tile input
Basic setting: 5
Name: PBR
Range of values: cmd. priority: close / open
cmd. priority: open / close
Basic setting: cmd. priority: close / open
Name: BAV
Name: TST
Function: Defines whether a STOP pushbutton is provided on the desk tile for actuators or
servo-drives
Range of values: no STOPP button (jogging mode)
With STOPP button (continous)
Basic setting: no STOPP button (jogging mode)

7--31
e Siemens AG
Page 323 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
Name: SID
Function: Defines the duration of the control pulse
100 = 10 s
Basic setting: 1 = 0.1 s; adjusting steps: 0.1 s
Name: RWE
Function: Defines whether the ON/OPEN check-back message of the controlled servo-drive
can be detected, and with which type of switch
2:Detect. through changeover contact
Basic setting: 2:Detect. through changeover contact
Name: RWA
Function: Defines whether the OFF/CLOSED check-back message of the controlled
servo-drive can be detected, and with which type of switch

Name: RMS
here whether the function TAG--OUT (SP/BFLO) can be used.

7--32
e Siemens AG
Page 324 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
- Check-back contact Torque (RDE)
Name: RDE
Function: Defines whether the triggering of the direction-dependent torque can be detected,
and with which type of switch
Range of values: no recording
NO--Contact
NC--Contact
Basic setting: NC--Contact

Name: NLZ
Basic setting: 0
Name: EIZAUF
EIZZU
Function: Defines the check-back messages with which the actual status is acquired
Range of values: CB act. state = cb.end of travel
CB act. state = cb.end of travel / cb.torque
Basic setting: CB act. state = cb.end of travel
Name: WRBHAEA
WRBHAAZ
WRBSEA
WRBSAZ
not blocked
Meaning: WRBHAEA = check--back fault does not block MANUAL/AUTOMATIC ON
WRBHAAZ = check--back fault does not block MANUAL/AUTOMATIC OFF
WRBSEA = check--back fault does not block PROTECTION ON
WRBSAZ = check--back fault does not block PROTECTION OFF

7--33
e Siemens AG
Page 325 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
Name: WEFSPERR
WEFNSEA
WEFNSAZ
discrepancy
blocked

Name: TVE
Function: Defines the time within which the servo-drive must have left its limit position
following output of the command
600 = 60 s
- Total servo-drive run time (TGL)

Name: TGL
Function: Defines the total run time of the servo-drive between the limit positions
60,000 = 6,000 s
- Torque time bypass in OPEN direction (TDA)

Name: TDA
Function: Defines the time interval for which the torque signal is suppressed after start
in OPEN direction
Meaning: 0 = 0s
10,000 = 100 s

7--34
e Siemens AG
Page 326 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
- Torque time bypass in CLOSED direction (TDZ)

Name: TDZ
in CLOSED direction
Meaning: 0 = 0s
10,000 = 100 s

Name: TOUS
Function: Defines whether the TAG--OUT key in the operation window is operable (activated)
or not (not activated).
- MAN/AUTO changeover (MAUS)

Name: MAUS
Function: Defines whether the MAN/AUTO key in the operation window is operable
(activated) or not (not activated).
- Command output response in case of a fault (VBAF)

Name: VBAF
Function: Defines the command output response in the event of a fault. If the parameter
is activated the command outputs ALE and ALA are not disabled
in the event of: Status discrepancy
Check--back error
Switchgear faulty.
The VBAF parameter is only effective if “Yes” is set as well as the
parameter “TAG--OUT can be activated”.

7--35
e Siemens AG
Page 327 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
- Time--tagged data (TTD), servo--drive
Name: TTD
Meaning: 0 =
no TTD generated
1 =
generate TTD
CB/OP =
check--back message (actual status) OPEN
CB/CL =
check--back message (actual status) CLOSED
DS/OP =
setpoint status OPEN
DS/CL =
setpoint status CLOSED
ZES =
last status achieved by PROTECTION command
ZEA =
last status achieved by AUTOMATIC command
ZEH =
last status achieved by MANUAL command
AZB =
feeder ready
NOSD =
no status discrepancy or signalling of protective action
NOFF =
no feeder fault
KLB =
no run time/blocking
CB/CLC =
check--back message (actual status) CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
CB/MAN =
check--back message (actual status) MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
STU =
fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
NO/FAUL =
no fault
BL/AUTO =
disable switchover MANUAL/CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL
via automatic command
VOS = local control
SP/BFLO = disable command logic
RM/AUTO = automatic mode of operation

7--36
e Siemens AG
Page 328 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB165
Block name: REGELANR
Library number: E88530--B 8465--A--
Version: ________________↑
Average run time: 250 ms ( condition: no signal change, no fault status)

typ. 620 ms
-- Code 12500 bytes

7--37
e Siemens AG
Page 329 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
6 Abbreviations
ALAS Load switch OFF/CLOSED output
ALES Load switch ON/OPEN output
AZB Feeder ready
A/OP Automatic command OPEN
A/CLC Automatic command CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL
A/CL Automatic command CLOSED
BHA Manual command OFF/CLOSED
BHE Manual command ON/OPEN
BHS Manual command STOP
BL/CLC Disable closed--loop control mode
BL/COP Disable control command in OPEN direction
BL/CCL Disable control command in CLOSED direction
CB/CL Check-back message CLOSED
CB/CLC Check-back message (actual status) CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL
CB/CL_N Check-back message NOT CLOSED
CB/MAN Check-back message (actual status) MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL
CB/OP Check-back message OPEN
CB/OP_N Check-back message NOT OPEN
DEABS Torque switch following resetting by travel limit switch
DEAS Torque OPEN fault
DEAUF Torque in OPEN direction
DEZS Torque CLOSED fault
DEZU Torque in CLOSED direction
DS/CL Setpoint status in CLOSED direction
DS/OP Setpoint status in OPEN direction
DW Data word
EN/CL Process enable CLOSED
EN/CLC Process enable CLOPSED--LOOP CONTROL
EN/MAN Process enable MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL
EN/OP Process enable OPEN
EXT/FAUL External fault

7--38
e Siemens AG
Page 330 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
FB Function block
FGDB Enable signal in data block
IMPTA Pulse length equal to scanning time
IPD Pulse width
KV Contact power supply
LP Test lamps
LZG Run time violation, total
LZV Run time violation, leaving of limit position
MLA Signal lamp OFF/CLOSED
MLE Signal lamp ON/OPEN
MLS Signal lamp fault
MSPR Disable closed-loop control mode
MTU Motor overheating
NIMP New pulse
PAA_E Process image of outputs to individual control level (status word)
PAE_E Process image of inputs from individual control level (status word)
P/OP Protection OPEN
P/CL Protection CLOSED
RDE Check-back message from torque switch
RMA Check-back message OFF/CLOSED
RME Check-back message ON/OPEN
RMF1A Check-back error OFF, travel
RMF1E Check-back error ON, travel
RMF2A Check-back error OFF, torque
RMF2E Check-back error ON, torque
RMNA Check-back message NOT OFF/CLOSED
RMNE Check-back message NOT ON/OPEN
RM/AUTO Automatic mode of operation
SCOP Serial (OM) control possible OPEN
SCA Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement
SCSTOP Serial (OM) control possible STOP
SCCL Serial (OM) control possible CLOSED
SID Control pulse duration

7--39
e Siemens AG
Page 331 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
SIM Signal module

SIMP Control pulse
STU Fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
SVG Setpoint input, group control level
SWG Setpoint, group control level
SWH Setpoint, increase
SWT Setpoint, decrease
TA Pushbutton
TDA Torque time bypass in OPEN direction
TDZ Torque time bypass in CLOSED direction
TGL Total run time of servo-drive
URS Changeover switch closed--loop/open--loop control

7--40
e Siemens AG
Page 332 of 719

FB165 REGELANR

Fig. 16 Generation of operating modes “CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL”,
“MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL”
Fig. 17 Disable closed--loop control mode

7--41
e Siemens AG
Page 333 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
Priority
generation S CB/CLC
A/CLC
>1 R CB/MAN
A/MAN Automatic
SAB
URS
& OM
SP/OM
URS
& TF
SP/TF
EN/CLC
EN/MAN
BL/CLC
Legend:
A/MAN = Automatic command manual/open--loop control
A/CLC = Automatic command closed--loop control
EN/MAN = Process enable manual/open--loop control
EN/CLC = Process enable closed--loop control
CB/MAN = Check--back message manual/open--loop control
CB/CLC = Check--back message closed--loop control
SAB = Disable automatic command
SP/OM = Disable OM control
BL/CLC = Disable closed--loop control mode
SP/TF = Disable desk tile input
URS = Switchover command operating mode
Fig. 16: Generation of operating modes “CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL”, “MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL”

7--42
e Siemens AG
Page 334 of 719

FB165 REGELANR
NOSD
NOFF
& NO/FAUL
KLB
EXT/FAUL
LGL
>1 BL/CLC
MTU
& S STU
CB/CLC
Acknowledge OM R
>1
SQ
Legende:
EXT/FAUL = External fault
NOFF = No feeder fault
NOSD = No status discrepancy
KLB = No runtime/blocking
NO/FAUL = No fault
LGL = Heartbeat higher level
STU = Fault switchover manual/open--loop control
SQ = Collective acknowledgement
Fig. 17: Disable closed--loop control mode

7--43
e Siemens AG
Page 335 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 336 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB155 REGELANT (Servo--Drive Control)
ESG---RA
Page 337 of 719

FB155 REGELANT

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

8--2
e Siemens AG
Page 338 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--5

2.1 Servo-drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--9

3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Closed-loop Control Tile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--11
3.3 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--13
3.4.1 Servo-drive-based Check-back Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--13
3.5.1 Actual Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--13
3.6 Servo-drive Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--14
3.6.1 Motor Temperature Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--14
3.6.2 Monitoring of Fault Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--14
3.6.3 Scanning of Blocking on Servo-drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--15
3.7 Connections to the SIM Module for Servo--drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--16
3.8.2 Signalling on OM 650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--17
3.9 Messages and Signals on the Desk Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--20
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--31
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--32

8--3
e Siemens AG
Page 339 of 719

FB155 REGELANT

8--4
e Siemens AG
Page 340 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
1 Application
Step controllers (S--controllers) are used for drive controls with servo--motors.
The function block FB155 REGELANT is used as output section and control section for the step controller.
The FB155 has no control algorithm. It outputs the positioning pulses and switches the operating modes via
appropriate inputs and outputs.
The single loop control is in general devided into four functions, which are implemented in AS 620 by the
following means:
- Setpoint generation with set--point adjuster: FB88 O--SPC--G or master controller in a higher level
- Comparison of setpoint value with actual value: AS 620 user defined software
- Control algorithm (e.g. PID): FB90 SCON
- Drive control (with positioning pulse output): FUM or FB155 with SIM 265
Function:
FB90
SCON
Drive control
Output section FB155 with positioning
REGELANT pulse output
SIM 265
Manipulated variable adjuster
The drive control for the servo--drive can be carried out in the AS 620 B system using the function block
The following input and output signals can be configured for the connection of a servo--drive control:
Input signals:

- DENAUF, DENZU: maximum torque not reached in OPEN direction,


8--5
e Siemens AG
Page 341 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
- MTU: Motor temperature monitoring
Output signals:
- ALE, ALA: Load switch ON/OPEN output, Load switch OFF/CLOSED output
- KV: Contact power supply
These signals can be input with the voltage +24 V DC and output with the voltages + 24 V DC.
The signals DENAUF/DENZU are NC contacts. The signals SAG and MTU are NO contacts.
If the parameterization is done without torque signals or in the case of not used SAG and MTU signals the
corresponding inputs of the SIM 265 must not be wired.
Not wired inputs of the signals have the following effects in the function block:
MTU = “0”, i.e. not faulty
DENAUF, DENZU: = maximum torque not reached
CBOP = CBCL
CBCL = CBOP
❏ Drive control for servo--drive

FB155 REGELANT -- Output for higher level control (step controller)
-- Status acquisition
Drive control for
-- Monitoring:
servo--drive
Torque, run time, end position, undervoltage
-- Command conditioning (manual signals and
M automatic/protection signals)
SIM 265
-- Signalling and indicating
-- Producing TTDs
Fig. 2: SIM function block FB155 REGELANT and associated modules
Please refer to the Operating Instructions AS 620 B (SIM) in the AS 620--S5 System Manual, for further

8--6
e Siemens AG
Page 342 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
2 Mode of Operation
Control program
Function block AP
FB155
Input/output module
SIM 265
Fig. 3: Overview of the function block FB155 with signal modul

8--7
e Siemens AG
Page 343 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Message output
and signalling
Command generation
Command
monitoring
Check-back signal
conditioning/
Monitoring
Servo- Switchgear
Control command
drive feeder
DRIVE CONTROL
Check-back messages

8--8
e Siemens AG
Page 344 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
2.1 Servo-drive
The servo-drive has two operating modes:
- MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
- CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
In operating mode “MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”, the function block acts completely like an actuator
(see FB154 STELANT).
In operating mode “CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”, the function block only processes commands from the next
higher function block FB90 SCON. The duration and the direction of the command are defined by the FB90
via the control word. The function block FB155 converts this value into a corresponding positioning pulse and
transfers it to the logic section of the open-loop control function of the actuator where, apart from run--time
monitoring, all functions of the control and monitoring section are available as with the actuator FB154.
The servo-drive has a motor temperature monitoring function to protect the motor. Temperature sensors
are fitted in the motor winding which output a signal (MTU) to the function block when a specific temperature
has been reached. The function block then switches over from “CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” to “MANUAL/
OPEN-LOOP CONTROL” and outputs a corresponding message.
A desk tile can be connected to the function block to commit manual inputs:
- Open-loop control tile as with the actuator and
- Closed-loop control tile for mode selector.
The operating mode (CLOSED-LOOP or OPEN-LOOP CONTROL) is displayed on the closed-loop control
tile.
. Note
All manual commands are disabled by setting the bit ”Disable closed-loop control
tile” in the control word.

8--9
e Siemens AG
Page 345 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
.
Enable Closed--loop control tile Input Open--loop control tile OM
and
Operation
signalling window
MHS BHA MLA

FHD URS MSPR BHS MLS
MRE BHE MLE
SIM 482 SIM 482

ET200U
Desk tile control protective interlock
LADB TADB
Function block FB 155 REGELANT
Processing of
Control
and
Drive control module SIM 265
check--back
ET 200U
DENZU CBCL ALA

DENAUF CBCLNI ALE
SAG CBOP KV
MTU CBOPNI
Switchgear
Fig. 5: Structure of servo-drive control with function blocks (singal names: see Chap. 6 abbreviations)

8--10
e Siemens AG
Page 346 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
The functions of the actuator apply to the servo-drive in operating mode ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP
CONTROL”. Only the functions for operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” are therefore described
below.

Disable switchover MANUAL/CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL

via automatic command BL/AUTO
All commands from the screen are transmitted coded (bits 0, 1, 2) with the control word.
The switchover command URS for the operating mode memory requires the corresponding process enable
(PFR/PFS) in the control word.
The command ”Disable switchover MANUAL/CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL via automatic command” prevents
. Note
The screen input can be blocked by setting the bit SSB ”Disable serial input” in the
control word.
The bit SPR/OM ”Disable serial controller input” in the control word disables the
operating mode switchover.
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Closed-loop Control Tile)
In addition to the corresponding process enable (PFR/PFS) in the control word, the function block requires
the manual enable so that the switchover command URS sent from the desk tile becomes valid.
. Note
. Note
All manual commands are disabled when the bit ”Disable closed--loop control tile” in
the control word is set.
Automatic CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
Automatic MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
In operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”, the following control information is transferred to the
function block FB155 from the higher-level control system:

8--11
e Siemens AG
Page 347 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
New pulse
Pulse length equal to TA
Pulse duration
Disable control command in OPEN direction
Disable control command in CLOSED direction

Every change (positive or negative edge) of the bit ”New pulse” in the control word signals to the function
block FB155 that a new control pulse must be output.
If the pulse length calculated by the control system corresponds to the scanning time TA of the closed-loop
controller, the bit ”Pulse length equal to TA” is set in the control word (PAA_E). The function block outputs the
corresponding positioning command until the bit ”New pulse” changes.
The ”Pulse duration” is transmitted from the FB90 to the function block FB155 and defines the duration (in s)
and the direction of the positioning command to be output. If the pulse duration changes without a change in
the bit ”New pulse”, the function block FB155 still outputs the corresponding positioning command.
A positioning command is not output in the associated direction if one of the bits ”Disable control command
in OPEN direction” or ”Disable control command in CLOSED direction” is set.
The bit ”Heartbeat of group control level” is reset if there is a fault or failure in the group control level. If the
function block FB155 is in operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”, it carries out a fault switchover to
”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”.
The command with the highest priority is selected from the applied commands for operating mode switchover
(from the command generation function) and stored.
In Fig. 6, the switchover command with the highest priority is at the top.
Switchover command Fault switchover from CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL to

MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
Switchover commands Automatic command MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL

Automatic command CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
Switchover command URS by serial input
Switchover command URS by desk tile input
Fig. 6: Commands for operating mode switchover
. Note
A change in priority can be the reason for disabled commands (see Chap. 3.1)
The current mode of the operating mode memory is signalled by the status word.

8--12
e Siemens AG
Page 348 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
3.3 Command Output

In operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”, the output of control commands is according to the defined
direction ”OPEN” or ”CLOSED” and duration.
A STOP command is generated internally at the end of the positioning time (pulse duration), and the
command output is terminated.

3.4.1 Servo-drive-based Check-back Messages
Non-equivalence monitoring and plausibility check for travel limit switches and torque limit switches are
identical to the respective function units of the actuator (see description FB154).

The triggering and reset conditions, as well as the effects on status word, time--tagged data and further inter-
nal processing of check-back message ”Switchgear faulty” (SAG) are identical to those of the actuator con-
trol.

- Check--back message (actual status)
- Setpoint status direction
- Serial (OM) control possible ...
- Last status achieved by ...
3.5.1 Actual Status
Check---back message (actual status) OPEN (CB/OP)
Check---back message (actual status) CLOSED (CB/CL)
Check---back message (actual status) CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL (CB/CLC)
Check---back message (actual status) MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL (CB/MAN)
The ’”Actual status” of the servo-drive is used by the respective check-back signals which are generated by
The operating mode is additionally displayed with the servo-drive by means of ”Check--back message (actual
status CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” (CB/CLC) and ”Check--back message (actual status) MANUAL/OPEN-
LOOP CONTROL” (CB/MAN).
Setpoint status in OPEN direction (DS/OP) or
Setpoint status in CLOSED direction (DS/CL)
The setpoint status is made available via the control word, and is displayed on the tile signal lamps in the
case of desk tile inputs.

8--13
e Siemens AG
Page 349 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
The bits ”Serial (OM) control possible ...” are not set if a servo-drive is in operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP
CONTROL”.
A message ”Last status achieved by ...” is not generated in operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”.
3.6 Servo-drive Monitoring
The functions for torque monitoring, signalling of protective action, status discrepancy and run--time
monitoring for the servo-drive correspond to the respective function units of the actuator (see FB154).
3.6.1 Motor Temperature Monitoring
In order to protect the motor, the servo-drive has an additional motor temperature monitoring function (MTU)
which results in a switchover from ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” to ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”
when triggered.

A signal “MTU” is present.


-- No feeder fault
-- Motor temperature violated

Fault switchover from ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” to ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the signal lamp ”Fault” flashes at 2 Hz in addition.

The signal ”MTU” is no longer present.
3.6.2 Monitoring of Fault Switchover
If one of the faults listed below occurs, a switchover is made to operating mode ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP
CONTROL” if the module is in operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”.

8--14
e Siemens AG
Page 350 of 719

FB155 REGELANT

-- Failure of next higher level or group control level (LGL in control word)
-- An external fault is present (EXS in control word)
-- A protection command (control word) is present
-- The motor temperature monitoring function has been triggered
-- One of the following bits in the status word is not set:
-- ”No status discrepancy”
-- ”No feeder fault”
-- ”No run time/blocking”.
In operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL”:
The bits “Actual status CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” and “No fault” are reset. The following bits
are set:
-- ”Actual status MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”
-- ”Fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”
-- ”Disable closed-loop control mode”
-- ”Serial input acknowledgement” (omitted with disabling of serial input)
In operating mode ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”:
Only the bit ”Disable closed-loop control mode” is set.
D Effect on time--tagged data
-- Actual status MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
-- Fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
-- Fault
A fault switchover (delayed by 200 ms) is made from operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CON-
TROL” to ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL”. Setpoint inputs from the desk tile and the screen
as well as the mode switchover are blocked.
D Signalling
Signalling on the open-loop control tile is according to the fault. The fault switchover is signalled
by flashing at 2 Hz of the signal lamps ”Disable closed-loop control mode” (MSPR) and
”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” on the closed-loop control tile. If the function block was already in
operating mode ”MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL” the signal lamp ”Disable closed-loop con-
trol mode” (MSPR) lights up permanently.
D Acknowledgement on desk tile using URS pushbutton (omitted with disabling of desk tile input)
D Acknowledgement via control word (automatic collective acknowledgement)
It is possible to switch back to operating mode ”CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL” again once the
fault has been eliminated and if protection commands are no longer present.
3.6.3 Scanning of Blocking on Servo-drive
In closed-loop control mode, the open-loop control pushbuttons CLOSED and OPEN are blocked.
The blocking is signalled by permanent lighting-up of the signal lamp ”CLOSED” when pressing the CLOSED
pushbutton, and permanent lighting-up of the signal lamp ”OPEN” when pressing the OPEN pushbutton
(signal only as long as the pushbutton is pressed).
Blocking of the setpoint pushbuttons is signalled by permanent lighting-up of the signal lamp ”Disable closed-
loop control mode” when the setpoint pushbuttons (INCREASE/DECREASE) are pressed and if the setpoint
input is from the group control level (SVG in control word).

8--15
e Siemens AG
Page 351 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
3.7 Connections to the SIM Module for Servo--drive
Control program
Function block AP
FB155
SIM 265
RM CLOSED E A
M
RM NOT CLOSED * E A ALA
RM OPEN E A ALE
RM NOT OPEN * E A
SA faulty E A
Motor temperature E A
E = Input terminals of the module ALA = Load switch OFF/CLOSED output

A = Output terminals of the module ALE = Load switch ON/OPEN output
RM = Check--back signal
DREMO = Torque
SA = Switchgear
* NC contact
Fig. 7: Connections of the module SIM 265 for servo--drive
Command reset upon activation of the torque switch has been implemented on the SIM module (EPROM).

8--16
e Siemens AG
Page 352 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
- Signal TTD
module.
- Fault TTD
functions.

Please refer to the Chapters “Control Functions”, and “Step Controller” in the Manual OM 650 Process Con-
trol for further information about the displays on OM 650 (pictographs, input pushbuttons, signallings and
message texts).

8--17
e Siemens AG
Page 353 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
ABBREVI-
0 Status bit Check---back message (actual status) OPEN CB/OP
3 Setpoint status in CLOSED direction DS/CL
0 Serial (OM) control possible STOP SCSTOP
3 Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement SBQ
4 Feeder ready AZB
5 No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action NOSD
0 Check---back mes. (act. status) closed-loop control CB/CLC
1 Check---back mes. (act. status) man./op.-loop control CB/MAN
2 Disable closed-loop control mode BL/CLC
3 Fault switchover manual/open-loop control STU
4 No fault NO/FAUL
2 Status bit Disable automatic commands BL/AUTO
Fig. 8: Data of process image PAE_E -- servo--drive
ABBREVI-
3 Status bit Collective acknowledgement BL/OM
4 Disable serial (OM) control possible BL/DT
5 Disable desk tile input STB*
6 Lamp test LP*
0 Automatic ON/OPEN A/OP
1 Automatic OFF/CLOSED A/CL
4 Protection OPEN P/OP
3 Disable closed-loop control tile BL/DT
4 Disable serial (OM) controller input BL/OM
5 Disable control command in OPEN direction BL/COP
6 Disable control command in CLOSED direction BL/CCL
7 External fault EXT/FAUL
0 Automatic command closed-loop control A/CLC
1 Automatic command manual/open-loop control A/MAN
3 Heartbeat higher level LGL
4 New pulse NIMP
5 Pulse length equal to TA IMPTA
6 Process enable closed-loop control EN/CLC
7 Process enable manual/open-loop control EN/MAN
Status bit
Status word Pulse duration IPD
Fig. 9: Data of process image PAA!_E -- servo--drive, *only with desk tile

8--18
e Siemens AG
Page 354 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Signal TTDs
Comment Abbrevi-
ation

Check--back mes. (act. status) CLOS.-LOOP CTRL CB/CLC
Check--back mes. (act. status) MAN/OP.-LOOP CTRL CB/MAN
Fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL STU
No fault NO/FAUL
Disable automatic command BL/AUTO
Fault TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation

Run time violation on leaving of limit position LZV
Maximum torque triggered in spite of
resetting by check-back message travel limit DEABS
Motor monitoring triggered MTU
Fig. 10: Time--tagged data, servo-drive

8--19
e Siemens AG
Page 355 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
3.9 Messages and Signals on the Desk Tiles
Data exchange with the function block is carried out via an LADB and TADB (see Fig. 5).
The signal lamps ”CLOSED”, ”OPEN” and ”Fault” on the open loop/closed-loop control tile indicate:
If ”Disable desk tile input” is present, the signal lamp ”Fault” lights up permanently on the open-loop control
tile or the signal lamp ”Disable closed-loop control mode” on the closed-loop control tile. The actual and
setpoint statuses are still signalled as described above. Lamp testing is carried out with bit 6 in the control
word.
If ”Disable closed-loop control tile” is present, the signal lamp ”Disable closed-loop control mode” (MSPR)
lights up permanently on the closed-loop control tile.

8--20
e Siemens AG
Page 356 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Signal representation open--loop control tile (servo--drive) Meaning

ACTUAL position
SETPOINT direction
OPEN CLOSED
State in position
CLOSED/OPEN/BETWEEN
Status discrepancy
Run time/blocking
(plausibility)
SIM module faulty
Block inquiry
Lamp test (o.k.)
Signal closed--loop tile Meaning (Lamp test as shown above)

OPEN--LOOP MSPR CLOSED-- MSPR: ”Disable closed--loop control mode or controller desk tile”
CONTROL LOOP CONT. signal lamp
MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL mode
Closed--loop control mode
Disable clos.--loop control in MAN./OPEN--LOOP CONTROL mode
Disable closed--loop control tile
Manual/open--loop control fault switchover
SIM module faulty
Block inquiry (disable closed--loop control tile)
Fig. 11: Signal representation at the open--loop and closed--loop control tile, Servo--drive with desk tile and screen input

8--21
e Siemens AG
Page 357 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
4 Parameterization
Fig. 12 shows the symbol of the function block REGELANT similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring
system.
ESG.RA Symbol: Drive control modul control drive

Fig. 12: CSF symbol of function block REGELANT

8--22
e Siemens AG
Page 358 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Fig. 13: Parameterization form FB155 -- servo-drive without desk tile

8--23
e Siemens AG
Page 359 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Fig. 14: Parameterization form FB155 -- servo-drive with desk tile

8--24
e Siemens AG
Page 360 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

8--25
e Siemens AG
Page 361 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Name: BEL
the FUP pictograph “SERVO--DRIVE CONTROL“ or
“SERVO--DRIVE CONTROL with desk tile“ as selected by the user
Meaning: 5 = servo-drive without desk tile input
6 = servo-drive with desk tile input
Basic setting: 5
Name: PBR
Name: BAV
Basic setting: pers.cmd:N -- inv.:N-- RT.err--reset:N
Name: TST
servo-drives

8--26
e Siemens AG
Page 362 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Name: SID
100 = 10 s
Name: RWE
Name: RWA
Name: RDE
NC--Contact

8--27
e Siemens AG
Page 363 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Name: EIZAUF
EIZZU
Name: WRBHAEA
WRBHAAZ
WRBSEA
WRBSAZ
not blocked
Name: WEFSPERR
WEFNSEA
WEFNSAZ
discrepancy
blocked

Name: TVE
600 = 60 s

8--28
e Siemens AG
Page 364 of 719

FB155 REGELANT

Name: TGL
60,000 = 6,000 s

Name: TDA
in OPEN direction
Meaning: 0 = 0s
10,000 = 100 s

Name: TDZ
in CLOSED direction
Meaning: 0 = 0s
10,000 = 100 s

8--29
e Siemens AG
Page 365 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
- Time--tagged data (TTD), servo--drive
Name: TTD
1 = generate TTD
CB/OP = check--back message (actual status) OPEN
CB/CL = check--back message (actual status) CLOSED
DS/OP = setpoint status OPEN
DS/CL = setpoint status CLOSED
AZB = feeder ready
CB/CLC = check--back message (actual status) CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
CB/MAN = check--back message (actual status) MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
STU = fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
NO/FAUL = no fault
BL/AUTO = disable switchover MANUAL/CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL
via automatic command

8--30
e Siemens AG
Page 366 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB155
Block name: REGELANT
Library number: E88530--B 8455--A--
Version: ________________↑

typ. 500 ms
-- Code 9288 bytes

8--31
e Siemens AG
Page 367 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
6 Abbreviations
ALA Load switch OFF/CLOSED output
ALE Load switch ON/OPEN output
AZB Feeder ready
A/CLC Automatic command CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL

BEAUF Command OPEN
BEZU Command CLOSED
BL/CCL Disable control command in CLOSED direction
BL/CLC Disable closed--loop control mode
BL/COP Disable control command in OPEN direction
CBCLNI Check-back message NOT CLOSED

CBOPNI Check-back message NOT OPEN

DENAUF Torque not reached in OPEN direction
DENZU Torque not reached in CLOSED direction
DW Data word

EXT/FAUL External fault
EN/CLC Process enable CLOPSED--LOOP CONTROL

8--32
e Siemens AG
Page 368 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
EN/MAN Process enable MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL

FB Function block
IMPTA Pulse length equal to scanning time

IPD Pulse width

LAAUF Lamp OPEN
LAHAND Lamp MANUAL
LAREG Lamp CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL
LAZU Lamp CLOSED
LP Test lamps

MTU Motor overheating
NIMP New pulse



RMF1A Check-back message OFF, travel
RMF1E Check-back message ON, travel
RMF2A Check-back message OFF, torque
RMF2E Check-back message ON, torque

8--33
e Siemens AG
Page 369 of 719

FB155 REGELANT

SBAUF Serial (OM) control possible OPEN
SCA Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement
SCSTOP Serial (OM) control possible STOP
SCCL Serial (OM) control possible CLOSED
SIM Signal module
SIMP Control pulse
STU Fault switchover MANUAL/OPEN-LOOP CONTROL
SVG Setpoint input, group control level
SWG Setpoint, group control level
SWH Setpoint, increase
SWT Setpoint, decrease
TA Pushbutton
TAAUF Command pushbutton OPEN
TAHOE Pushbutton command INCREASE
TATIEF Pushbutton command DECREASE
TASTOP Pushbutton command STOP
TAURH Selector pushbutton CLOSED-LOOP CONTROLLER/MANUAL
TAZU Pushbutton command CLOSED



8--34
e Siemens AG
Page 370 of 719

FB155 REGELANT

Fig. 15 Generation of operating modes “CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL”,
“MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL”
Fig. 16 Disable closed--loop control mode

8--35
e Siemens AG
Page 371 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
Priority
generation S CB/CLC
A/CLC
>1 R CB/MAN
A/MAN Automatic
SAB
URS
& OM
SP/OM
URS
& TF
SP/TF
EN/CLC
EN/MAN
BL/CLC
Legend:
A/MAN = Automatic command manual/open--loop control
A/CLC = Automatic command closed--loop control
EN/MAN = Process enable manual/open--loop control
EN/CLC = Process enable closed--loop control
CB/MAN = Check--back message manual/open--loop control
SAB = Disable automatic command
SP/OM = Disable OM control
SP/TF = Disable desk tile input
URS = Switchover command operating mode
Fig. 15: Generation of operating modes “CLOSED--LOOP CONTROL”, “MANUAL/OPEN--LOOP CONTROL”

8--36
e Siemens AG
Page 372 of 719

FB155 REGELANT
NOSD
NOFF
& NO/FAUL
KLB
EXT/FAUL
LGL
>1 BL/CLC
MTU
& S STU
CB/CLC
Acknowledge OM R
>1
SQ
Legende:
EXT/FAUL = External fault
NOFF = No feeder fault
NOSD = No status discrepancy
KLB = No runtime/blocking
NO/FAUL = No fault
LGL = Heartbeat higher level
STU = Fault switchover manual/open--loop control
SQ = Collective acknowledgement
Fig. 16: Disable closed--loop control mode

8--37
e Siemens AG
Page 373 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 374 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB156 REVAN (Reversing Drive)
ESG--REV
Page 375 of 719

FB156 REVAN

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

8--2
e Siemens AG
Page 376 of 719

FB156 REVAN
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--5

2.1 Reversing Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--7

3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Open-loop Control Tile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--9
3.1.5 Command from the EMERGENCY OFF Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--10
3.3 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--11
3.4.1.1 Non-equivalence Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--12
3.4.2 Feeder--based Check-back Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--13
3.4.2.1 Check-back Messages ”Switchgear Fault” (SAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--13
3.4.2.2 Check-back Message ”Feeder not Ready” (ANB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--14
3.5.1 Check-back Messages (Actual Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--15
3.6.4 Run Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--20
3.7 Messages and Signals on the Open-loop Control Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--22
3.8 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--24
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--27
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--34
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--35

8--3
e Siemens AG
Page 377 of 719

FB156 REVAN

8--4
e Siemens AG
Page 378 of 719

FB156 REVAN
1 Application
The drive control for reversing drives is carried out in the AS 620 B system (SIM version) using the function
block FB156 in conjunction with the signal modules (SIM) of the ET 200 I/O device.
The function block FB156 establishes the connection between the automation processor (AP) and the
SIM 323 / SIM 482 hardware. The source and destination of the signals for the function block are data
blocks (DB). A function block call with its parameter set is required for each drive.

8--5
e Siemens AG
Page 379 of 719

FB156 REVAN
2 Mode of Operation
Fig. 1 shows the software functions which can be executed by the function block FB156.
Desk tile Control word Status word TTD Desk tile
Message output
and signalling
Command generation
Command
priority Drive
monitoring
Check-back signal
conditioning/
Command monitoring
section
Monitoring
Control command
Drive Switchgear
feeder
Check-back messages
Fig. 1: Software functions of FB156

8--6
e Siemens AG
Page 380 of 719

FB156 REVAN
2.1 Reversing Drive
The reversing drive is used to control conveyor belts. The characteristics and functions of the motor drive are
mainly applicable. However, two feeders are controlled for a belt drive according to the direction of rotation
(clockwise or counterclockwise). A dead interval on reversing can be parameterized. The command Manual
STOP (corresponds in motor to command Manual OFF) from the screen or desk tile always acts on both
motors, however. The same applies to the commands:
- Undervoltage protection OFF and
- EMERGENCY OFF (safety function triggered).
Contrary to the motor drive version, the desk tile for the reversing drive has four signal lamps. The fourth
lamp signals the STOP status. This only lights up permanently when both motors have been switched off.

8--7
e Siemens AG
Page 381 of 719

FB156 REVAN
Enable Desk tile OM
Operation
window
TARE LARE
TASTOP LASTOP
TALI LALI
LASTOE
SIM 323 SIM 323

SIM 482 SIM 482
ET200
Desk tile triggering Automatic, controller,

LADB TADB
Function block FB156 REVAN
AP
Input/Output module
SIM 323
SIM 482
ET 200
SAF RMR BERL

ANB RMRNI BELL
NOT RML BEST
UGS RMLNI KONV
Switch gear
Fig. 2: Structure of drive control REVAN with function blocks

8--8
e Siemens AG
Page 382 of 719

FB156 REVAN
A reversing drive is a motor drive with two directions of rotation. Two switchgear plug-ins are provided as the
power control unit, one for each direction of rotation.
Each command for one of the two directions of rotation results in a STOP command for the other direction. It
is therefore unnecessary to enter an additional STOP command when changing from COUNTERCLOCKWI-
SE to CLOCKWISE.
Manual CLOCKWISE
Manual COUNTERCLOCKWISE
Manual STOP
A command entered via the screen only becomes valid when the corresponding process enable (EN/LE,
EN/LEST, EN/RI, EN/RIST) is present in the process image PAA_E (see Fig. 6).
. Note
The screen input can be blocked by setting the bit ”Disable serial (OM) input” in the
process image PAA_E.
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Open-loop Control Tile)
Manual CLOCKWISE
Manual COUNTERCLOCKWISE
Manual STOP
In addition to the corresponding process enable (EN/LE, EN/LEST, EN/RI, EN/RIST) in the process image
PAA_E, the function block requires the manual enable so that the command sent from the desk tile becomes
valid.
. Note
The manual enable pushbutton must be pressed simultaneously with the respective
command pushbutton.
. Note
in the process image PAA_E.

8--9
e Siemens AG
Page 383 of 719

FB156 REVAN
Automatic COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON
Automatic COUNTERCLOCKWISE STOP
Automatic CLOCKWISE ON
Automatic CLOCKWISE STOP
Protection COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON
Protection COUNTERCLOCKWISE STOP
Protection CLOCKWISE ON
Protection CLOCKWISE STOP
The commands from the higher-level automatic system ”Automatic COUNTERCLOCKWISE/CLOCKWISE

ON or STOP” are transmitted like the required process enable with the process image PAA_E (see Fig. 6).
The protection commands ”Protection COUNTERCLOCKWISE/CLOCKWISE ON or STOP” are also
transmitted with the process image PAA_E and do not require a process enable.
transmitted in the process image PAA_E. The result is that an executed protection command need not be
acknowledged.
Undervoltage protection OFF/STOP
The command ”Undervoltage protection OFF/STOP” (UA) from the undervoltage monitoring function
immediately switches off the drive in the event of an undervoltage (STOP).
3.1.5 Command from the EMERGENCY OFF Pushbutton
EMERGENCY OFF
As long as the command is present, the command channels (CLOCKWISE/COUNTERCLOCKWISE) remain

blocked until acknowledged.
rity is at the top.

8--10
e Siemens AG
Page 384 of 719

FB156 REVAN
EMERGENCY OFF
Undervoltage protection OFF/STOP
Protection commands Protection STOP (CLOCKWISE STOP or

COUNTERCLOCKWISE STOP)
Protection COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON
Protection CLOCKWISE ON
Automatic STOP (CLOCKWISE STOP or

COUNTERCLOCKWISE STOP)
Automatic commands Automatic COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON
Automatic CLOCKWISE ON
Manual STOP
Manual commands Manual COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON
Manual CLOCKWISE ON
Automatic restart following undervoltage

(ON command)
The original direction of rotation is stored in the event of an undervoltage protection OFF/STOP (UA).
Automatic restarting is carried out in the stored direction.
3.3 Command Output

The command output function outputs the control command until the reset criterion has been reached.
The parameter BAV (command output version) can be used to define whether the command is to be output
as a continuous command and whether the command output is to be inverted.
The parameter DUP (dead interval on reversing) can be used to parameterize a pause when reversing the
direction of rotation. The drive remains switched off (STOP) for the set time when directly switching from one
direction of rotation to the other.
the actual check-back messages (actual status) of the drive as quickly and as accurately as possible. The
signals from the travel limit switches are monitored for this purpose.
A check is first carried out, however, to establish whether the check-back signals are valid. The check-back
signals are valid if the signals from a changeover contact are non-equivalent. If this is the case, the valid
check-back message is processed further as follows:
- Valid check-back message COUNTERCLOCKWISE (RML) comes and no control command CCW
----> set check-back message COUNTERCLOCKWISE (RML) with a delay

8--11
e Siemens AG
Page 385 of 719

FB156 REVAN
- Valid check-back message COUNTERCLOCKWISE (RML) comes and control command CCW
----> set check-back message COUNTERCLOCKWISE (RML) without a delay
- Valid check-back message COUNTERCLOCKWISE (RML) goes and no control command STOP
----> delete check-back message COUNTERCLOCKWISE (RML) with a delay
- Valid check-back message COUNTERCLOCKWISE (RML) goes and control command STOP
----> delete check-back message COUNTERCLOCKWISE (RML) without a delay.
The valid check-back signal RMR is processed in a similar manner.
The limit positions can always be monitored using a changeover contact or an NO contact; these can be
selected using the parameters RWE (check-back contact for travel limit ON) for the limit position ON and
RWA (check-back contact for travel limit OFF) for the limit position OFF.
When using NO contacts (set using parameters), the missing check-back signals “RML” or “RMR” are
generated by inverting the signals “RML” or “RMR”.
3.4.1.1 Non-equivalence Monitoring

The check-back messages of a changeover contact have a double ”0” or ”1” signal for longer than
one processing cycle (e.g. 100 ms).
- Effects on the process image (PAE_E) (see Fig. 6)

The bit “No feeder fault” is reset and the bit “Check-back message (actual status) CLOCKWISE” is
set if the following conditions are satisfied:
Old status New status TTD PAE_E

RMR RMRNI RMR RMRNI RMF1R RM/RE
0 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1 1 0
1 0 0 0 1 1 1) 1) As long as no valid
1 0 1 1 1 1 1) check-back from
COUNTER-
CLOCKWISE is
present
Corresponding conditions apply to the bit “Check-back message (actual status)
COUNTERCLOCKWISE”.

The following signal TTDs (see Fig. 6) are generated if the respective status bit of the drive is
-- No feeder fault
-- Check-back message (actual status) CLOCKWISE or
-- Check-back message (actual status) COUNTERCLOCKWISE
-- Check-back fault 1 CLOCKWISE or
-- Check-back fault 1 COUNTERCLOCKWISE

8--12
e Siemens AG
Page 386 of 719

FB156 REVAN
- Effects on further internal processing, signalling

(see following section, Plausibility Check)

Repair, or fault no longer present.
The valid check-back signals RML and RMR are monitored for plausibility.

Check-back messages of the 2 changeover contacts are valid, but both have a ”1” signal.
- Effects on the process image (see Fig. 6)

D Check-back message (actual status) CLOCKWISE
D Check-back message (actual status) COUNTERCLOCKWISE

The following signal TTDs (see Fig. 7) are generated if the respective status bit of the drive is
-- No feeder fault
-- Check-back fault 1 CLOCKWISE or
-- Check-back fault 1 COUNTERCLOCKWISE

D blocks the command output dependent on the direction,
D blocks all signalling of protective actions,
D blocks the output of status discrepancies dependent on the direction.
- Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the signal lamp ”Fault” flashes at 2 Hz. The signal lamp ”CLOCKWISE or
COUNTERCLOCKWISE” lights up according to the actual statuses in the process image PAE_E.

Repair
3.4.2 Feeder--based Check-back Messages
3.4.2.1 Check-back Messages ”Switchgear Fault” (SAG)
AC 230 V -- feeder fuse of direct motor control blown.


8--13
e Siemens AG
Page 387 of 719

FB156 REVAN

The following signal TTD is generated if the respective status bit of the drive is parameterized as a
TTD:
-- No feeder fault
-- Switchgear fault

D Resets the command memory
D Blocks the command output
- Signalling
Reset condition
Repair
3.4.2.2 Check-back Message ”Feeder not Ready” (ANB)
Switchgear plug-in set to test condition.


The following signal TTD is generated if the respective status bit of the drive is parameterized as a
TTD:
-- Feeder ready

None
- Signalling
With a desk tile input, the signal lamp ”Fault” lights up permanently.
- Reset condition
Insert switchgear plug-in completely again.
Check-back message (actual status)
Serial (OM) input ...
Last status achieved by ...

8--14
e Siemens AG
Page 388 of 719

FB156 REVAN
3.5.1 Check-back Messages (Actual Status)
Check-back message (actual status) CLOCKWISE (CB/RI)
Check-back message (actual status) COUNTERCLOCKWISE (CB/LE)
The actual status of the reversing drive is used by the respective check-back signals which are generated by
The actual status is made available via the process image PAE_E (see Fig. 6), and is displayed on the tile
signal lamps in the case of desk tile inputs.
Serial (OM) control possible CLOCKWISE
Serial (OM) control possible COUNTERCLOCKWISE
automatic or manual), and is made available via the process image PAE_E. If a status discrepancy is
present, no information is output on achievement of the last status.
Manual COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON MANUAL

CLOCKWISE ON
STOP
Automatic COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON/STOP AUTOMATIC

CLOCKWISE ON/STOP
Protection COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON/STOP PROTECTION

CLOCKWISE ON/STOP
UA, EMERGENCY OFF

8--15
e Siemens AG
Page 389 of 719

FB156 REVAN
If an undervoltage limit signal is present, a command ”Undervoltage protection OFF/STOP” (UA) is

generated which immediately switches off a switched-on drive (STOP). A monitoring time (parameter TUM:
Max. undervoltage time) is started at the same time. The drive can be automatically restarted if the
undervoltage limit signal disappears within this time. The direction of rotation prior to switching-off is taken
into account.
The drives can be staggered when restarting to prevent overloading of the busbar, i.e. a switch-on delay time
can be set for each drive using the parameter TWS. If a switch-on delay is parameterized, the control
. Note
Restarting has the lowest priority and only takes place if no commands with higher

The undervoltage limit signal ”UGS” arrives via the process image PAA_E.

D Within the permissible undervoltage time (parameter TUM)):
-- “Undervoltage time running” (only with drives which were previously at
COUNTERCLOCKWISE/CLOCKWISE)
-- “Last status achieved by PROTECTION” (only with drives which were previously at
COUNTERCLOCKWISE/CLOCKWISE)
-- “Undervoltage limit signal” (also with drives which were previously at STOP).
D Following expiry of the permissible undervoltage time:
-- “Undervoltage limit signal” (also with drives which were previously at STOP)
-- “Serial (OM) input acknowledgement” (omitted with disabling of serial (OM) input).
The bits “No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action” (omitted with disabling of
signalling of protective action) and “Undervoltage time running” are reset.

8--16
e Siemens AG
Page 390 of 719

FB156 REVAN

The following signal TTDs (see Fig. 7) are generated provided the respective status bit of the drive
has been parameterized as a TTD:
-- Undervoltage protective action OFF/STOP

D Within the permissible undervoltage time:
D Following expiry of the permissible undervoltage time:
The command ”Undervoltage protection OFF/STOP” (UA) deletes the ON command memory
following expiry of the parameterized permissible undervoltage time, sets the command memory
(CLOCKWISE/COUNTERCLOCKWISE), sets the STOP command memory and generates the
message “Status discrepancy or signalling of protective action”.
- Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the display is as with “Status discrepancy from CLOCKWISE/COUNTER-
CLOCKWISE to STOP”.

-- Acknowledgement on screen (omitted with disabling of serial (OM) input)
-- Acknowledgement -- automatic collective acknowledgement
-- Acknowledgement on desk tile (omitted with disabling of desk tile input) using the STOP
pushbutton (without enable pushbutton).
”Protective action” is signalled if the drive has been switched on or off by a protection command, if the drive
has been switched off because of an undervoltage and a restart could not take place within the permissible
undervoltage time, or if the drive has been switched off because of an EMERGENCY OFF command.
The message “Protective action” can be blocked using the bit ”Disable signalling of protective action” in the
process image PAA_E.

8--17
e Siemens AG
Page 391 of 719

FB156 REVAN

The bit “No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action” is reset (omitted with disabling of
signalling of protective action).
D “Last status achieved by PROTECTION”
D “Check-back message (actual status) CLOCKWISE” or “Check-back message (actual status)
COUNTERCLOCKWISE”
D “Serial input (OM) acknowledgement”.

The following signal TTDs are generated (see Fig. 7) provided the respective status bit of the drive
-- Protective action CLOCKWISE or
-- Protective action COUNTERCLOCKWISE
-- Protective action STOP

Blocks the command channel in the opposite direction -- both command channels are blocked with
STOP.
- Signalling (omitted with disabling of signalling of protective action)

With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed depending on the direction.

D Acknowledgement -- automatic collective acknowledgement
A status discrepancy is present if the check-back message (actual status) changes without a corresponding
command. It is assumed that the new actual position has been signalled by non-faulty check-back
messages. A status discrepancy is not generated if a check-back fault is present.
The status discrepancy monitoring function monitors local control or the manipulation of check-back
message contacts. The status discrepancy monitoring function can be disabled by appropriate
parameterization.

8--18
e Siemens AG
Page 392 of 719

FB156 REVAN
command.
Before Afterwards EFSnL EFSnR EFRnS EFLnS EF

(setpoint position in
reference memory)
STOP CCW Yes Yes

STOP CLOCKWISE Yes Yes
CCW STOP Yes Yes
CLOCKWISE STOP Yes Yes
CCW CLOCKWISE Yes Yes Yes
CLOCKWISE CCW, Yes Yes Yes
EFSnL = Status discrepancy from STOP to CCW

EFSnR = Status discrepancy from STOP to CW
CCW = COUNTER-
CLOCKWISE EFRnS = Status discrepancy from CW to STOP
CW = CLOCKWISE EFLnS = Status discrepancy from CCW to STOP


achieved by ...” are reset. The bit “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” is set. If the drive
is at a limit position, the bits “Check-back message (actual status) CLOCKWISE or
COUNTERCLOCKWISE” are also set.

The following signal TTDs (see Fig. 7) are generated provided the respective status bit of the drive
-- Status discrepancy from COUNTERCLOCKWISE to STOP or
-- Status discrepancy from CLOCKWISE to STOP or
-- Status discrepancy from STOP to CLOCKWISE or
-- Status discrepancy from STOP to COUNTERCLOCKWISE

- Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed dependent on the direction of rotation.

8--19
e Siemens AG
Page 393 of 719

FB156 REVAN

3.6.4 Run Time Monitoring
The run time monitoring function is used with the reversing drive to monitor the switch-on and switch-off
processes.
The parameter TVE (time for leaving of limit position) can be used to parameterized the permissible
switching time from COUNTERCLOCKWISE or CLOCKWISE to STOP. The parameter TGL (total run time of
drive) can be used to parameterize the permissible switching time from STOP to CLOCKWISE or
COUNTERCLOCKWISE.
valid for this direction or status (STOP).
- Effects on the process image (PAA_E) (see Fig. 6)

The bit “No run time/blocking” is reset.
The bit “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” is set.

The following signal TTDs (see Fig. 7) are generated providing the respective status bit of the drive
-- Run time violation CLOCKWISE
-- Run time violation COUNTERCLOCKWISE

Disables the display for direction of rotation.
- Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is additionally displayed dependent on the direction of rotation.

D Operating status is achieved with delay.
By pressing the command pushbutton CLOCKWISE, COUNTERCLOCKWISE or STOP on the open-loop

control tile without an enable pushbutton, the operator can determine whether the desired command
direction is enabled for manual control.

8--20
e Siemens AG
Page 394 of 719

FB156 REVAN
- Triggering conditions in CLOCKWISE direction

D Process enable F/RE missing or
D Undervoltage protection OFF (STOP) present or
D Protection command COUNTERCLOCKWISE or protection command STOP present or
D Automatic command COUNTERCLOCKWISE or automatic command STOP present.
- Triggering conditions in COUNTERCLOCKWISE direction

D Process enable F/LI missing or
D Undervoltage protection OFF (STOP) present or
D Protection command CLOCKWISE or protection command STOP present or
D Automatic command CLOCKWISE or automatic command STOP present.
- Triggering conditions in STOP direction

D Process enable F/LIST or F/REST missing or
D Protection command CLOCKWISE or protection command COUNTERCLOCKWISE present or
D Automatic command CLOCKWISE or automatic command COUNTERCLOCKWISE present.

None

None

None
- Reset condition

8--21
e Siemens AG
Page 395 of 719

FB156 REVAN
3.7 Messages and Signals on the Open-loop Control Tile
The signal lamps ”COUNTERCLOCKWISE”, ”CLOCKWISE”, ”STOP” and ”Fault” on the open-loop control
tile indicate:
- The dead interval with direct reversing (8 Hz)
If ”Disable desk tile input” is present, the signal lamp ”Fault” lights up permanently. There are no other fault
displays in addition. The actual and setpoint statuses are still signalled as described above. Lamp testing is
carried out with bit 6 in the process image PAE_E.
The signal lamp for the STOP status lights up permanently when the drive is stationary.

8--22
e Siemens AG
Page 396 of 719

FB156 REVAN
Signal pattern Meaning

Actual position
COUNTERCLOCKWISE STOP CLOCKWISE
CCW Fault STOP CW CCW Fault STOP CW CCW Fault STOP CW
LEFT/STOP/CW
Dead interval on reversing:
from CCW to CW
from CW to CCW
SIM module faulty
Double ”1” check-back fault
Check-back fault
Check-back fault
Circuit-breaker tripped
Status discrepancy from:
CCW to STOP
CW to STOP
STOP to CCW
STOP to CW
CW to CCW
CCW to CW
Timeout
corresponding to
”Status discrepancy”
Protection CCW/CW
Protection CCW/CW
Scanning of blocking
Lamp test
(OK)
Lamp off Permanent light Flashing light 2 Hz Flickering light 8 Hz
CCW = signal lamp ”COUNTERCLOCKWISE” Fault = signal lamp ”Fault”

CW = signal lamp ”CLOCKWISE” STOP = signal lamp ”STOP”
Fig. 5: Signal patterns on the open-loop control tile, drive type 8 -- reversing drive with screen and desk tile inputs

8--23
e Siemens AG
Page 397 of 719

FB156 REVAN
3.8 Communication
Data exchange with the block is carried out using the control word and status word. With a desk tile
connection, communication is additionally carried out via an LADB and TADB.
- Signal TTD
Parameters can be set to select the binary or analog input signals as well as signals generated on the
module (e.g. limit signals) if they are required in the process control level for message output and logging.
- Fault TTD
functions.

8--24
e Siemens AG
Page 398 of 719

FB156 REVAN
ABBREV-
Status word (process image PAE_E)
0 Status bit Check-back message (actual status) CW CB/RI
1 Check-back message (actual status) CCW CB/LE
2 Dead interval on reversing UPL
3 Serial (OM) control possible STOP SBSTOP

1 Serial (OM) control possible CLOCKWISE SBRECHTS
2 Serial (OM) control possible CCW SBLINKS
3 Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgem. SCA
4 Feeder ready AZB
5 No stat. discrep. or signalling of prot. action NOSD
0 Setpoint status CLOCKWISE DSRI

1 Setpoint status COUNTERCLOCKWISE DSLE
2 Actual status STOP IZS
3 Check-back message (actual status) Not CW CB/RI_N
4 Status bit Check-back message (actual status) Not CCW CB/LE_N
Control word (process image PAA_E)

4 Disable serial (OM) input BL/OM
5 Disable desk tile input BL/DT*
6 Lamp test LP*
0 Automatic COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON A/LE
1 Automatic COUNTERCLOCKWISE STOP A/LEST
4 Protection COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON P/LE
5 Protection COUNTERCLOCKWISE STOP P/LEST
6 Process enable CCW ON EN/LE
7 Process enable CCW STOP EN/LEST
0 Automatic CLOCKWISE ON A/RI

1 Automatic CLOCKWISE STOP A/RIST
2 Protection CLOCKWISE ON P/RI
3 Protection CLOCKWISE STOP P/RIST
4 Process enable CLOCKWISE ON EN/RI
5 Status bit Process enable CLOCKWISE STOP EN/RIST
Fig. 6: Data of process image, drive type 8 -- reversing drive with screen and desk tile inputs

8--25
e Siemens AG
Page 399 of 719

FB156 REVAN
Signal TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation
Check-back message (actual status) CLOCKWISE CB/RI
Check-back message (actual status) CCW CB/LE
Dead interval on reversing UPL
Feeder ready AZB
Setpoint status CLOCKWISE DSRI
Setpoint status COUNTERCLOCKWISE DSLE
Actual status STOP IZS
Fault TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation
Status discrepancy from CCW to STOP EFLS

Status discrepancy from CLOCKWISE to STOP EFRS
Run time violation CLOCKWISE LZR
Run time violation COUNTERCLOCKWISE LZL
Protective action CLOCKWISE MSR
Protective action COUNTERCLOCKWISE MSL
Check-back fault 1 CLOCKWISE RMF1R
Check-back fault 1 COUNTERCLOCKWISE RMF1L
Undervoltage protective action OFF/STOP MUSA
Protective action STOP MSS
EMERGENCY OFF MNOT
Status discrepancy from STOP to CLOCKWISE EFSR
Status discrepancy from STOP to CCW EFSL
Fig. 7: Time--tagged data, drive types 7 and 8 -- reversing drive with screen input

8--26
e Siemens AG
Page 400 of 719

FB156 REVAN
4 Configuring
Fig. 8 shows the symbol of the function block REVAN similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring system.
ESG.REV Symbol: Drive control modul reversing drive

TXP---specific module SIM
Fig. 8: CSF symbol of function block FB156 REVAN (reversing drive)

8--27
e Siemens AG
Page 401 of 719

FB156 REVAN
5 Parameterization
Fig. 9: Parameterization form FB156 REVAN without desk tile

8--28
e Siemens AG
Page 402 of 719

FB156 REVAN
Fig. 10: Parameterization form FB156 REVAN with desk tile

8--29
e Siemens AG
Page 403 of 719

FB156 REVAN
All parameters which occur are listed in the sequence in which they are processed. The details are described
below.
- Effect of check-back fault (WE) on command execution (WRB)
- Effect of status discrepancy (WEF)
- Dead interval on reversing (DUP)
Name: BEL
Function: Defines the assignment of the SIM function block
Meaning: 7 = reversing drive without desk tile input
8 = reversing drive with desk tile input
Basic setting: 7
Name: PBR
Function: irrelevant

8--30
e Siemens AG
Page 404 of 719

FB156 REVAN
Name: BAV
Meaning: 0 = not a permanent command, not inverted
1 = permanent command, command output inverted
Bit 0 = permanent command
Bit 1 = inverted
Basic setting: 0
Name: TUM
Function: Defines the max. permissible voltage failure time for automatic restarting.
10,000 = 1,000 s
Name: TWS
(stagger times)
10,000 = 1,000 s
Name: RWE
Meaning: 0 = no detection/monitoring
1 = detection using NO contact
2 = detection using changeover contact
3 = as 1, without monitoring for double ”0”
Basic setting: 1

8--31
e Siemens AG
Page 405 of 719

FB156 REVAN
Name: RWA
Meaning: 0 = no detection/monitoring
1 = detection using NO contact
2 = detection using changeover contact
3 = as 1, without monitoring for double ”0”
Basic setting: 1
- Effect of check-back fault WE on command execution (WRB)
Name: WRB
Function: Defines whether commands are to be executed with a check-back fault WE in
Meaning: 0 = RMF 1 R/L blocks execution
1 = Command is executed
Bit 0 = manual/automatic CLOCKWISE
Bit 1 = manual/automatic COUNTERCLOCKWISE
Bit 2 = protection CLOCKWISE
Bit 3 = protection COUNTERCLOCKWISE
Basic setting: 0000
- Effect of status discrepancy/monitoring (WEF)
Name: WEF
discrepancy
Meaning: Bit 0 = 1 status discrepancy monitoring disabled
Bit 1 = 1 status discrepancy does not block PROTECTION
CLOCKWISE command
Bit 2 = 1 status discrepancy does not block PROTECTION
COUNTERCLOCKWISE command
Basic setting: 000
Name: TGL
60,000 = 6,000 s

8--32
e Siemens AG
Page 406 of 719

FB156 REVAN
Name: TTD
1 = generate TTD
CB/RI = check-back message (actual status) CLOCKWISE
CB/LE = check-back message (actual status) COUNTERCLOCKWISE
DUPL = dead interval on reversing running
USZ = undervoltage time running
AZB = feeder ready
DSRI = setpoint status CLOCKWISE
DSLE = setpoint status COUNTERCLOCKWISE
IZS = actual status STOP
Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

8--33
e Siemens AG
Page 407 of 719

FB156 REVAN
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB156

Block name: REVAN
Version: ________________↑
-- Code 8600 bytes

8--34
e Siemens AG
Page 408 of 719

FB156 REVAN
7 Abbreviations

AZB Feeder ready
A/LE Automatic COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON
A/LEST Automatic COUNTERCLOCKWISE STOP
A/RI Automatic CLOCKWISE ON
A/RIST Automatic CLOCKWISE STOP

BELL Command COUNTERCLOCKWISE
BERL Command CLOCKWISE
BEST Command STOP
BL/OM Disable serial OM input
DSLE Setpoint status COUNTERCLOCKWISE

DSRI Setpoint status CLOCKWISE
EFLS Status discrepancy from COUNTERCLOCKWISE to STOP

EFRS Status discrepancy from CLOCKWISE to STOP
EFSL Status discrepancy from STOP to COUNTERCLOCKWISE
EFSR Status discrepancy from STOP to CLOCKWISE
EN/LE Process enable COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON
EN/LEST Process enable COUNTERCLOCKWISE STOP
EN/RI Process enable CLOCKWISE ON
EN/RIST Process enable CLOCKWISE STOP
ESG Individual control drive
FB Function block
HAFREIG Manual enable

HW Hardware
IZS Actual status STOP

KONV Contact power supply

LALI Lamp COUNTERCLOCKWISE
LARE Lamp CLOCKWISE
LASTOE Lamp FAULT
LASTOP Lamp STOP
LP Test lamps


8--35
e Siemens AG
Page 409 of 719

FB156 REVAN
PAA_E Process output image to individual control level (status word)

PAE_E Process input image from individual control level (control word)
PLE Protection COUNTERCLOCKWISE ON
PLS Protection COUNTERCLOCKWISE STOP
PRI Protection CLOCKWISE ON
PRS Protection CLOCKWISE STOP
MSL Protective action in COUNTERCLOCKWISE direction

MSR Protective action in CLOCKWISE direction
RMF1L Check-back fault COUNTERCLOCKWISE

RMF1R Check-back fault CLOCKWISE
RML Check-back message COUNTERCLOCKWISE
RMLNI Check-back message NOT COUNTERCLOCKWISE
RMR Check-back message CLOCKWISE
RMRNI Check-back message NOT CLOCKWISE
SA Switchgear
SAF Switchgear fault
SBQ Serial input acknowledgement
SIM Signal module
SMS Disable signalling of protective action

TALI Pushbutton COUNTERCLOCKWISE
TARE Pushbutton CLOCKWISE
TASTOP Pushbutton STOP




8--36
e Siemens AG
Page 410 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 411 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB154 STELANT (Actuator Control)
ESG--SA
Page 412 of 719

FB154 STELANT

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

9--2
e Siemens AG
Page 413 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--4

2.1 Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--7
3 Functions of the Actuator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--9

3.1.1 Commands from the Serial (OM) Operating System (OM 650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--11
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Open--loop Control Tile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--11
3.1.3 Control in Opposite Direction on Blocking by Torque Limit Switch (DE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--12
3.3 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--13
3.4.1 Actuator-based Check-back Messages (Travel Limit Switches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--13
3.4.2 Actuator-based Check-back Messages (Torque Limit Switches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--15
3.5.1 Actual Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--17
3.5.4 Last Status Reached by ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--18
3.6 Actuator Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--19
3.6.1 Torque Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--19
3.6.1.1 Torque Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--19
3.6.1.2 Monitoring Function for Torque before Travel-dependent Check-back Message . . . . . . . . . . 9--21
3.6.1.3 Monitoring Function for Torque after Travel-dependent Check-back Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--22
3.6.4 Run time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--25
3.6.4.1 Run time Monitoring -- Total Run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--25
3.6.4.2 Run time Monitoring -- Leaving of Limit Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--26
3.7 Connections to the SIM Module for the Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--28
3.8.2 Signalling on OM 650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--29
3.9 Messages and Signals on the Open-loop Control Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--32
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--42
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--43

9--3
e Siemens AG
Page 414 of 719

FB154 STELANT
1 Application
The drive control for the actuator can be carried out in the AS 620 B system using the function block FB154
in conjunction with the signal module SIM 265 in the ET 200 I/O device.
The following input and output signals can be configured for the connection of an actuator control:
Input signals:

- DENAUF, DENZU: maximum torque not reached in OPEN direction,

Output signals:
- ALE, ALA: Load switch ON/OPEN output, Load switch OFF/CLOSED output
- KV: Contact power supply
These signals can be input with the voltage +24 V DC and output with the voltages + 24 V DC.
The signals DENAUF/DENZU are NC contacts. The signal SAG is a NO contact.
If the parameterization is done without torque signals or in the case of not used SAG signal the correspon-
ding inputs of the SIM 265 must not be wired.
Not wired inputs of the signals have the following effects in the function block:
DENAUF, DENZU: = maximum torque not reached
CBOP = CBCL
CBCL = CBOP
❏ Drive control for actuators

FB154 STELANT -- Status acquisition
-- Monitoring:
Drive control for
Torque, run time, end position
actuators
-- Command conditioning (manual signals and
automatic/protection signals)
M -- Signalling and indicating
SIM 265
-- Producing TTDs
Fig. 1: SIM function block FB154 STELANT and associated modules
Please refer to the Operating Instructions AS 620 B (SIM) in the AS 620--S5 System Manual for further

9--4
e Siemens AG
Page 415 of 719

FB154 STELANT
2 Mode of Operation
Control program
Function block AP
FB154
Input/output module
SIM 265

9--5
e Siemens AG
Page 416 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Message output
and signalling
Command generation
Command
monitoring
Check-back signal
conditioning/
Monitoring
Servo- Switchgear
Control command
drive feeder
DRIVE CONTROL
Check-back messages

9--6
e Siemens AG
Page 417 of 719

FB154 STELANT
2.1 Actuator
The following characteristics of the feeder are important when considering the drive controls:
- Actuator motor:
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise, clockwise
- Positions of final control elements:

Measured travel-dependent OPEN, CLOSED, intermediate position
Measured torque-dependent OPEN, CLOSED (in normal operation)
- Limit switches:
Travel-dependent 2 changeover contacts (snap-action contacts) or
2 single contacts (NO contacts)
Torque-dependent 2 single contacts (NC contacts)
- Switchgear:
- Intelligent actuator control direct control

An actuator can move a final control element into any position using control commands.
The various groups of control commands and their origins are listed below:
- Manual commands from the screen (OM 650) or desk tile.
All control commands are transmitted to the function block via the control word.
The command generation function links all these commands to the corresponding enables and converts
them into complete commands.
The complete commands are processed according to the defined priorities or parameters and then stored.
The storage of commands is carried out since they are only present briefly on the input side but the run time
of the actuator from one limit position to the other may be very long. The user can parameterize whether the
control command is to be reset travel-dependent or torque-dependent (check-back message from the limit
switches).
The check-back contacts are monitored to ensure that the information on the limit positions actually
corresponds to the actual position of the actuator (processing and monitoring of check-back signals).
Since the torque may only be temporary, this signal is also stored.
Resetting of the control command by the stored torque is carried out by the command output function. In
the normal case, an excessive torque only occurs if driving in the CLOSED direction is carried out into the
sealed position or in the OPEN direction into the so-called reverse seal. In both cases, this only occurs if the
travel-dependent limit has been overrun and it has been defined by parameterization (parameter EIZ) that
command resetting is not to be carried out by the travel-dependent check-back message.
The actuator monitoring comprises the following functions:
The torque monitoring function recognizes and signals a fault (DE before WE) if the torque is triggered
before the travel--dependent check--back message (WE) arrives.
In the case of “Torque switch before travel switch” the reason is usually sluggishness of the final control
element. Since the torque is stored and always has a resetting action referred to the control command
present in the command direction, this direction can no longer be driven. A control command must be sent in
the opposite direction in order to be able to release the blocking or to delete the torque memory. The actuator
can be driven in the opposite direction without the corresponding process enable until the blocking is
released.

9--7
e Siemens AG
Page 418 of 719

FB154 STELANT
The opposite response is also recorded, i.e. if travel-dependent command resetting has been parameterized
and a torque nevertheless occurs on the actuator (torque switch after travel switch).
The actual state and the running direction (setpoint state) of the actuator are made available to the next
higher level via the process image or, in the case of desk tile inputs, displayed directly via corresponding
outputs.
The run time monitoring function determines whether a control command is executed correctly (within the
parameterized monitoring time).
The status discrepancy monitoring function detects by comparing the setpoint and actual value whether
the actuator has left the current position without a corresponding control command having been sent via the
module. The module then signals a status discrepancy. It is possible to parameterize whether the status
discrepancy is to have a resetting effect compared to the control command which has been output (so-called
prevention of pumping).
The user can also parameterize whether protection commands are to be active nevertheless compared to
the normal command resetting, i.e. the feeder can also be set to the preferential position in the event of a
check-back error as well as in the case of a status discrepancy.
The monitoring function “Signalling of protective execution” recognizes whether a protection command
has actually been executed and the final control element moved in the process. Triggering of one of the abo-
ve-mentioned monitoring functions is signalled via the status word. Secondary messages are suppressed so
that only the actual cause of the fault is displayed. In addition, the acknowledgement menu on the
OM 650 indicates whether the current fault can be acknowledged or whether a repair is necessary.
Acknowledgements are carried out using commands which are sent either via the control word (from OM 650
screen or automatic system) or from the desk tile (command pushbutton without enable).
The blocking scan function can be used to check -- by pressing the corresponding desk tile command
pushbutton (without enable pushbutton) -- whether the selected command direction is free; i.e. whether a
subsequent manual command would be successful or whether it would be blocked as a result of the missing
process enable or an automatic or protection command in the opposite direction. Command blocking is
indicated by permanent lighting-up of the signal lamp ”Fault” on the desk tile.
The status acquisition function detects whether the last position assumed has been achieved by a manual,
automatic or protection command. The status messages are also passed on to the next higher level via the
status word.
When switching on the module for the first time, all functional units which depend on the check-back
messages are matched to the current status of the latter.

9--8
e Siemens AG
Page 419 of 719

FB154 STELANT
3 Functions of the Actuator Control
Enable Desk tile OM

Input
and User
interface
signalling
BHA MLA
FHD BHE MLE
BHS MLS
SIM 482 SIM 482

ET200U
Desk tile control
LADB TADB
Function block FB 154 STELANT
Processing of
Control
Module SIM 265 and
check--back
ET 200U
DENAUF RMA, RMNA ALE

DENZU RME, RMNE ALA
SAG KV
Switchgear
Fig. 4: Structure of actuator control with function blocks

9--9
e Siemens AG
Page 420 of 719

FB154 STELANT
There are three types of command:
- Manual commands
Seriel Higher--level Undervoltage

input system Automatic monitoring
MANUAL AUTOM ATIC PROTECTION
Enable logik (Process enable)
Priority logic
(1. before 2. before 3. before 4.)
1. Control in opposite direction on blocking by torque
Command output
Effective
control command
Drive
Fig. 5: Overview of the command generation and priority for the actuator (simplified)

9--10
e Siemens AG
Page 421 of 719

FB154 STELANT
3.1.1 Commands from the Serial (OM) Operating System (OM 650)
Manual OPEN
Manual CLOSED
Manual STOP
SIMP OPEN (control pulse OPEN)
SIMP CLOSED (control pulse CLOSED)
A command entered via the OM 650--screen only becomes valid when the corresponding process enable
(PFEIN/PFAS) is present via the control word.
In addition to the commands “OPEN”, “CLOSED” and “STOP”, it is possible to send a control pulse in the
OPEN or CLOSED direction from the screen to permit exact positioning. The pulse length can be adjusted
using the parameter “SID”. The control pulse is started by the positive edge (on activation). Following expiry
of the control pulse duration, the actuator is stopped by a STOP command.
. Note
control word.
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile (Open--loop Control Tile)
Manual OPEN
Manual CLOSED
Manual STOP
In addition to the corresponding process enable (EN/OP ; EN/CL) in the control word, the function block
requires the manual enable so that the commands sent from the desk tile become valid.
Depending on the desk tile variant the STOP button may also not be applicable (non--maintained command
mode).
. Note
In order to give commands from the desk tile the manual enable pushbutton must
be activated simultaneously with the respective command pushbutton.
. Note

9--11
e Siemens AG
Page 422 of 719

FB154 STELANT
3.1.3 Control in Opposite Direction on Blocking by Torque Limit Switch (DE)
If a torque fault “Torque switch before travel switch” is present, it is possible -- despite a missing process
enable -- to drive in the opposite direction using manual commands until the blocking is released (torque limit
switch released and torque memory deleted).
It is only possible to control in the original direction again when the blocking has been released.
Automatic OPEN
Automatic CLOSED
Automatic STOP
The commands from the higher-level automatic system ”Automatic OPEN”, ”Automatic CLOSED”, ”Automatic
STOP” are transmitted with the required process enable by means of the control word.
Protection OPEN
Protection CLOSED
The protection commands “Protection OPEN” and “Protection CLOSED” are transmitted with the control
word and do not require a process enable.
In conjunction with the protection commands, the signal “Disable signalling of protective action” can be
acknowledged.

9--12
e Siemens AG
Page 423 of 719

FB154 STELANT
rity is at the top.
Manual control in opposite

direction on blocking by Manual CLOSED
torque limit switch Manual OPEN
Protection commands Protection CLOSED

Protection OPEN
Automatic STOP
Automatic commands Automatic CLOSED

Automatic OPEN
Manual STOP
Manual commands Manual CLOSED

Manual OPEN
. Note
command direction).
3.3 Command Output
The command output function outputs the control command until the reset criterion has been reached.
The parameter BAV can be used to define whether the command is to be output as a continuous command
and whether an inverted command output is required.
3.4.1 Actuator-based Check-back Messages (Travel Limit Switches)
the actual state of the actuator as quickly as possible and as accurately as possible. The signals from the
travel limit switches are monitored for this purpose.
Unavoidable bounce occurs when switching the limit switches. The bounce may last up to 300 ms. The si-
gnals from the limit switches are therefore delayed so that unintentional triggering of the monitoring equip-
ment does not occur during the bounce phase.

9--13
e Siemens AG
Page 424 of 719

FB154 STELANT

The check-back messages of a changeover contact result in a double ”0” or ”1” signal for more than
one scanning cycle.

The bit “No feeder fault” (KAS) is reset and the last valid check--back message stays in the store.

The following signal TTDs are generated if the respective status bit of the actuator is parameter-
ized as a TTD:
-- No feeder fault
-- Check--back message (actual status) OPEN or
-- Check--back message (actual status) CLOSED
-- Check-back fault 1 OPEN or
-- Check-back fault 1 CLOSED
D Effect on further internal processing

(see under plausibility check, Section 3.4.1.2)

Repair (removal of the invalid check--back message)
The valid check-back signals RME and RMA are monitored for plausibility.
In addition it can also be parameterized (see parameters RWE and RWA) if a plausibility check of double ”0”
signal is made for a detection with NO contacts.


The bit “No feeder fault” (KAS) is reset. With a double ”1” signal, the following bits are set:
-- Check--back message (actual status) OPEN

ized as a TTD:
-- No feeder fault

The check-back fault RMF1:
-- Blocks all ”Protective execution” messages

9--14
e Siemens AG
Page 425 of 719

FB154 STELANT
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the signal lamp ”Fault” flashes at 2 Hz. The signal lamp ”OPEN” or
”CLOSED” lights up according to the actual statuses in the status word.
message text is indicated (see OM 650 Manual “Process Control”).

Repair (removal of the fault)
3.4.2 Actuator-based Check-back Messages (Torque Limit Switches)
The functional response of the conditioning/monitoring of check-back signals from torque-dependent limit
switches corresponds to the signal conditioning/monitoring of the travel-dependent check-back signals.
The parameter “RDE” for both limit positions decides whether the conditioning stays switched off or is done
via NO--contacts.
The valid check-back signals DE OPEN and DE CLOSED are monitored for plausibility.

Check-back messages of the 2 NO--contacts are valid, but both have a ”0” signal (maximum torque
reached).

The bit “No feeder fault” (KAS) is reset.

ized as a TTD:
-- No feeder fault

-- Blocks the command output depending on the direction
-- Blocks the torque monitoring function prior to the travel-dependent check-back
message depending on the direction
-- Blocks the run--time monitoring depending on the direction
-- Sets the torque memory if a command is present in the faulty direction.
D Signalling

Repair

9--15
e Siemens AG
Page 426 of 719

FB154 STELANT


-- No feeder fault
-- Switchgear fault

D Signalling
- Reset condition

9--16
e Siemens AG
Page 427 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Actual status
Last status achieved by MANUAL / AUTOMATIC / PROTECTION
3.5.1 ACTUAL Status
Check---back message (actual status) ON / OPEN (RM/EIN); actual status NOT ON/OPEN
Check---back message (actual status) OFF / CLOSED (RM/AUS); actual status NOT OFF/CLOSED
The actual status of the actuator is used by the respective check-back signals which are generated by the
Acquisition of the actual status, and thus whether resetting is travel-dependent or torque-dependent, can be
defined by parameterization (parameter EIZ: acquisition of actual status).
In the case of torque-dependent resetting, the output signal of the torque memory is linked to the
corresponding travel-dependent check-back message (RME or RMA); with travel-dependent resetting, only
the travel-dependent check-back message is used to generated the actual status.
OM 650 displays by means of colouring in the associated pictograph of the detail window whether the actua-
tor has left the limit position “CLOSED”.
3.5.2 SETPOINT Status Direction
command.
This results in:
Setpoint status in OPEN direction (SZ/AUF) or
Setpoint status in CLOSED direction (SZ/ZU)

9--17
e Siemens AG
Page 428 of 719

FB154 STELANT
ble).
3.5.4 Last Status Reached by ...
The information “Last status achieved by” indicates the reason for achievement of the last status of the
actuator (protection, automatic or manual), and is made available via the status word. If a status discrepancy
is present, no information is output on achievement of the last status.
Reason for change in status: Last status achieved by:
Manual OPEN, STOP, CLOSED MANUAL

Automatic OPEN, STOP, CLOSED AUTOMATIC
Protection OPEN, CLOSED PROTECTION

9--18
e Siemens AG
Page 429 of 719

FB154 STELANT
3.6 Actuator Monitoring
3.6.1 Torque Monitoring
3.6.1.1 Torque Storage
Since the torque check-back signals are temporary signals, the “Valid check-back messages” conditioned
accordingly by the ”Check-back signal conditioning/monitoring function (torque)” must be stored.
The respective check-back signal (DE CLOSED, DE OPEN) is stored delayed or undelayed depending on
the position of the actuator.
The torque memory is always set undelayed if the travel-dependent check-back message for the desired
command direction is present followed by signalling of a valid torque check-back message from the
corresponding limit position (torque following travel limit = torque switch after travel switch).
The delay is required when setting the torque memory since brief torque overshoots may occur unintentio-
nally when starting. These would result in switching of the torque limit switches and thus setting of the torque
memory. This would be equivalent to a permanent command reset.
The delay time can be parameterized (in the OPEN direction using the parameter “TDA” and in the CLO-
SED direction using the parameter “TDZ”) and is always started with a command output from CLOSED to
OPEN. If a torque check-back message occurs in the command direction within the delay time, the control
command is only cancelled following expiry of the delay time if the torque check-back message is still pre-
sent then.
Fig. 7 shows examples of setting of the torque memory.

9--19
e Siemens AG
Page 430 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Command output The torque memory is not set

because the valid torque
check-back signal disappears
again within the delay time; the
Delay time command output is not cancelled
(TDA/TDZ) by the torque check-back.
Valid torque
check-back
message
Torque memory
Command output The torque memory is set

following expiry of the delay
time; the command is cancelled
by setting of the torque
Delay time memory.
(TDA/TDZ)
Valid torque
check-back
message
Torque
memory
Command output The torque memory is

immediately set if a valid
torque check-back signal
appears at the end of the set
Delay time delay time. The command is
(TDA/TDZ) cancelled by setting of the
torque memory.
Valid torque
check-back
message
Torque memory
Fig. 7: Examples of setting conditions of torque memory

9--20
e Siemens AG
Page 431 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Fig. 8 shows the set and reset criteria of the torque memory (DE CLOSED); corresponding criteria apply to
the torque memory (DE OPEN).
The set criterion of one torque memory is always the reset criterion of the other, i.e. only one torque memory
can be set at any time.
DE CLOSED
RMA Set DE CLOSED memory
CLOSED command or
or
or move to
RMF1A Delayed No delay
RMF2A CLOSED
-- -- x -- --
x -- -- -- --
x -- x x --
x x -- -- --
x x x -- x
-- x -- -- --
-- x x -- --
Compl. OPEN
set criteria EFAnE command or Delete
DE OPEN pos. move to DE
memory edge OPEN and CLOSED
present RMA not memory
x -- -- x
-- x -- x
-- -- x x
-- x x x
x x x x
x x -- x
x -- x x
RMF2A = Check-back error torque CLOSED contact

DE CLOSED = Conditioned torque signal OFF/CLOSED
RMA = Conditioned check-back signal OFF/CLOSED
RMF1A = Check-back fault travel CLOSED contact
Move to CLOSED = Move towards CLOSED (when switching module on for first time)
EFAnE = Status discrepancy from OFF to ON

Move to OPEN = Move towards OPEN (when switching module on for first time)
Fig. 8: Set and delete conditions of torque memory (DE CLOSED)
3.6.1.2 Monitoring Function for Torque before Travel-dependent Check-back Message
- Trigger condition of monitoring function

Torque memory is set or torque limit switch has been activated, and the corresponding travel-
dependent check-back message (WE) is not yet present, and a check-back fault for travel limit
(RMF1) is not present.

9--21
e Siemens AG
Page 432 of 719

FB154 STELANT

The bit “No run time/blocking” (KLB) is reset, and the bit “Serial (OM) control possible OPEN or
CLOSED” is set (required for ”Control in opposite direction on blocking by torque limit switch”).

The following signal TTDs are generated provided the respective status bit of the actuator has
-- Torque switch OPEN fault or
-- Torque switch CLOSED fault

-- Blocks runtime monitoring depending on direction
-- Permits ”Control in opposite direction on blocking by torque limit switch”.
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the fault (run time/blocking) is displayed dependent on the direction.

Movement of actuator in opposite direction by command in opposite direction (until torque memory
deleted).
3.6.1.3 Monitoring Function for Torque after Travel-dependent Check-back Message
The monitoring function detects if travel-dependent resetting has been parameterized and the actuator
nevertheless activates the torque function.

Check-back message for command resetting (WE) and corresponding torque memory triggered.

The bit “No runtime/blocking” (KLB) is reset, and the bit “Serial (OM) control possible OPEN or
CLOSED” is set (required for ”Control in opposite direction on blocking by torque limit switch”)

-- DE following resetting by WE

None
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault (run time/blocking) is displayed dependent on the direction.

Movement of actuator in opposite direction by command in opposite direction until torque memory
deleted (repair: adjust limit switch)

9--22
e Siemens AG
Page 433 of 719

FB154 STELANT

The actuator moves in a predefined direction as a result of a protection command from the next
higher level, or has been driven to a specific limit position.

The bit “No status discrepancy and signalling of protective action” (KLB) is reset (omitted with
disabling of protective action message).
-- “Check--back message (actual status) CLOSED” or “Check--back message (actual status)
OPEN”
-- “Serial input acknowledgement”.

-- Check--back message (actual status) CLOSED or
-- Protective action OPEN or
-- Protective action CLOSED

Blocks the command channel in the opposite direction


D Acknowledgement on screen (omitted with disabling of serial input)
D Acknowledgement -- automatic collective acknowledgement (control word)
the current position of the actuator is used for the acknowledgement.

9--23
e Siemens AG
Page 434 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Fig. 9 shows when a status discrepancy is generated following a change in position without a command.

(setpoint position in from CLOSED to from OPEN to discrepancy
reference memory) OPEN (EFAE) CLOSED (EFEA) (EF)
Actual position CLOSED Intermediate position Yes Yes

Actual position CLOSED Actual position OPEN Yes Yes
Intermediate position Actual position OPEN Yes Yes
Actual position OPEN Intermediate position Yes Yes
Actual position OPEN Actual position CLOSED Yes Yes
Intermediate position Actual position CLOSED Yes Yes

Deviation of check-back message for the actual position of the actuator from the setpoint position

The bit “No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action” (KEF) as well as all bits “Last
status achieved by...” are reset. The bit “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” and -- if
the actuator is at a limit position -- the bits ”Actual status OPEN or CLOSED” are set.

-- Check--back (actual status) OPEN or
-- Check--back (actual status) CLOSED
-- Status discrepancy from CLOSED to OPEN or
-- Status discrepancy from OPEN to CLOSED

-- Disables the original command direction
-- Resets the corresponding torque memory of the original direction.
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed in addition dependent on the direction.

9--24
e Siemens AG
Page 435 of 719

FB154 STELANT

D Acknowledgement on desk tile (omitted with disabling of desk tile input) is carried out without
an enable pushbutton, and only with the command pushbutton which corresponds to the
current position of the actuator
D No deviation between setpoint and actual positions (fault no longer present).
. Note
Following a STOP command, an actuator may coast for a short time because of its
inertia.
If the actuator is shortly before a limit position when the STOP command is sent, it
may still reach this position although a command output in this direction is no longer
present.
The status discrepancy monitoring function would immediately detect this change in
position without a control command as a status discrepancy. In order to prevent this,
the status discrepancy monitoring function is disabled for approx. 1 second follow-
ing command termination (= STOP command).
3.6.4 Run time Monitoring
The run time monitoring comprises two functions:

The respective run time can only be monitored if the corresponding parameter TGL (total run time of actua-
tor) or TVE (time for leaving the limit position) is not “0”.
3.6.4.1 Run time Monitoring -- Total Run time
This function is used to monitor the total run time of the actuator from the time of command output up to the
arrival of the valid check-back message from the desired limit position. The total run time of the actuator can
be parameterized (parameter TGL) and is the same for both command directions.
A STOP command terminates run time monitoring.
Violation of the run time set for the actuator between command output and the check-back message

The bits “No run time/blocking” (KLB) and “Setpoint status, running direction OPEN or CLOSED”
are reset and the bit “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” is set.
The following signal TTDs are generated provided the respective status bit of the actuator is

9--25
e Siemens AG
Page 436 of 719

FB154 STELANT

Disables the display for direction of travel
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed dependent on the direction.
Reset condition of monitoring function

Acknowledging is only possible if the original input command is no longer present.
D Acknowledgement on screen (omitted with blocking of serial input)
In the case of desk tile inputs, the acknowledgement is carried out with the command pushbutton
(without enable pushbutton) which corresponds to the current position of the actuator.
D Limit position is reached finally
3.6.4.2 Run time Monitoring -- Leaving of Limit Position

tion has not yet been left. The monitoring function is only started if no check-back fault is present in
the command direction. A run time error is generated if the limit position has not been left within the
parameterized run time TVE.
The bits “No run time/blocking” (KLB) and “Check--back message (setpoint status) OPEN or
CLOSED” are reset. The bit “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” is set.
The following signal TTDs (Fig. 12) are generated provided the respective status bit of the actua-
tor is parameterized as a TTD:
-- No run time / blocking
-- Run time violation, leaving of limit position
Disables the display for direction of travel
-- The control command remains
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed dependent on the direction.

D Acknowledgement on screen (omitted with blocking of serial (OM) input)
D Limit position is left (e.g. with sluggishness)

9--26
e Siemens AG
Page 437 of 719

FB154 STELANT
By pressing the command pushbutton OPEN or CLOSED on the control tile without an enable pushbutton,
- Triggering conditions in OPEN direction

D Process enable F/AUF missing or
D Protection command present in CLOSED direction or
D Automatic command present in CLOSED direction or
D Automatic command STOP present.
- Triggering conditions in CLOSED direction

D Process enable F/ZU missing or
D Protection command present in OPEN direction or
D Automatic command present in OPEN direction or

None

None

None
D Signalling
The signal lamp ”Fault” lights up permanently.
- Reset condition
Release desk tile pushbutton.

9--27
e Siemens AG
Page 438 of 719

FB154 STELANT
3.7 Connections to the SIM Module for the Actuator
Control program
Function block AP
FB154
SIM 265
RM CLOSED E A
M
RM NOT CLOSED E A ALA
RM OPEN E A ALE
RM NOT OPEN E A
SA faulty E A
E = Input terminals of the module ALA = Load switch OFF/CLOSED output

A = Output terminals of the module ALE = Load switch ON/OPEN output
RM = Check--back signal
DREMO = Torque
SA = Switchgear
* NC contact
Fig. 10: Connections of the module SIM 265 for the actuator
Command reset upon activation of the torque switch has been implemented on the SIM module (EPROM).

9--28
e Siemens AG
Page 439 of 719

FB154 STELANT
this using time--tagged data (see Fig. 11 and Fig. 12).
- Signal TTD
module.
- Fault TTD
functions.

Please refer to the Chapter“Open--loop Control Functions” in the Manual OM 650 Process Control for further
information about the displays on OM 650 (pictographs, input pushbuttons, signallings and message texts).

9--29
e Siemens AG
Page 440 of 719

FB154 STELANT
ABBREVI-
0 Status bit Check---back message (actual status) OPEN CB/OP
3 Setpoint status in CLOSED direction DS/CL
4 Last status reached by PROTECTION ZES
5 Last status reached by AUTOMATIC ZEA
6 Last status reached by MANUAL ZEH

1 Serial (OM) control possible OPEN SBAUF
2 Serial (OM) control possible CLOSED SBZU
3 Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement SBQ
4 Feeder ready AZB
Status bit

4 Disable serial (OM) input SP/OM
5 Disable desk tile input SP/TF *
6 Lamp test LP *
7 Disable signalling of protective action SP/MS
0 Automatic OPEN A/OP

1 Automatic CLOSED A/CL
4 Protection OPEN P/OP
Status bit
Fig. 11: Data of process image -- actuator,

* only with desk tile

9--30
e Siemens AG
Page 441 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Signal TTDs
Comment Abbrevi-
ation

Last status reached by PROTECTION ZES
Last status reached by AUTOMATIC ZEA
Last status reached by MANUAL ZEH
Feeder ready AZB
Fault TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation
Run time violation on leaving of limit position LZV
Switchgear fault SAG
Torque switch after resetting by travel switch DEABS
Fig. 12: Time--tagged data -- actuator

9--31
e Siemens AG
Page 442 of 719

FB154 STELANT
3.9 Messages and Signals on the Open-loop Control Tile
signal lamps ”ON”, ”OFF” and ”Fault” on the open-loop control tile indicate:

carried out with bit 6 in the control word. Lamp testing has to be configured via ES at the input LP of the ESG
modul.

9--32
e Siemens AG
Page 443 of 719

FB154 STELANT
ACTUAL position
SETPOINT direction
OPEN CLOSED
State in position
CLOSED/OPEN/BETWEEN
Run direction OPEN/CLOS.

Status discrepancy
Run time/blocking

(plausibility)
SIM module faulty

Block inquiry
Lamp test (o.k.)
Fig. 13: Signal representation at the desk tile, Actuator with screen and desk tile input

9--33
e Siemens AG
Page 444 of 719

FB154 STELANT
4 Parameterization
Fig. 14 shows the symbol of the function block STELANT similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring
system.
ESG.SA Symbol: Drive control module actuator

TXP--specific module FB154; SIM265
Fig. 14: CSF symbol of function block STELANT

9--34
e Siemens AG
Page 445 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Fig. 15: Parameterization form FB154 -- actuator without desk tile

9--35
e Siemens AG
Page 446 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Fig. 16: Parameterization form FB154 -- actuator with desk tile

9--36
e Siemens AG
Page 447 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

9--37
e Siemens AG
Page 448 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Name: BEL
the FUP pictograph “ACTUATOR CONTROL“ or
“ACTUATOR CONTROL with desk tile“ as selected by the user
Meaning: 3 = actuator without desk tile input
4 = actuator with desk tile input
Basic settings: 3

Name: PBR
Range of values: cmd. priority: close / oppen
Basic setting: cmd. priority: close / oppen
Name: BAV
Range of values: pers.cmd:N -- inv.:N
pers.cmd:Y -- inv.:N
pers.cmd:N -- inv.:Y
pers.cmd:Y -- inv.:Y
Basic setting: pers.cmd:N -- inv.:N
Name: TST
Function: Defines whether a STOP pushbutton is provided on the desk tile for actuator
Name: SID
100 = 10 s

9--38
e Siemens AG
Page 449 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Name: RWE
Function: Defines whether the ON/OPEN check-back message of the controlled actuator
can bedetected, and with which type of switch

Name: RWA
actuator can be detected, and with which type of switch

Name: RDE
Function: Defines whether the triggering of the direction-dependent torque can be
NC--Contact
Name: EIZAUF
EIZZU

9--39
e Siemens AG
Page 450 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Name: WRBHAEA
WRBHAAZ
WRBSEA
WRBSAZ
not blocked
Name: WEFSPERR
WEFNSEA
WEFNSAZ
discrepancy
blocked
Name: TVE
Function: Defines the time within which the actuator must have left its limit position
600 = 60 s
- Total actuator run time (TGL)
Name: TGL
Function: Defines the total run time of the actuator between the limit positions
60,000 = 6,000 s

9--40
e Siemens AG
Page 451 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Name: TDA
in OPEN direction
Meaning: 0 = 0s
10,000 = 100 s

Name: TDZ
in CLOSED direction
Meaning: 0 = 0s
10,000 = 100 s
- Time--tagged data (TTD), actuator
Name: TTD
1 = generate TTD
AZB = feeder ready

9--41
e Siemens AG
Page 452 of 719

FB154 STELANT
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB154

Block name: STELANT
Version: ________________↑
typ. 440 ms
-- Code 7000 bytes

9--42
e Siemens AG
Page 453 of 719

FB154 STELANT
6 Abbreviations
ALA Load switch OFF/CLOSED output
ALE Load switch ON/OPEN output
AZB Feeder ready

BEAUF Command OPEN
BEZU Command CLOSED
CBCLNI Check-back message NOT CLOSED

CBOPNI Check-back message NOT OPEN

DENAUF Torque not reached in OPEN direction
DENZU Torque not reached in CLOSED direction
DW Data word

FB Function block

9--43
e Siemens AG
Page 454 of 719

FB154 STELANT

LAAUF Lamp OPEN

LAZU Lamp CLOSED
LP Test lamps




RMAUFNI Check-back message NOT OPEN
RMF1A Check-back error OFF, travel
RMF1E Check-back error ON, travel
RMF2A Check-back error OFF, torque
RMF2E Check-back error ON, torque
RMZUNI Check-back message NOT CLOSED

SBQ Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement
SBSTOP Serial (OM) control possible STOP
SBZU Serial (OM) control possible CLOSED
SIM Signal module
SIMP Control pulse

9--44
e Siemens AG
Page 455 of 719

FB154 STELANT
TA Pushbutton
TAAUF Command pushbutton OPEN
TASTOP Pushbutton command STOP
TAZU Pushbutton command CLOSED



9--45
e Siemens AG
Page 456 of 719

FB154 STELANT

Fig. 17 Actuator, command generation

9--46
e Siemens AG
Page 457 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Automatic commands
A/CLOSED
& CLOSED
EN/CLOSED
A/OPEN OPEN
& &
EN/OPEN
Manual commands
from OM
OM CLOSED
& CLOSED
EN/CLOSED
OM OPEN OPEN
& &
EN/OPEN
SP/OM
Manual commands
from desk tile
DESK TILE CLOSED
FHD CLOSED
&
EN/CLOSED
DESK TILE OPEN

FHD & & OPEN
EN/OPEN
SP/TF
Legend:
FHD = Manual input enable SP/TF= Disable desk tile input
SP/OM = Disable OM input
Fig. 17: Actuator, command generation

9--47
e Siemens AG
Page 458 of 719

FB154 STELANT
Command OUTPUT
memory Load switch
”CLOSED” (AL)
Control in opposite
direction on blocking Priority ”CLOSED” ALA
logic S ”CLOSED”
PROTECTION--
AUTOMATIC--”CLOSED“ >1
MANUAL
R
Command
PROTECTION-- memory
AUTOMATIC--”OPEN“ ”OPEN”
MANUAL
S ALE
Parameter PBR ”OPEN”
“CLOSED before OPEN”/
”OPEN before CLOSED” >1 R
”OPEN”
No fault 1
Torque “CLOSED”
Parameter EIZ, acquisition of >1

actual status, “Limit position
and torque CLOSED” &
Check--back message “CLOSED”
Torque “OPEN”
>1
Parameter EIZ, acquisition of
&
and torque OPEN”
Check--back message “OPEN”

9--48
e Siemens AG
Page 459 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 460 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB164 STELANTR (Actuator Control, configurable)
DCM ACT
Page 461 of 719

FB164 STELANTR

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

9--2
e Siemens AG
Page 462 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--4
2.1 Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--8
3 Function Description of the Actuator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--10
3.1.1 Commands from the Serial (OM) Operating System (OM 650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--12
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--12
3.1.3 Control in Opposite Direction on Blocking by Torque Limit Switch (DE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--13
3.1.4 Commands from the Next--Higher Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--13
3.1.5 Commands from the Local Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--14
3.3 Additional Features with Parameter RMS “Tag--Out YES” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--15
3.3.1 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--15
3.3.2 FORCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--16
3.3.3 TAG--OUT (Disable Command Logic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--16
3.3.4 Behavior in the event of a fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--17
3.4 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--18
3.5.1 Actuator-based Check-back Messages (Travel Limit Switches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--18
3.5.2 Actuator-based Check-back Messages (Torque Limit Switches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--19
3.6.1 Check--back Message (actual status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--22
3.7 Actuator Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--24
3.7.1 Torque Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--24
3.7.1.1 Torque Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--24
3.7.1.2 Monitoring Function for Torque before Travel-dependent Check-back Message . . . . . . . . . . 9--26
3.7.1.3 Monitoring Function for Torque after Travel-dependent Check-back Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--27
3.7.4.1 Run time Monitoring -- Total Run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--31
3.7.4.2 Run time Monitoring -- Leaving of Limit Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--32
3.8 Connections to the SIM Modules for the Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--34
3.9.2 Signalling on OM 650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--36
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--52
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--53

9--3
e Siemens AG
Page 463 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
1 Application
The drive control for the actuator can be carried out in the AS 620 B system using the function block FB164
in conjunction with signal modules (SIM) in the ET 200 I/O device. Please note that the torque resetting is
done within the bounds of the AP processing cycle. Therefore the application is only sensible if the resetting
takes place in the switchgear or when using smart drives with build--in torque resetting.
The following input and output signals can be configured for the connection of an actuator control:
Input signals:
- CBOP, CBCL: Check--back message OPEN, Check--back message CLOSED
- CBOPNI, CBCLNI: Check--back message NOT OPEN, Check--back message

NOT CLOSED (resting position of changeover contact)
- DEAUF, DEZU: maximum torque reached in OPEN direction,

maximum torque reached in CLOSED direction
Output signals:
- ALES, ALAS: Load switch OPEN output, Load switch CLOSED output
- KV1, KV2: Contact power supply
(according to the module used) and output with the voltages + 24 V DC, 115 V AC and 230 V AC.
The signals DEAUF / DEZU and the signal SAG can be configured as NO contact or NC contact.
If the DEAUF / DEZU signals or the SAG signal are not used, then these signals do not require parameteri-
zation in the hardware and the corresponding inputs of the SIM modules do not need to be wired.
Instead of direkt allocation to SIM I/O modules, a preprocessing or further processing of the inputs and
outputs via logic is also possible. This is called decoupling.
DEAUF, DEZU: = “0”, i.e. maximum torque not reached
CBOP = CBCL
CBCL = CBOP

9--4
e Siemens AG
Page 464 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
FB164 STELANTR o Free allocation of the connection pins on

Drive control for SIM modules (input and output of binary signals)
actuators -- Output for higher level control (step controller)
-- Status acquisition
SIM input -- Monitoring:
module Torque, run time, end position
321 / 323 M -- Command conditioning (manual signals and
421 / 431 / 433 automatic/protection signals)
-- Signalling and indicating
SIM output -- Producing TTDs
module -- Parameterization with and without desk tile
322 / 323
440 / 441 / 450
451 / 452 / 453
Fig. 1: SIM function block FB164 STELANTR and associated modules
The Operating Instructions AS 620 B (SIM), in the AS 620--S5 System Manual.

9--5
e Siemens AG
Page 465 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
2 Mode of Operation
Control program
Function block AP
FB164

9--6
e Siemens AG
Page 466 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Message output
and signalling
Command generation
Command
monitoring
Check-back signal
conditioning/
Monitoring
Servo- Switchgear
Control command
drive feeder
DRIVE CONTROL
Check-back messages

9--7
e Siemens AG
Page 467 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
2.1 Actuator
The following characteristics of the feeder are important when considering the drive controls:
- Actuator motor:
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise, clockwise
- Positions of final control elements:

Measured travel-dependent OPEN, CLOSED, intermediate position
Measured torque-dependent OPEN, CLOSED (in normal operation)
- Limit switches:
Travel-dependent 2 changeover contacts (snap-action contacts) or
2 single contacts (NO contacts/NC contacts)
Torque-dependent 2 single contacts (NO contacts/NC contacts)
- Switchgear:
- Intelligent actuator control direct control

An actuator can move a final control element into any position using control commands.
The various groups of control commands and their origins are listed below:
- Manual commands from the screen (OM 650) or desk tile.
All control commands are transmitted to the function block via the control word.
The command generation function links all these commands to the corresponding enables and converts
them into complete commands.
The complete commands are processed according to the defined priorities or parameters and then stored.
The storage of commands is carried out since they are only present briefly on the input side but the run time
of the actuator from one limit position to the other may be very long. The user can parameterize whether the
control command is to be reset travel-dependent or torque-dependent (check-back message from the limit
switches).
The check-back contacts are monitored to ensure that the information on the limit positions actually
corresponds to the actual position of the actuator (processing and monitoring of check-back signals).
Since the torque may only be temporary, this signal is also stored.
Resetting of the control command by the stored torque is carried out by the command output function. In
the normal case, an excessive torque only occurs if driving in the CLOSED direction is carried out into the
sealed position or in the OPEN direction into the so-called reverse seal. In both cases, this only occurs if the
travel-dependent limit has been overrun and it has been defined by parameterization (parameter EIZ) that
command resetting is not to be carried out by the travel-dependent check-back message.
The actuator monitoring comprises the following functions:
The torque monitoring function recognizes and signals a fault (DE before WE) if the torque is triggered
before the travel--dependent check--back message (WE) arrives.
In the case of “Torque switch before travel switch” the reason is usually sluggishness of the final control
element. Since the torque is stored and always has a resetting action referred to the control command
present in the command direction, this direction can no longer be driven. A control command must be sent in
the opposite direction in order to be able to release the blocking or to delete the torque memory. The actuator
can be driven in the opposite direction without the corresponding process enable until the blocking is
released.

9--8
e Siemens AG
Page 468 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
The opposite response is also recorded, i.e. if travel-dependent command resetting has been parameterized
and a torque nevertheless occurs on the actuator (torque switch after travel switch).
The actual state and the running direction (setpoint state) of the actuator are made available to the next
higher level via the process image or, in the case of desk tile inputs, displayed directly via corresponding
outputs.
The run time monitoring function determines whether a control command is executed correctly (within the
parameterized monitoring time).
The status discrepancy monitoring function detects by comparing the setpoint and actual value whether
the actuator has left the current position without a corresponding control command having been sent via the
module. The module then signals a status discrepancy. It is possible to parameterize whether the status
discrepancy is to have a resetting effect compared to the control command which has been output (so-called
prevention of pumping).
The user can also parameterize (parameter WEF) whether protection commands are to be active
nevertheless compared to the normal command resetting, i.e. the feeder can also be set to the preferential
position in the event of a check-back error as well as in the case of a status discrepancy.
The monitoring function “Signalling of protective execution” recognizes whether a protection command
has actually been executed and the final control element moved in the process. Triggering of one of the abo-
ve-mentioned monitoring functions is signalled via the status word. Secondary messages are suppressed so
that only the actual cause of the fault is displayed. In addition, the acknowledgement menu on the
OM 650 indicates whether the current fault can be acknowledged or whether a repair is necessary.
Acknowledgements are carried out using commands which are sent either via the control word (from OM 650
screen or automatic system) or from the desk tile (command pushbutton without enable).
The blocking scan function can be used to check -- by pressing the corresponding desk tile command
pushbutton (without enable pushbutton) -- whether the selected command direction is free; i.e. whether a
subsequent manual command would be successful or whether it would be blocked as a result of the missing
process enable or an automatic or protection command in the opposite direction. Command blocking is
indicated by permanent lighting-up of the signal lamp ”Fault” on the desk tile.
The status acquisition function detects whether the last position assumed has been achieved by a manual,
automatic or protection command. The status messages are also passed on to the next higher level via the
status word.
When switching on the module for the first time, all functional units which depend on the check-back
messages are matched to the current status of the latter.

9--9
e Siemens AG
Page 469 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
3 Function Description of the Actuator Control
Enable Desk tile OM

Input
and Operation
window
signalling
BHA MLA
FHD BHE MLE
BHS MLS
SIM 323 SIM 323

SIM 482 SIM 482
ET200
Desk tile control
LADB TADB
Function block FB 164 STELANTR
Processing of
Input modules Output modules Control

SIM 321 / 323 SIM 322 / 323
SIM 421 / 431 / 433 SIM 440 / 441 / 450 and
SIM 451 / 452 / 453
check--back
ET 200
DENAUF RMA, RMNA ALES

DENZU RME, RMNE ALAS
SAG KV1, KV2
Switchgear
Fig. 4: Structure of actuator control STELANTR with function blocks ( for signal names refer to Chap.6 Abbreviations)

9--10
e Siemens AG
Page 470 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
There are four types of command:
- Manual commands
- Commands from a local control unit
Serial Local control unit Higher--level

input system Desk tile Automatic
OM 650 system (AS 620)
Manual enable

FORCING
Enable logic (Process enable)
Priority logic
(1. to 6. --> high to low priority)
1. FORCING commands from ”OM650”
2. Control in opposite direction on blocking by torque
4. Local commands from the “local control unit”
Command output
Effective
control command
Drive
Fig. 5: Overview of the command generation and priority for the actuator (simplified)

9--11
e Siemens AG
Page 471 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
3.1.1 Commands from the Serial (OM) Operating System (OM 650)
Manual OPEN
Manual CLOSE
Manual STOP
SIMP OPEN (control pulse OPEN)
SIMP CLOSE (control pulse CLOSED)
TAG---OUT *)
Switchover Automatic or Manual *)
Switchover FORCING active / inactive *)
*) Additional features, see chapter 3.3
A command entered via the OM 650--screen only becomes valid when the corresponding process enable
(EN/OP; EN/CL) is present via the control word.
With operating mode FORCING, the drive can be operated via the OM650--commands “Manual OPEN” and
“Manual CLOSE” irrespective of the process enable. Protection and automatic commands are blocked.
FORCING--commands always take effect as continuous commands. No resetting of the command when re-
aching the limit position.
In addition to the commands “OPEN”, “CLOSE” and “STOP”, it is possible to send a control pulse in the
OPEN or CLOSE direction from the screen to permit exact positioning. The pulse length can be adjusted
using the parameter “SID”. The control pulse is started by the positive edge (on activation). Following expiry
of the control pulse duration, the actuator is stopped by a STOP command.
. Note
control word.
When the local control unit is selected or if the drive status word is simulated then
the screen input via OM 650 is blocked.
. Note
When the function TAG--OUT is parameterized and if the operating mode
“Automatic” is set then the screen input via OM 650 is blocked.
3.1.2 Commands from the Desk Tile
Manual OPEN
Manual CLOSE
Manual STOP

9--12
e Siemens AG
Page 472 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
In addition to the corresponding process enable (EN/OP ; EN/CL) in the control word, the function block
Depending on the desk tile version, the STOP pushbutton can also be omitted (inching mode).
. Note
In order to give commands from the desk tile the manual enable pushbutton must
be activated simultaneously with the respective command pushbutton.
. Note
The desk tile input is blocked when the drive status word is simulated.
. Note
The desk tile command is blocked in operating mode FORCING or if the TAG--OUT
function is switched on.
3.1.3 Control in Opposite Direction on Blocking by Torque Limit Switch (DE)
If a torque fault “Torque switch before travel switch” is present, it is possible -- despite a missing process
enable -- to drive in the opposite direction using manual commands until the blocking is released (torque limit
switch released and torque memory deleted).
It is only possible to control in the original direction again when the blocking has been released.
3.1.4 Commands from the Next--Higher Level
Automatic OPEN
Automatic CLOSE
Automatic STOP
The commands from the higher-level automatic system ”Automatic OPEN“, ”Automatic CLOSED“, ”Automatic
STOP” are transmitted with the required process enable by means of the control word.
Protection OPEN
Protection CLOSE
The protection commands “Protection OPEN” and “Protection CLOSED” are transmitted with the control
word and do not require a process enable.

9--13
e Siemens AG
Page 473 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
In conjunction with the protection commands, the signal “Disable signalling of protective action” can be
acknowledged.
Warning
! The protection, manual, and automatic commands are blocked in operating mode
FORCING or if the TAG--OUT function is switched on.
. Note
The automatic commands are blocked with the parameterized TAG--OUT function
and not activated operating mode “Manual”.
3.1.5 Commands from the Local Control Unit
In the case of drives having a local control unit the local control unit can be enabled through the process
image by setting the ”VOS” bit in the drive control word (PAA_E). The local control unit can either be con-
nected via the desk--tile connections of the module or intervene directly in the switchgear.
When the local control has been selected, screen (OM) input as well as the execution of automatic com-
mands are disabled.
Desk--tile operation is enabled. This means that any ”Disable desk--tile operation” command is cleared and
the process releases are enabled.
Status discrepancy monitoring is disabled and the monitoring devices are tracked to the actual system sta-
tus. This ensure that status discrepancies are avoided under direct intervention in the switchgear.
rity is at the top.

9--14
e Siemens AG
Page 474 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
FORCING Manual CLOSE

Manual OPEN
Manual control in opposite

direction on blocking by Manual CLOSED
torque limit switch *) Manual OPEN

Protection OPEN
Local control Manual STOP/CLOSED/OPEN
Automatic STOP
Automatic commands *) Automatic CLOSED
Automatic OPEN
Manual STOP
Manual commands *) Manual CLOSED
Manual OPEN

*) With the set parameter RMS “TAG--OUT YES”, the operating mode logic “automatic or manual” functions
as described in chapter 3.3.
. Note
The priority CLOSE before OPEN can be reversed with parameter PBR (priority of
command direction).
3.3 Additional Features with Parameter RMS “Tag--Out YES”
3.3.1 Operating Modes
Operating mode memory

Automatic/Manual
AUTO
S Q
Input status word
Switchover automatic
or manual via OM
MAN D
Input status word RM/AUTO
1 R Q
Start--up (in the status word)
to the command logic

9--15
e Siemens AG
Page 475 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Depending om the parameter OP_MODE, the function block has following operating modes:
OP_MODE RM/AUTO Automatic commands Manual commands

AUTO / MAN reset deactivated activated
set activated deactivated
SEMI / MAN reset deactivated activated
set activated activated
SEMI not relevant activated activated
. Note
The OM 650 operation “MAN/AUTO changeover” can be disabled by setting the
MAUS parameter “MAN/AUTO”.
3.3.2 FORCING
The FORCING mode can be activated or deactivated via the “FORCE” button on OM650. The default state is
“FORCING OFF”. With operating mode FORCING, the drive can be operated via the OM650--commands
“Manual OPEN” and “Manual CLOSE” irrespective of the process enable. Protection and automatic com-
mands are blocked. FORCING--commands always take effect as continuous commands. No resetting of the
command when reaching the limit position.
. Note
FORCING is not possible if outputs are decoupled, see chapter 3.8.
3.3.3 TAG--OUT (Disable Command Logic)
The TAG--OUT function allows the drive block to be switched to inactive. This means that neither Manual
The TAG--OUT function can only be used after adequate parameterization (RMS=”Tag--Out YES” and
TOUS=”activated”).
The switchover and the signalling of the function TAG--OUT is done via the operating window of the OM 650.
The function TAG--OUT (output SP/BFLO is set) can only be switched on in the operating mode “Manual”
with feedback CLOSED.
-- blocks the command processing and output i. e. the actuator is not operable from the OM 650 or
from the AS 620 or from desk tile.
-- inhibits the limit position monitoring and sets the monitoring equipment on tracking.
The acquisition and signalling of check--back messages e.g. “Feedback OPEN” is continued
independently.
-- signal lamp “Fault” is on continually when operating with desk tile
. Note
The OM 650 operation “TAG--OUT changeover” can be disabled by setting the

9--16
e Siemens AG
Page 476 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
3.3.4 Behavior in the event of a fault
With the parameter VBAF selected “activated”,the command outputs ALE and ALA will not be deactivated if
the following faults occur:
-- Status discrepancy
-- Checkback error
-- Switchgear fault.
With the parameter BSFG selected “activated”, it is possible to initiate a manual “CLOSE” command from
OM650 while a switchgear fault is present.
With the parameter REJ/MAN selected “activated”, the operating mode memory is reset if the following faults
occur: -- Status Discrepancy
-- Feedback Fault
-- Switchgear Fault
-- Runtime Failure
-- Protective Action
-- Torque switch fault.

9--17
e Siemens AG
Page 477 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
3.4 Command Output

the limit position)
. Note
A slowing--down time can be parameterized for a travel-dependent reset. In that
case the drive is only switched off when the limit position is reached and when the
set time has elapsed.
The control command is not reset when reaching the limit position for a configured
continuous command. The control command is only cancelled when the torque
switch has operated.
3.5.1 Actuator-based Check-back Messages (Travel Limit Switches)
the actual state of the actuator as quickly as possible and as accurately as possible. The signals from the
travel limit switches are monitored for this purpose.
Unavoidable bounce occurs when switching the limit switches. The bounce may last up to 300 ms. The si-
gnals from the limit switches are therefore delayed so that unintentional triggering of the monitoring equip-
ment does not occur during the bounce phase.

The check-back messages of a changeover contact result in a double ”0” or ”1” signal for more than
one scanning cycle.

The bit “No feeder fault” (KAS) is reset and the last valid check--back message stays in the store.
ized as a TTD:
-- No feeder fault
D Effect on further internal processing (see under plausibility check, Section 3.5.1.2)

Repair (removal of the invalid check--back message)

9--18
e Siemens AG
Page 478 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
The valid check-back signals RME and RMA are monitored for plausibility.
In addition it can also be parameterized (see parameters RWE and RWA) if a plausibility check of double ”0”
signal is made for a detection with NO contacts.


The bit “No feeder fault” (KAS) is reset. With a double ”1” signal, the following bits are set:

ized as a TTD:
-- No feeder fault

-- Blocks all ”Protective execution” messages
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the signal lamp ”Fault” flashes at 2 Hz. The signal lamp ”OPEN” or
”CLOSED” lights up according to the actual statuses in the status word.

Repair (removal of the fault)
. Note
“activated”.
3.5.2 Actuator-based Check-back Messages (Torque Limit Switches)
The functional response of the conditioning/monitoring of check-back signals from torque-dependent limit
switches corresponds to the signal conditioning/monitoring of the travel-dependent check-back signals.
The parameter “RDE” for both limit positions decides whether the conditioning stays switched off or is done
via NO--contacts.

9--19
e Siemens AG
Page 479 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
The valid check-back signals DE OPEN and DE CLOSED are monitored for plausibility.

Check-back messages of the 2 NO--contacts are valid, but both have a ”0” signal (maximum torque
reached).
ized as a TTD:
-- No feeder fault
-- Blocks the command output depending on the direction
-- Blocks the torque monitoring function prior to the travel-dependent check-back
message depending on the direction
-- Blocks the run--time monitoring depending on the direction
-- Sets the torque memory if a command is present in the faulty direction.
D Signalling

Repair

-- No feeder fault
-- Switchgear fault

9--20
e Siemens AG
Page 480 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
D Signalling
- Reset condition
. Note
“activated”.
With the parameter BSFG selected “activated”, it is possible to initiate a manual
“CLOSE” command from OM650 while a switchgear fault is present.

9--21
e Siemens AG
Page 481 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Actual status
Last status achieved by MANUAL / AUTOMATIC / PROTECTION
3.6.1 Check--back Message (actual status)
Check---back message (actual status) OPEN (RM/EIN); actual status NOT OPEN
Check---back message (actual status) CLOSED (RM/AUS); actual status NOT CLOSED
The actual status of the actuator is used by the respective check-back signals which are generated by the
Acquisition of the actual status, and thus whether resetting is travel-dependent or torque-dependent, can be
defined by parameterization (parameter EIZ: acquisition of actual status).
In the case of torque-dependent resetting, the output signal of the torque memory is linked to the
corresponding travel-dependent check-back message (RME or RMA); with travel-dependent resetting, only
the travel-dependent check-back message is used to generated the actual status.
OM 650 displays by means of colouring in the associated pictograph of the detail window whether the actua-
tor has left the limit position “CLOSED”.
command.
This results in:
Setpoint status in OPEN direction (SZ/AUF) or
Setpoint status in CLOSED direction (SZ/ZU)

9--22
e Siemens AG
Page 482 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
ble).
The information “Last status achieved by” indicates the reason for achievement of the last status of the
actuator (protection, automatic or manual), and is made available via the status word. If a status discrepancy
is present, no information is output on achievement of the last status.
Reason for change in status: Last status achieved by:
Manual OPEN, STOP, CLOSED MANUAL

Automatic OPEN, STOP, CLOSED AUTOMATIC

9--23
e Siemens AG
Page 483 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
3.7 Actuator Monitoring
3.7.1 Torque Monitoring
3.7.1.1 Torque Storage
Since the torque check-back signals are temporary signals, the “Valid check-back messages” conditioned
accordingly by the ”Check-back signal conditioning/monitoring function (torque)” must be stored.
The respective check-back signal (DE CLOSED, DE OPEN) is stored delayed or undelayed depending on
the position of the actuator.
The torque memory is always set undelayed if the travel-dependent check-back message for the desired
command direction is present followed by signalling of a valid torque check-back message from the
corresponding limit position (torque following travel limit = torque switch after travel switch).
The delay is required when setting the torque memory since brief torque overshoots may occur unintentio-
nally when starting. These would result in switching of the torque limit switches and thus setting of the torque
memory. This would be equivalent to a permanent command reset.
The delay time can be parameterized (in the OPEN direction using the parameter “TDA” and in the CLO-
SED direction using the parameter “TDZ”) and is always started with a command output from CLOSED to
OPEN. If a torque check-back message occurs in the command direction within the delay time, the control
command is only cancelled following expiry of the delay time if the torque check-back message is still pre-
sent then.
Fig. 8 shows examples of setting of the torque memory.

9--24
e Siemens AG
Page 484 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Command output The torque memory is not set

because the valid torque
check-back signal disappears
again within the delay time; the
Delay time command output is not cancelled
(TDA/TDZ) by the torque check-back.
Valid torque
check-back
message
Torque memory
Command output The torque memory is set

following expiry of the delay
time; the command is cancelled
by setting of the torque
Delay time memory.
(TDA/TDZ)
Valid torque
check-back
message
Torque
memory
Command output The torque memory is

immediately set if a valid
torque check-back signal
appears at the end of the set
Delay time delay time. The command is
(TDA/TDZ) cancelled by setting of the
torque memory.
Valid torque
check-back
message
Torque memory
Fig. 8: Examples of setting conditions of torque memory

9--25
e Siemens AG
Page 485 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Fig. 9 shows the set and reset criteria of the torque memory (DE CLOSED); corresponding criteria apply to
the torque memory (DE OPEN).
The set criterion of one torque memory is always the reset criterion of the other, i.e. only one torque memory
can be set at any time.
DE CLOSED
RMA Set DE CLOSED memory
CLOSED command or
or
or move to
RMF1A Delayed No delay
RMF2A CLOSED
-- -- x -- --
x -- -- -- --
x -- x x --
x x -- -- --
x x x -- x
-- x -- -- --
-- x x -- --
Compl. OPEN
set criteria EFAnE command or Delete
DE OPEN pos. move to DE
memory edge OPEN and CLOSED
present RMA not memory
x -- -- x
-- x -- x
-- -- x x
-- x x x
x x x x
x x -- x
x -- x x
RMF2A = Check-back error torque CLOSED contact

DE CLOSED = Conditioned torque signal OFF/CLOSED
RMA = Conditioned check-back signal OFF/CLOSED
RMF1A = Check-back fault travel CLOSED contact
Move to CLOSED = Move towards CLOSED (when switching module on for first time)
EFAnE = Status discrepancy from OFF to ON

Move to OPEN = Move towards OPEN (when switching module on for first time)
Fig. 9: Set and delete conditions of torque memory (DE CLOSED)
3.7.1.2 Monitoring Function for Torque before Travel-dependent Check-back Message
- Trigger condition of monitoring function

Torque memory is set or torque limit switch has been activated, and the corresponding travel-
dependent check-back message (WE) is not yet present, and a check-back fault for travel limit
(RMF1) is not present.

9--26
e Siemens AG
Page 486 of 719

FB164 STELANTR

The bit “No run time/blocking” (KLB) is reset, and the bit “Serial (OM) control possible OPEN or
CLOSED” is set (required for ”Control in opposite direction on blocking by torque limit switch”).

-- Torque switch OPEN fault or
-- Torque switch CLOSED fault

-- Blocks runtime monitoring depending on direction
-- Permits ”Control in opposite direction on blocking by torque limit switch”.
D Signalling
With a desk tile input, the fault (run time/blocking) is displayed dependent on the direction.

Movement of actuator in opposite direction by command in opposite direction (until torque memory
deleted).
3.7.1.3 Monitoring Function for Torque after Travel-dependent Check-back Message
The monitoring function detects if travel-dependent resetting has been parameterized and the actuator
nevertheless activates the torque function.

Check-back message for command resetting (WE) and corresponding torque memory triggered.

The bit “No runtime/blocking” (KLB) is reset, and the bit “Serial (OM) control possible OPEN or
CLOSED” is set (required for ”Control in opposite direction on blocking by torque limit switch”)

-- DE following resetting by WE

None
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault (run time/blocking) is displayed dependent on the direction.

Movement of actuator in opposite direction by command in opposite direction until torque memory
deleted (repair: adjust limit switch)

9--27
e Siemens AG
Page 487 of 719

FB164 STELANTR

The actuator moves in a predefined direction as a result of a protection command from the next
higher level, or has been driven to a specific limit position.

The bit “No status discrepancy and signalling of protective action” (KLB) is reset (omitted with
disabling of protective action message).
-- “Check--back message (actual status) CLOSED” or “Check--back message (actual status)
OPEN”
-- “Serial input acknowledgement”.

-- Check--back message (actual status) CLOSED or
-- Protective action OPEN or
-- Protective action CLOSED

Blocks the command channel in the opposite direction


D Acknowledgement on screen (omitted with disabling of serial input)
the current position of the actuator is used for the acknowledgement.

9--28
e Siemens AG
Page 488 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Fig. 10 shows when a status discrepancy is generated following a change in position without a command.

(setpoint position in from CLOSED to from OPEN to discrepancy
reference memory) OPEN (EFAE) CLOSED (EFEA) (EF)
Actual position CLOSED Intermediate position Yes Yes

Actual position CLOSED Actual position OPEN Yes Yes
Intermediate position Actual position OPEN Yes Yes
Actual position OPEN Intermediate position Yes Yes
Actual position OPEN Actual position CLOSED Yes Yes
Intermediate position Actual position CLOSED Yes Yes

Deviation of check-back message for the actual position of the actuator from the setpoint position

The bit “No status discrepancy or signalling of protective action” (KEF) as well as all bits “Last
status achieved by...” are reset. The bit “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” and -- if
the actuator is at a limit position -- the bits ”Actual status OPEN or CLOSED” are set.

-- Check--back (actual status) OPEN or
-- Check--back (actual status) CLOSED
-- Status discrepancy from CLOSED to OPEN or
-- Status discrepancy from OPEN to CLOSED

-- Disables the original command direction
-- Resets the corresponding torque memory of the original direction.
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed in addition dependent on the direction (see Chap.
3.10)

9--29
e Siemens AG
Page 489 of 719

FB164 STELANTR

D Acknowledgement on desk tile (omitted with disabling of desk tile input) is carried out without
an enable pushbutton, and only with the command pushbutton which corresponds to the
current position of the actuator
D No deviation between setpoint and actual positions (fault no longer present).
. Note
Following a STOP command, an actuator may coast for a short time because of its
inertia.
If the actuator is shortly before a limit position when the STOP command is sent, it
may still reach this position although a command output in this direction is no longer
present.
The status discrepancy monitoring function would immediately detect this change in
position without a control command as a status discrepancy. In order to prevent this,
the status discrepancy monitoring function is disabled for approx. 1 second follow-
ing command termination (= STOP command).
. Note
In the event of an error the command output is not disabled if the parameter VBAF
is “activated”.
The run--time monitoring comprises two functions:

The respective run time can only be monitored if the corresponding parameter TGL (total run time of actua-
tor) or TVE (time for leaving the limit position) is not “0”.

9--30
e Siemens AG
Page 490 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
3.7.4.1 Run time Monitoring -- Total Run time
This function is used to monitor the total run time of the actuator from the time of command output up to the
arrival of the valid check-back message from the desired limit position. The total run time of the actuator can
be parameterized (parameter TGL) and is the same for both command directions.
A STOP command terminates run time monitoring.

Violation of the run time set for the actuator between command output and the check-back message

The bits “No run time/blocking” (KLB) and “Setpoint status, running direction OPEN or CLOSED”
are reset and the bit “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” is set.

The following signal TTDs are generated provided the respective status bit of the actuator is

Disables the display for direction of travel. If termination with run time is parameterized (see pa-
rameter BAV) the command output is blocked
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed dependent on the direction (see Chap. 3.10)
Reset condition of monitoring function

D Acknowledgement on screen (omitted with blocking of serial input)
D Limit position is reached finally

9--31
e Siemens AG
Page 491 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
3.7.4.2 Run time Monitoring -- Leaving of Limit Position

tion has not yet been left. The monitoring function is only started if no check-back fault is present in
the command direction. A run time error is generated if the limit position has not been left within the
parameterized run time TVE.

The bits “No run time/blocking” (KLB) and “Check--back message (setpoint status) OPEN or
CLOSED” are reset. The bit “Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement” is set.

The following signal TTDs (see Fig. 13) are generated provided the respective status bit of the
actuator is parameterized as a TTD:
-- No run time / blocking
-- Run time violation, leaving of limit position

Disables the display for direction of travel. If termination with run time is parameterized (see pa-
rameter BAV) the command output is blocked
-- The control command remains
D Signalling
With desk tile inputs, the fault is displayed dependent on the direction (see Chap. 3.10)

D Acknowledgement on screen (omitted with blocking of serial (OM) input)
D Limit position is left (e.g. with sluggishness)

9--32
e Siemens AG
Page 492 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
By pressing the command pushbutton OPEN or CLOSED on the control tile without an enable pushbutton,
- Triggering conditions in OPEN direction

D Process enable F/AUF missing or
D Protection command present in CLOSED direction or
D Automatic command present in CLOSED direction or
- Triggering conditions in CLOSED direction

D Process enable F/ZU missing or
D Protection command present in OPEN direction or
D Automatic command present in OPEN direction or

None

None

None
D Signalling
The signal lamp ”Fault” lights up permanently (see Chap. 3.10)
- Reset condition
Release desk tile pushbutton.

9--33
e Siemens AG
Page 493 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
3.8 Connections to the SIM Modules for the Actuator
Control program
Function block AP
FB164
CB CLOSED I O KV1
M
CB NOT CLOSED * I O ALAS
CB OPEN I O ALES
CB NOT OPEN * I O
KV2
TORQUE CLOSED I
TORQUE OPEN I
SG faulty I
I = Input terminals of the module O = Output terminals of the module

CB = Check--back signal ALAS = Load switch CLOSE output
ALES = Load switch OPEN output
SG = Switchgear KV1, KV2 = Contact power supply
* NC contact
Fig. 11: Connections of the SIM modules for the actuator

9--34
e Siemens AG
Page 494 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
There are two possibilities of input and output allocation:
1. Direct allocation of the block inputs and outputs to SIM I/O modules. This is made via the
parameter masks shown in Fig. 16 and Fig. 17.
2. Decoupling. The inputs are acquired via binary input blocks and can be connected to the
MOTVENTR function block after a possible processing. In the same way, the command output
can be done via binary output blocks.
Mixed application of decoupling and direct allocation is possible.
. Note
FORCING is not possible if outputs are decoupled.

9--35
e Siemens AG
Page 495 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
this using time--tagged data (see Fig. 12 and Fig. 13).
- Signal TTD
module.
- Fault TTD
functions.

Please refer to the Chapter“Open--loop Control Functions” in the Manual OM 650 Process Control for further
information about the displays on OM 650 (pictographs, input pushbuttons, signallings and message texts).

9--36
e Siemens AG
Page 496 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
ABBREVI--
0 Status bit Check---back message (act. status) OPEN CB/OP
1 Check---back mes. (act. status) CLOSED CB/CL
IB0 3 Setpoint status in CLOSED direction DS/CL
IB1 3 Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement SCA
4 Feeder ready AZB
0 Command output OPEN ALE
IB2 1 Command output CLOSE ALA
3 FORCING mode FOC
4 Serial (OM) control possible FORCING FOUS
6 Check---back message NOT OPEN CB/OP_N
7 Check---back message NOT CLOSED CB/CL_N
0 Serial (OM) control possible Automatic SC AUTO
1 Serial (OM) control possible TAG OUT SC TAG
4 Local control VOS
IB3
6 Disable command logic BL/COLO

3 Status bit Common acknowledgement SQ
OB0 5 Disable desk tile input BL/DT*
6 Lamp test LT *
7 Disable signalling of protective action SP/MS
0 Automatic OPEN A/OP

1 Automatic CLOSED A/CL
OB1 3 Local control VOS
4 Protection command OPEN P/OP
5 Protection command CLOSED P/CL
0 Automatic mode AUTO
1 Manual mode MAN
OB2 4 Switchgear fault SGF
5 Feeder not ready for operation ANB
6 Feedback CLOSED FB/CL
7 Status bit Feedback OPEN FB/OP
Fig. 12: Data of process image -- actuator,

* only with desk tile

9--37
e Siemens AG
Page 497 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Signal TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation
Feeder ready AZB
Local control VOS
FORCING mode FOC
Fault TTDs
Abbrevi-
Comment
ation

Switchgear fault SAG
Check-back fault 1 OPEN RMF1E
Check-back fault 1 CLOSED RMF1A
Check-back fault 2 OPEN RMF2E
Check-back fault 2 CLOSED RMF2A
Torque switch after travel switch DEABS
Fig. 13: Time--tagged data -- actuator

9--38
e Siemens AG
Page 498 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
signal lamps ”OPEN”, ”CLOSED” and ”Fault” on the open-loop control tile indicate:

carried out with bit 6 in the control word. Lamp testing has to be configured via ES at the input LP of the ESG
modul.

9--39
e Siemens AG
Page 499 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
ACTUAL position
SETPOINT direction
OPEN CLOSED
State in position
CLOSED/OPEN/BETWEEN

Status discrepancy
Run time/blocking

(plausibility)
SIM module faulty

Block tagging or TAG--OUT
switched on
Lamp test (o.k.)

9--40
e Siemens AG
Page 500 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
4 Parameterization
Fig. 15 shows the symbol of the function block STELANTR similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring
system.
Symbol: Drive control module actuator
DCM ACT TXP--specific module FB164
Fig. 15: CSF symbol of function block STELANTR

9--41
e Siemens AG
Page 501 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Fig. 16 shows as an example the parameterization form for configuring the output signals of the FB163. The
ALA
ALE
KV
Fig. 16: Parameterization form of the output module for 8 binary signals SIM 441 (6ES5441--8MA11)
Fig. 17 shows as an example the parameterization form for configuring the input signals of the FB163. The
ANB
SAG
RMA
RME
Fig. 17: Parameterization form of the input/output module for 8 binary signals SIM 421 (6ES5421--8MA12)

9--42
e Siemens AG
Page 502 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Fig. 18: Parameterization form FB164 -- actuator without desk tile

9--43
e Siemens AG
Page 503 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Fig. 19: Parameterization form FB164 -- actuator with desk tile

9--44
e Siemens AG
Page 504 of 719

FB164 STELANTR

Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0

Name: INST
Basic setting: 0
- Check-back contact Travel limit OPEN (RWE)
- Check-back contact Travel limit CLOSED (RWA)

9--45
e Siemens AG
Page 505 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
- Command output in case of failure (VBAF)
- Manual / Auto changeover (MAUS)
- Reject to manual (REJ/MAN)
- Operation mode (OP_MODE)
- Behavior on switchgear fault (BSFG)
- Time--tagged data (TTD), actuator
Name: TTD
1 = generate TTD
AZB = feeder ready
KLB = no run--time/blocking
VOS = local control
BL/COLO = disable command logic
CB/AUTO = automatic mode of operation
FOC = forcing mode

9--46
e Siemens AG
Page 506 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Name: PBR
Name: BAV
Name: TST
servo-drives
Meaning: 0 = no STOP pushbutton
1 = STOP pushbutton
Basic setting: 1
Name: SID
100 = 10 s

9--47
e Siemens AG
Page 507 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
- Check-back contact Travel limit OPEN (RWE)
Name: RWE
Function: Defines whether the OPEN check-back message of the controlled servo-drive
- Check-back contact Travel limit CLOSED (RWA)
Name: RWA
Function: Defines whether the CLOSED check-back message of the controlled
Name: RDE
NO--Contact
NC--Contact

Name: TVE
600 = 60 s

9--48
e Siemens AG
Page 508 of 719

FB164 STELANTR

Name: TGL
60,000 = 6,000 s

Name: TDA
in OPEN direction
Meaning: 0 = 0s
10,000 = 100 s

Name: TDZ
in CLOSED direction
Meaning: 0 = 0s
10,000 = 100 s
Name: WRBHAEA
WRBHAAZ
WRBSEA
WRBSAZ
not blocked
Meaning: WRBHAEA = check--back fault does not block MANUAL/AUTOMATIC OPEN
WRBHAAZ = check--back fault does not block MANUAL/AUTOMATIC CLOSE
WRBSEA = check--back fault does not block PROTECTION OPEN
WRBSAZ = check--back fault does not block PROTECTION CLOSE

9--49
e Siemens AG
Page 509 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Name: WEFSPERR
WEFNSEA
WEFNSAZ
discrepancy
blocked
WEFNSEA=status discrepancy blocks PROTECTION OPEN command
WEFNSAZ=status discrepancy blocks PROTECTION CLOSE command
Name: EIZAUF
EIZZU

Name: NLZ
Basic setting: 0

9--50
e Siemens AG
Page 510 of 719

FB164 STELANTR

Name: RMS
here whether the additional features (chapter 3.3), e.g Tag--Out can be used.
- Command output response in case of a fault (VBAF) *)

Name: VBAF
Function: Defines the reponse of the command outputs in the event of a fault. If the
parameter is activated the command outputs ALE and ALA will not be deactivated
in case of: Status discrepancy
Checkback error
Switchgear faulty.
activated
- MAN/AUTO changeover (MAUS) *)

Name: MAUS
Function: Defines whether the MAN/AUTO button in the operation window is operable.
activated
- TAG--OUT changeover (TOUS) *)

Name: TOUS
Function: Defines whether the TAG--OUT button in the operation window is operable.
activated

9--51
e Siemens AG
Page 511 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
- Reject to manual (REJ/MAN) *)

Name: REJ/MAN
Function: Defines whether the operation mode memory is reset to manual in the event of a
failure.
activated
- Operation mode (OP_MODE) *)

Name: OP_MODE
Function: Defines the possible operating modes.
Range of values: AUTO / MAN
SEMI
SEMI / MAN
Basic setting: AUTO / MAN
- Behavior on switchgear fault (BSFG) *)

Name: BSFG
Function: Defines whether it is possible to initiate a manual “CLOSE” command from OM650
while a switchgear fault is present.
activated
*) Additional features, only enabled if activated via parameter RMS.
5 Technical Data
Block number: FB164

Block name: STELANTR
Version: ________________↑
typ. 550 ms
-- Code 10100 bytes

9--52
e Siemens AG
Page 512 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
6 Abbreviations
ALAS Load switch CLOSE output

ALES Load switch OPEN output
AZB Feeder ready

BHA Manual command CLOSE
BHE Manual command OPEN
BHS Manual command STOP

CB/CL_N Check-back message NOT CLOSED
CB/OP_N Check-back message NOT OPEN

DEAUF Torque in OPEN direction
DW Data word
EFAE Status discrepancy from CLOSED to OPEN

EFEA Status discrepancy from OPEN to CLOSED
E/CL Process enable CLOSED

9--53
e Siemens AG
Page 513 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
FB Function block

LAAUF Lamp OPEN

LAZU Lamp CLOSED
LP Test lamps
MLA Signal lamp CLOSED

MLE Signal lamp OPEN
MLS Signal lamp fault
MSA Protective action in CLOSE direction
MSE Protective action in OPEN direction



RMA Check-back message CLOSED
RME Check-back message OPEN
RMF1A Check-back error CLOSED, travel
RMF1E Check-back error OPEN, travel
RMF2A Check-back error CLOSED, torque
RMF2E Check-back error OPEN, torque
RMNA (RM/ZU_N) Check-back message NOT CLOSED
RMNE (RM/AUFN) Check-back message NOT OPEN
RM/AUTO Automatic mode of operation

9--54
e Siemens AG
Page 514 of 719

FB164 STELANTR

SBQ Serial (OM) control possible acknowledgement
SBSTOP Serial (OM) control possible STOP
SBZU Serial (OM) control possible CLOSED
SIM Signal module
SIMP Control pulse
TA Pushbutton
TGL Total run time of actuator
TVE Time for leaving the limit position



9--55
e Siemens AG
Page 515 of 719

FB164 STELANTR

Fig. 20 Actuator, command generation

9--56
e Siemens AG
Page 516 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Automatic commands
A/CLOSED
& CLOSED
EN/CLOSED
A/OPEN
& & OPEN
EN/OPEN
VOS
SP/BFLO
>1
Manual commands
from OM
OM CLOSED
& CLOSED
EN/CLOSED
OM OPEN
& & OPEN
EN/OPEN
SP/OM
VOS >1
SP/BFLO
Manual commands
from desk tile
DESK TILE CLOSED
FHD CLOSED
EN/CLOSED
&
>1
DESK TILE OPEN

FHD & & OPEN
EN/OPEN >1
VOS
SP/TF &
>1
SP/BFLO
Legend:
FHD = Manual input enable VOS = Local control
SP/OM = Disable OM input SP/TF = Disable desk tile input
SP/BFLO = Disable command logic
Fig. 20: Actuator, command generation

9--57
e Siemens AG
Page 517 of 719

FB164 STELANTR
Command OUTPUT
memory Load switch
”CLOSED” (AL)
Control in opposite
direction on blocking Priority ”CLOSED” ALA
logic S ”CLOSED”
PROTECTION--
AUTOMATIC--”CLOSED“ >1
MANUAL
R
Command
PROTECTION-- memory
AUTOMATIC--”OPEN“ ”OPEN”
MANUAL
S ALE
Parameter PBR ”OPEN”
“CLOSED before OPEN”/
”OPEN before CLOSED” >1 R
”OPEN”
No Fault
>1
SP/BFLO
Torque “CLOSED”
Parameter EIZ, acquisition of >1

and torque CLOSED” &
Check--back message “CLOSED”
Torque “OPEN”
>1
Parameter EIZ, acquisition of
&
and torque OPEN”
Check--back message “OPEN”

9--58
e Siemens AG
Page 518 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 519 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB250 STUFSTEL (Step Adjuster)
STUF
Page 520 of 719

FB250 STUFSTEL

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

10--2
e Siemens AG
Page 521 of 719

FB250 STUFSTEL
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5
2 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5

3.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--6
3.2 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--6
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--7
5 Parameterization Form of Function Block STUFSTEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--8
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--11
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--11

10--3
e Siemens AG
Page 522 of 719

FB250 STUFSTEL

10--4
e Siemens AG
Page 523 of 719

FB250 STUFSTEL
1 Application
The function block FB250 STUFSTEL prepares the position feedbacks which are output BCD-coded by the
transformer step adjuster for display on the OM. The block provides the OM commands ”Increase” and ”De-
crease” in the process image. Corresponding enables are considered in the process. The commands are
output by SIM modules (binary signal output).
2 Design
The following Fig. shows the block diagram of the function block FB250 STUFSTEL with its input and output
variables.
BCD1 STUFE
Step
adjustment
BCD6 PLUS
PLUS MINUS
MINUS
LHOE
EXS LTIEF
PFE STMAX
SP/OM # STMIN
OM increase KSTOE
OM decrease BHOE
BTIEF
Fig. 1: Block diagram FB250 STUFSTEL
Legend: BCD1/2/3/4 Step adjustment, units

BCD5/6 Step adjustment, tens
PLUS Display +
MINUS Display --
EXS External fault
PFE Process enable
SP / OM Disable OM operator input
STUFE Step adjustment
LHOE Increasing
LTIEF Decreasing
STMAX Not highest stage
STMIN Not lowest stage
KSTOE No fault
BHOE Command INCREASE
BTIEF Command DECREASE

10--5
e Siemens AG
Page 524 of 719

FB250 STUFSTEL
3.1 Inputs
SP/OM Disable OM operator input

The OM commands are ineffective with ”1”
EXS External fault
The OM commands are ineffective with ”1”
PFE Process enable
The OM commands are only effective with ”1”
BCD1/2/3/4 Step adjustment, units
BCD5/6 Step adjustment, tens
3.2 Outputs
The outputs listed below generate time-tagged data (TTD) when parameterized accordingly.
LHOE Indicates with ”1” that the command output is in the direction ”INCREASE” and is reset by a
change in the step setting.
LTIEF Indicates with ”1” that the command output is in the direction ”DECREASE” and is reset by a
change in the step setting.
STMAX Indicates with ”1” that the step setting has not yet reached the value ANZAHL (parameter)
and has a positive sign with ANZEI 2, 3 (parameter).
STMIN Indicates with ”1” that the step setting has not yet reached the value ANZAHL (parameter)
and has a negative sign with ANZEI 2, 3 (parameter) or has reached the number 1 with
ANZEI 1.
KSTOE Is ”1” if EXS is set = 0 and if a valid value is present with BCD.
Valid values for the step setting are:
Parameter ANZEI = 1; 1 to 39
Parameter ANZEI = 2, 3; --39, --1, 0, +1, +39
PLUS Input value positive (display +)
MINUS Input value negative (display --)
BHOE Command output in direction ”Increase”
BTIEF Command output in direction ”Decrease”

10--6
e Siemens AG
Page 525 of 719

FB250 STUFSTEL
4 Configuring
Fig. 2 shows the symbol of the function block STUFSTEL similar to that in the ES 680 configuring system.
STUF Symbol: TAP CHANGER

TXP specific FB250
PIC---ID 2851
only for use in AP
Fig. 2: CSF symbol of function block STUFSTEL

10--7
e Siemens AG
Page 526 of 719

FB250 STUFSTEL
5 Parameterization Form of Function Block STUFSTEL
Fig. 3: Parameterization form of function block STUFSTEL

- Step number (ANZAH)
- Display mode (ANZEI)
- Command duration (IMPT)
- Time-tagged data (TTD)

10--8
e Siemens AG
Page 527 of 719

FB250 STUFSTEL
- Step number
Name: ANZAH
Function: Defines the maximum step number
Meaning: 1 to 39 steps
Basic setting: 1
- Display mode
Name: ANZEI
Function: Type of display
Meaning: 1: --> display 1 to ANZAH
2: --> display +/-- ANZAH
3: --> center position and +/-- ANZAH
Basic setting: 1
- Command duration
Name: IMPT
Function: Duration of positioning command
Meaning: 10 corresponds to 1 s
255 corresponds 25.5 s
Basic setting: 10
- Time-tagged data
Name: TTD
Function: TTD generation
Meaning: 0 = no TTD
1 = generate TTD
KSTOE = no fault
LHOE = increasing
LTIEF = decreasing
STMAX = not highest stage
STMIN = not lowest stage
PLUS = display +
MINUS = display --
Basic setting: 0

Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number

10--9
e Siemens AG
Page 528 of 719

FB250 STUFSTEL
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

10--10
e Siemens AG
Page 529 of 719

FB250 STUFSTEL
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB250

Block name: STUFSTEL
Version: _________________"
Average runtime: Typ. 100 ms
Called blocks: None
-- Code 314 bytes
-- Historical values (per call) 14 words
Other conditions: The block can only be used in the group control level (AP)
within the system environment for protection/SIM.
7 Abbreviations
FB Function block
SIM Signal module

10--11
e Siemens AG
Page 530 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 531 of 719

SIM Function Block
FB80 ZAEHL (Counting Pulse Input)
ZAEHLSIM
Page 532 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

10--2
e Siemens AG
Page 533 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5
2 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5
2.1 Hardware Wiring SIM 385 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5

3.1 Command Logic for Enabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--7
3.2 Setpoint Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--8
3.3 Status Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--8
3.4 Time--tagged data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--8
3.5 Count Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--8
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--9
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--13
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--13

10--3
e Siemens AG
Page 534 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL

10--4
e Siemens AG
Page 535 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL
1 Application
The counting pulse input is carried out in the TELEPERM XP AS 620 B (SIM version) using the function
block FB80 in conjunction with the ET 200U and the signal modules SIM 385 and SIM 451.
2 Design
The following Fig. shows the block diagram of the function block FB80 ZAEHL with its input and output varia-
bles.
OM 650 PAE SIM 385

Simulation
START
STOP Command Adapt actual value IST/KG
Logic (physical variable)
FG (enable)
SOLL/1
SOLL/2
UEB/ERL
KSIM
SOLL/W1
SOLL/W2 KG
PAA SIM 385/451
Fig. 1: Block diagram
Meaning:
SOLL/W1 Input for setpoint value 1
SOLL/W2 Input for setpoint value 2
SOLL/1 Binary output for setpoint 1 achieved
SOLL/2 Binary output for setpoint 2 achieved
UEB/ERL Binary output for counter overflow
KSIM Binary output for channel simulated
KG Binary output for channel valid
2.1 Hardware Wiring SIM 385
The module SIM 385, in conjunction with the function block FB80 which operates in the AP, serves as coun-
ting pulse input.
24--V and 5--V sensors may be connected to the module SIM 385.
The outputs at the terminals 5/6, 9/10 (see Fig. 2 and Fig. 3) may be used as hardware signal output ”Set-
point achieved”. However a connection of these terminals is not necessary.

10--5
e Siemens AG
Page 536 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL
1
5 V 5V
2 L+
5 V
3 M
0 V 24 V
4 S IM 3 8 5
Pulse 5
generator 6
Ua 7
8
9
Setpoint 2 achieved
Setpoint 1 achieved
15--way 10
subminiature
Enable/Disable
11
female 12
connector
13
14
M M
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Terminal block
L+ M
to SIM 451
Fig. 2: Terminal connection for counting pulse generator with a 5--V differential signal
1
2
3
M
4 S IM 3 8 5
5
6
0 V 7
8
24 V L+
9
Setpoint 2 achieved
15--way
Setpoint 1 achieved
10
subminiature
Enable/Disable
Pulse 11
generator female
12
connector
13
Ua
14
M M
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Terminal block
L+ M
to SIM 451
Fig. 3: Terminal connection for counting pulse generator DC 24 V

10--6
e Siemens AG
Page 537 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL
The output module for binary signals SIM 451 is also required for interconnecting the enable/disable input. 8
counter modules SIM 385 need one module SIM 451. All modules must be accomodated in the same ET
200U station.
Terminal
4 4 S IM 3 8 5
Channel 1 v .0
8M B11
3 4 S IM 3 8 5
Channel 2 v .1
S 8M B11
6 4 S IM 3 8 5
I Channel 3 v .2
8M B11
M 5 4
Channel 4 v .3
S IM 3 8 5
8M B11
8 4 S IM 3 8 5
4 Channel 5 v .4
8M B11
5 7 4 S IM 3 8 5
Channel 6 v .5
8M B11
1
10 4 S IM 3 8 5
Channel 7 v .6
8M B11
8M A 11
9 4 S IM 3 8 5
Channel 8 v .7
8M B11
Fig. 4: Connection of the enable/disable inputs from SIM 385 by SIM 451
3.1 Command Logic for Enabling
The FB80 receives the start and stop commands with the control word (priority to the OM--commands). The
OM--commands are only taken into consideration if ”Disable serial (OM) input” is ”0”. The start command is
only executed when the bit ENABLE is set. This command remains maintained until the stop command arri-
ves. The STOP command has priority on the START command.
The start command causes the counter to start beginning with the counter content 0. The start command
switches the enable input of the module SIM 385 via SIM 451 over to ”1”. The stop command causes the co-
unter to stop. The output values of the status word of the FB80 are not changed. The stop command swit-
ches the enable input of the module SIM 385 via SIM 451 over to ”0”.

10--7
e Siemens AG
Page 538 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL
3.2 Setpoint Input
Two setpoint values for counter contents (physical variable in floating--point format) may be entered in the
control word; they can be invoked by the counter module.
The FB80 links the control commands correspondingly and transmits them to the module SIM 451 (ENABLE)
with the PAA. The setpoints are transmitted to the SIM 385 via the PAA.
3.3 Status Signals
The function block FB80 enters the counter content in the data block ZUDB of the process image (final value
= 60,000) as a fixed--point number and as a physical variable. In addition to this the following status signals
are included:
-- Setpoint 1 achieved
-- Setpoint 2 achieved
-- Counter overflow
-- Channel simulated
-- Channel valid
”Channel valid” (bit KG) is set when the SIM 385 and also the SIM 451 are signalled as faultless and when
”0” is set in bit 4 of the diagnosis byte (”Counter” operating mode). The bit KG is reset when these conditions
are not met.
3.4 Time--tagged data
In case of change the status signals may also be generated as signal DMZ. With ”Setpoint 1 achieved”, ”Set-
point 2 achieved” and ”Overflow” it may be specified if it is considered as an alarm, a warning or a tolerance
violation.
The message KSIM is also generated as fault DMZ.
3.5 Count Simulation
A count can be simulated independent of the respective counter content. This simulation value is processed
in place of the input variable. In the course of it a signal DMZ and a fault DMZ ”Channel simulated” are gene-
rated. The bit ”Channel simulated” is set in the process input image.

10--8
e Siemens AG
Page 539 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL
4 Configuring
Fig. 5 shows the symbol of the function block ZAEHL similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring system.
ZAEHLSIM Symbol: COUNTING PULSE INPUT

TXP---specific module FB80
PIC---ID 2721
only for use in AP with module SIM385 and SIM451
Fig. 5: CSF symbol df function block FB80 ZAEHL

10--9
e Siemens AG
Page 540 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL
5 Parameterization
The parameters of the function block FB80 are generated by the ES configuring system. The parameters can
be set using convenient forms (see Fig. 6).

10--10
e Siemens AG
Page 541 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL
- Time--tagged data (DMZ)
Name: DMZ
Function: Defines wether time--tagged data have to be generated
Parameter type: Byte
Range of values: 0 -- 31
Meaning: ”0” = no time--tagged data
”1” = time--tagged data
Assignment: Bit 0 = counter content
Bit 1 = actual value
Bit 2 = setpoint 1
Bit 3 = setpoint 2
Bit 4 = overflow
Basic setting: 0
- Sampling time
Name: ABZE
Function: Defines the sampling times for the DMZ generation of the counter content and
the actual value
Parameter type: Word
Meaning: 0 = check for each block pass
60000 = check all 60 s
Basic setting: 1000 = 1 s
- Delta
Name: DELT
Function: A DMZ is generated with a change in the counter content
Range of values: 0 to 65 536
Basic setting: 0

Name: ANF
Parameter type: Double word
Range of values: S5 floating--point format
Basic setting: 0
Name: END
Parameter type: Double word
Range of values: S5 floating--point format
Basic setting: 0

10--11
e Siemens AG
Page 542 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL
Name: FUNR
Function: Describes the function area to which the count is assigned
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

10--12
e Siemens AG
Page 543 of 719

FB80 ZAEHL
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB80

Block name: ZAEHL
Version: _________________"
Average run time: typ. 100 ms
-- Code 1000 bytes
(AP) within the system environment for protection/SIM.
7 Abbreviations
ANF Physical lower range value
AWT Alarm--Warning--Tolerance
BA Binary output
BG Module
DB Data block
DELT Delta
DW Data word
END Physical upper range value
ES Configuration system
FAKT Destandardization factor
FB Function block
FUNR Function area number
OM Operating and monitoring system
PA Process image
SIM Signal module

10--13
e Siemens AG
Page 544 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 545 of 719

I/O Function Block
FB82 ANAAUSD (APT and auxiliary plant system Analog Signal Output)
SD.ANAU
Page 546 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

11--2
e Siemens AG
Page 547 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
1.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
1.2 System Integration of Auxiliary Systems for the AS 620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
1.3 System Integration of APT for the AS 620--S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--6

3.1 Analog Value Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--9
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--10
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--13
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--14

11--3
e Siemens AG
Page 548 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD

11--4
e Siemens AG
Page 549 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
1 Application
1.1 Functions
The I/O function block FB82 ANAAUSD (analog signal output for floating points) is used as a communication
link to auxiliary plant control systems for writing analog values in floating point format.
In AS 620--S5 Automation Systems where the AP is based on the SIMATIC S5 system, the FB82 connects
16--bit fixed point values to APTs in the AS 620T programmable controller.
The AS 620 T automation equipment is designed for fast closed--loop control of turbine generator set (gas
turbines, steam turbines and generators).
1.2 System Integration of Auxiliary Systems for the AS 620
E S 680 O M 65 0 D S 6 70
plant bus plant bus
AS 620--S7 AS 620--S5
AP--S7 AP
FB82 FB82
analog value analog value
auxiliary auxiliary
plant system plant system
Fig. 1: Communication Link to Auxiliary Plant Control Systems with analog value transfer

11--5
e Siemens AG
Page 550 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
1.3 System Integration of APT for the AS 620--S5
E S 680 O M 65 0 D S 6 70
plant bus
AS 620--S5
AP
analog value
APT
SIMADYN D 16Bit
AS 620T
Fig. 2: Coupling principle between APT and AS 620--S5
- AP coupling with bus system
The APT (automation processor turbine, SIMADYN D) is linked to the TELEPERM XP process control sy-
stem via an AP automation processor (head end station). This takes place either with
D the plant bus. In this case the existing connection of the plant bus in the AS 620--S5 is also used
and the APT communication processors are connected directly to the plant bus via star couplers.
D a separate LAN.
- Data transmission
The bus system allows transmission of the following data:

D binary values,
D analog values as well as
D statuses and commands of the APT fast closed--loop control and drive control.
- Software coupling, coupling software SDKOP
The software coupling of an APT (SIMADYN D, 16--bit) occurs via the program package SDKOP, comprising
essentially I/O function blocks (matching blocks) and coupling blocks for the CP interface. The I/O function
blocks are called in the AP to match the data formats. The coupling blocks implement the data interchange
between APT and the AP of TELEPERM XP.

11--6
e Siemens AG
Page 551 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
Function Limiting:
The following preprocessing or signal conditioning functions may only be implemented in the APT:
- Monitoring for open--circuit
- Smoothing of analog signal
- Generation of mean value
- Output of a default analog value in event of fault
2 Mode of Operation
The FB82 ANAAUSD operates on the basis of the following logic diagram.
Analog signal
analog signal
conversion
PAA
PAA Process image of the outputs to the APT P Parameter
Fig. 3: Logic diagram of the FB82 ANAAUSD

11--7
e Siemens AG
Page 552 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
FB82 provides the following functions:
- Conversion of the TXP conform representation of the analog value into the SIMADYN D format:
The 32--bit floating--point number from the status process image is converted into a 16--bit fixed--
point number (S5 format) corresponding to the 200 % representation of the SIMADYN convention.
A linear matching is effected during the conversion of the floating--point number, the parameters
LRV and URV (physical lower range value and physical upper range value) to be set being integra-
ted in the conversion algorithm. Each value obtained with the conversion is valid for the APT.
The following figure shows the functions of the I/O function block FB82 ANAAUSD for the example of the
AP--APT coupling.
OM
AP--SSW
Automatic
FB 82
ANAAUSD
Single--channel
or redundant
AP--APT coupling
APT (SIMADYN D)
Fig. 4: Analog signal output structure to the APT (SIMADYN D)

11--8
e Siemens AG
Page 553 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
3.1 Analog Value Output
The I/O function block ANAAUSD transforms the 32--bit floating--point number from the control word into a
16--bit fixed--point number (range of values --32768 to +32767 corresponding to --200 % to +200 % according
to the SIMADYN convention). This fixed--point number is entered into the transmit mailbox for the correspon-
ding APT in accordance to the parameters PAAD and PAAW defined by the ES 680.
Message interface transmit mailbox User interface

(SIM function block FB82 ANAAUSD)
PAAD
14 2 1 0 analog value Control
PAAW V 2 ... 2 2 2 word
Mantissa Low (32 bit)
V: Sign
Fig. 5: Interfaces for analog signal output in fixed--point format, FB82 ANAAUSD

11--9
e Siemens AG
Page 554 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
4 Configuring
The following figure shows the control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB82 ANAAUSD
(similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring system).
SD.ANAU Symbol: Analog signal output, coupling of the APT (SIMADYN D)

pic_id 7202
only for use in AP
Fig. 6: Control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB82 ANAAUSD

11--10
e Siemens AG
Page 555 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
5 Parameterization
Fig. 7: Parameterization form FB82 ANAAUSD
Folllowing functions must be parameterized:
- Analog output range *) (AAB)
- Destandardization factor *) (FAKT)
*) not relevant
- Parameter validity
The parameters marked with *) in the parameter descriptions are not relevant for the function of the I/O func-
tion block but partially required for the OM because important parameters of the standard display are derived
from this parameter setting (e.g. range limits for bar diagram). The values set in the SIMADYN D system can
only be entered for documentation even if the parameters are not required by the OM. The user however
has to look for consistency.

11--11
e Siemens AG
Page 556 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
- Analog output range *)
Name: AAB
Range of values: 8
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 0
Remark: APT waits for analog values within the range +32767 to --32768. Each value is
valid.
Name: LRV
Function: Physical lower range value, corresponds to the value 0 %
Range of values: S5 GP format
Meaning: Parameter can be set
Basic setting: 0,0
- Destandardization factor *)
Name: FAKT
Function: Destandardization factor
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 0,0
Name: URV
Function: Physical upper range value, corresponds to the value 100 %
Basic setting: 0,0
Name: FUNR
Function: Describes the function area allocated to the analog value
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Function: Entity number within the function area FUNR
Basic setting: 0

11--12
e Siemens AG
Page 557 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB82

Block name: ANAAUSD
Library number: E88530--B1450--A-- ...
Version: ________________↑
Average run time: 60 ms
Called blocks: None
-- Code 133 words
-- Historical value (per call) None
Other conditions: The block can only be used in the group control level (AP).
System environment: Protection/SIM and free environment

11--13
e Siemens AG
Page 558 of 719

FB82 ANAAUSD
7 Abbreviations
AAB Analog output range (parameter)

AASIG Analog output signal
AP--SSW AP system software
APT Automation processor, turbine (SIMADYN D)
AS 620 B Automation system (B = basic system)
AS 620 F Automation system (F = fail--safe)
AS 620 T Automation system, turbine
CP Communication processor
CPU Central processing unit, SIMATIC arithmetic module
DS 670 Diagnosis system
E/A Input/Output
ES 680 Configuring system (Engineering System)
FAKT Destandardization factor (parameter)
FB Function block
GP Floating--point format
INST Entity number
LAN Local Area Network
LRV Physical lower range value (parameter)
OM 650 Operating and Monitoring system
PAAD Data block number of PAA
PAAW Word number in PAAD
S5 see SIMATIC S5
SD Standard Display (OM)
SDKOP Coupling with APT (SIMADYN D)
SF Signal shaper
SIM Signal module (Standard Interface Module)
SIMADYN D SIEMENS automation system for fast closed--loop controls
SIMATIC S5 SIEMENS programmable controllers (SPS)
URV Physical upper range value (parameter)

11--14
e Siemens AG
Page 559 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 560 of 719

I/O Function Block
FB81 ANAINPSD (APT and auxiliary plant system Analog Signal Input)
SD.ANAEI
Page 561 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

11--2
e Siemens AG
Page 562 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
Contents
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
1.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
1.2 System Integration of Auxiliary Systems for the AS 620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
1.3 System Integration of APT for the AS 620--S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--6

3.1 Acquisition and Monitoring of Analog Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--10
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--12
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--18
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--19

11--3
e Siemens AG
Page 563 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD

11--4
e Siemens AG
Page 564 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
1 Application
1.1 Functions
The I/O function block FB81 ANAINPSD (analog signal input for floating points) is used as a communication
link to auxiliary plant control systems for reading in analog values in floating point format.
In AS 620--S5 Automation Systems where the AP is based on the SIMATIC S5 system, the FB81 connects
16--bit fixed point values to APTs in the AS 620T programmable controller.
The AS 620 T automation equipment is designed for fast closed--loop control of turbine generator set (gas
turbines, steam turbines and generators).
1.2 System Integration of Auxiliary Systems for the AS 620
E S 680 O M 65 0 D S 6 70
plant bus plant bus
AS 620--S7 AS 620--S5
AP--S7 AP
FB81 FB81
auxiliary auxiliary
Fig. 1: Communication Link to Auxiliary Plant Control Systems with analog value transfer

11--5
e Siemens AG
Page 565 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
1.3 System Integration of APT for the AS 620--S5
E S 680 O M 65 0 D S 6 70
plant bus
AS 620--S5
AP
analog value
APT
SIMADYN D 16Bit
AS 620T
Fig. 2: Coupling principle between APT and AS 620--S5
- AP coupling with bus system
The APT (automation processor turbine, SIMADYN D) is linked to the TELEPERM XP process control sy-
stem via an AP automation processor (head end station). This takes place either with
D the plant bus. In this case the existing connection of the plant bus in the AS 620--S5 is also used
and the APT communication processors are connected directly to the plant bus via star couplers.
D a separate LAN.
- Data transmission
The bus system allows transmission of the following data:

D binary values,
D analog values as well as
D statuses and commands of the APT fast closed--loop control and the drive control.
- Software coupling, coupling software SDKOP
The software coupling of an APT (SIMADYN D, 16--bit) occurs via the program package SDKOP, comprising
essentially I/O function blocks (matching blocks) and coupling blocks for the CP interface. The I/O function
blocks are called in the AP to match the data formats. The coupling blocks implement the data interchange
between APT and the AP of TELEPERM XP.

11--6
e Siemens AG
Page 566 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
Function Limiting:
The following preprocessing or signal conditioning functions may only be implemented in the APT:
- Monitoring for open--circuit
2 Mode of Operation
The FB81 ANAINPSD operates on the basis of the following logic diagram:
analog signal
analog signal
conversion
analog signal
P P change
S---TTD PAE_E
S--- Signal ---

TTD
P Parameter
Time---tagged data
PAE_E Process image of inputs from ELE
Ü Monitoring
Fig. 3: Logic diagram of the FB81 ANAINPSD

11--7
e Siemens AG
Page 567 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
- AS 620 conform representation of the analog value:

The I/O function block FB81 ANAINPSD (APT analog signal input) is used in conjunction with an
APT to read in analog values. The analog signal status of the input is read--in from the I/O function
block FB81 as a 16--bit fixed--point number, converted into a corresponding 32--bit S5 floating--point
number or 32--bit S7 floating--point number and then transferred in the status process image. The
analog value supplied by the APT is interpreted as per cent representation according to the SIMA-
DYN D convention (range: --200 % to +200 % corresponding to --32768 to +32767). A linear mat-
ching is effected during the conversion of the floating--point representation, the parameter LRV
(physical lower range value) to be set being integrated in the conversion algorithm.
- TTD generation following signal changes:
In case of violation of a preset delta value.
- Processing of coupling faults
In case of a coupling fault the channel valid bit (KG bit) in the status word is cleared and the generation of a
signal TTD suppressed.
- Analog signal processing
The analog signal processing, e.g. smoothing, standardization, signal limiting and mean value generation is
already carried out in the APT or the auxiliary plant system.

11--8
e Siemens AG
Page 568 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
The following figure shows the functions of the I/O function block FB81 ANAINPSD for the example of the
AP--APT coupling.
OM
AP--SSW
Automatic
FB 81
ANAINPSD
Single--channel
or redundant
AP--APT coupling
APT (SIMADYN D)
Fig. 4: Analog signal input structure of APT (SIMADYN D)

11--9
e Siemens AG
Page 569 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
3.1 Acquisition and Monitoring of Analog Signals
The I/O function block ANAINPSD selects the analog value parameterized with ES 680 from the data block
received from the APT. This value is a physical value in S5 fixed--point format (range of values --32768 to
+32767 corresponding to --200 % to +200 % according to the SIMADYN convention) that is converted from
ANAINPSD into a floating--point number for further processing. The current coupling status is signalled in the
KG bit (channel validity bit) of the additional status word. When the receive message from the APT fails, the
KG bit is reset to zero.

(SIM function block FB81 ANAINPSD)
PAED
PAEW
analog value
14 2 1 0
V 2 ... 2 2 2
Mantissa Low (32 bit)
K Additional
G status word
15 0
V: Sign 2 KG: channel valid 2
Fig. 5: Interfaces for analog signal input in fixed--point format, FB81 ANAINPSD
The signal monitoring of range limits does not exist for the FB81 block. All analog values (fixed--point num-
bers) received from the APT are valid.

11--10
e Siemens AG
Page 570 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
Time--tagged data are used for the chronologically correct acquisition of process signals and I & C fault mes-
sages in message processing and display as well as for logging. They are produced in case of status change
in all automation levels.
The I/O function block FB81 only recognizes signal TTD (not error TTD). Input signals may be selected with
parameter setting when they are used in the process control level as time--tagged data for reporting and log-
ging. For analog values an acquisition in selectable time intervals and at reaching a parameterized signal
change is possible (parameter: sampling period ABZE and delta DELT).
Signal TTD

Channel valid KG
Fig. 6: Signal TTD
Disable and enable processing of the signal TTD is implemented with the parameter MTTD (TTD form).

11--11
e Siemens AG
Page 571 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
4 Configuring
The following figure shows the control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB81 ANAINPSD
(similar to the symbol in the ES 680 configuring system).
SD.ANAEI Symbol: Analog signal input, coupling via APT

(SYMADYN D)
pic_id 7200
only for use in AP
Fig. 7: Control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB81 ANAINPSD

11--12
e Siemens AG
Page 572 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
5 Parameterization
Fig. 8: Parameterization form FB81 ANAINPSD
Fig. 9: Parameter I&C mask symbol SD.ANAEIN

11--13
e Siemens AG
Page 573 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
Following functions have to be parameterized:
- Analog input range *) (AEB)
- Smoothing of input signal *) (GL)
- Value of default analog signal *) (EASW)
- Input range monitoring *) (EU)
- Delta (DELT)
- Delay input range monitoring *) (EUZE)
- Default analog signal *) (EAS)
*) not relevant

11--14
e Siemens AG
Page 574 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
from this parameter setting (e.g. range limits for bar diagram). The values set in the SIMADYN D system can
only be entered for documentation even if the parameters are not required by the OM. The user however
has to look for consistency.
- Analog input range *)
Name: AEB
Range of values: 8
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 8
Remark: APT supplies analog values within the range +32767 to --32768. Each value is
valid.
- Smoothing of input signal *)
Name: GL
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 0
- Value of default analog signal *)
Name: EASW
Function: Defines the value of the default signal depending on the analog input range
AEB.
Meaning: irrelevant
Range of values: --11000 to +11000
Basic setting: 0%
- Input range monitoring *)
Name: EU
Function: Defines how the range monitoring functions are active (downward, upward viola-
tion)
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 0
- Sampling period
Name: ABZE
Function: Defines the sampling times for TTD generation of the analog signal
(step size 100 = 0.1 s, 0 : for each block transit)
Range of values: 0 to 60 000 corresponding 0 to 60.0 s

11--15
e Siemens AG
Page 575 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
- Delta
Name: DELT
Function: Creates a TTD each time the input signal change is ≥ DELT.
(increments 100 = 1%, 0 = 0%). The delta value refers to the
ANF -- END range.
Range of values: 0 to 20 000, corresponding to 0 to 200%
Basic setting: 500 ≡ 5%
- Delay in input range monitoring *)
Name: EUZE
Function: Defines the delay time on triggering of the input range monitoring. Is active for
lower and upper range limit if ”active with delay” is parameterized for EU.
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 0
- Default analog signal *)

Name: EAS
Function: Defines the type of default signal with channel faults
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 0

Name: LRV
Function: Physical lower range value, corresponds to the value 0 %
Meaning: Depends on the measured variable
Basic setting: 0.0

Name: URV
Function: Physical upper range value, corresponds to the value 100 %
Meaning: Depends on the measured variable
Basic setting: 0.0

11--16
e Siemens AG
Page 576 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
- Form for time--tagged data
Name: MTTD
Function: Defines if signal TTDs are generated
1 = generate TTD
Bit 0 = AESIG / KG
Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

11--17
e Siemens AG
Page 577 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB 81
Block name: ANAINPSD
Version: ________________↑
Average run time: 120 µs
-- Processing signal TTD 10 µs in addition
-- Code 380 words
-- Historical value (per call) 15 words + 4 words header

11--18
e Siemens AG
Page 578 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
7 Abbreviations
ABZE Sampling period (parameter)
AEB Analog input range (parameter)
DB Data block
DELT Delta, significant change of input signal (parameter)
DX Extended data block
E/A Input/Output
EAS Default analog signal (parameter)
EASW Value of the default analog signal (parameter)
EU Input range monitoring (parameter)
EUZE Time delay in input range monitoring (parameter)
FB Function block
GL Smoothing of the input signal
INST Entity number
KG Channel valid
MTTD Form (mask) for TTD (parameter)
PAED Data block number of PAE
PAEW Word number in PAED
RK Redundant coupling
S5 see SIMATIC S5
SDKOP Coupling with APT (SIMADYN D)

11--19
e Siemens AG
Page 579 of 719

FB81 ANAINPSD
SF Signal shaper

11--20
e Siemens AG
Page 580 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 581 of 719

I/O Function Block
FB150 FLOATINP (Analog Signal Input Floating--Point)
NA.GPEIN
Page 582 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

12--2
e Siemens AG
Page 583 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--5
1.1 Functions of the FB150 FLOATINP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--5
1.2 Function Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--6

3.1 Acquisition and Monitoring of Analog Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--8
3.2.1 Signal TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--9
3.2.2 Fault TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--9
3.3 Operation Mode External Time Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--10
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--11
5 Parameterizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--12
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--16
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--17

12--3
e Siemens AG
Page 584 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP

12--4
e Siemens AG
Page 585 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
1 Application
1.1 Functions of the FB150 FLOATINP
The I/O function block FB150 GPEIN (analog signal input for floating points) is used as a communication link
to auxiliary plant control systems for reading in analog values in floating point format.
E S 680 O M 65 0 D S 6 70
plant bus plant bus
AS 620--S7 AS 620--S5
AP--S7 AP
FB150 FB150

(floating point) (floating point)
auxiliary auxiliary
Fig. 1: Coupling of auxiliaries with analog value transfer
- AS 620 conform representation of the analog value
- TTD generation following signal changes

12--5
e Siemens AG
Page 586 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
1.2 Function Limiting
The following preprocessing or signal conditioning functions may be implemented in the auxiliary:
- Monitoring for open circuit
2 Mode of Operation
The FB150 FLOATINP operates on the basis of the following logic diagram:
Analog signal
Analog signal Analog signal

P input range AEB P change
Ü Ü
F---TTD S---TTD PAE_E
S--- Signal---
P Parameter
F--- Fault---
TTD Time---tagged data, can be configured
PAE_E Process image of inputs from ELE
Ü Monitoring
Fig. 2: Logic diagram FB150 FLOATINP

12--6
e Siemens AG
Page 587 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
- Processing of coupling faults
In case of a coupling fault the channel valid bit (KG bit) in the status word is cleared and the generation of a
signal TTD suppressed..
The analog signal processing, e.g. smoothing, standardization, signal limiting and mean value generation is
already carried out in the auxiliary.
The following figure shows the functions of the I/O function block FB150 FLOATINP for the auxiliary coupling.
OM
AP--SSW
Automatic
FB 150
FLOATINP
Single--channel
or
redundant
AP--AUX--coupling
AUX (auxiliary plant system)
Fig. 3: Structure of the floating--point input of auxiliaries (secondary systems)

12--7
e Siemens AG
Page 588 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
3.1 Acquisition and Monitoring of Analog Signals
The I/O function block FLOATINP selects the analog value parameterized with ES 680 from the data block
received from the auxiliary. This value is a physical value in floating--point format that is put unchanged at
the user’s program disposal for further processing by the I/O function block FLOATINP. The current coupling
status is signalled in the KG bit (channel valid bit) of the additional status word. When the receive message
from the auxiliary fails, the KG bit is reset to zero.
Signal changes in relation with a coupling failure are not transmitted to the OM 650 as signal TTD.

(Output of function block FB150 FLOATINP)
PAED
PAEW
analog value in analog value in
floating point format floating point format
K Additional
G status word
15 0
2 KG: channel valid 2
Fig. 4: Interfaces for analog signal input in floating--point format, FB150 FLOATINP
Illegal identifications and limits of the auxiliary (quality code) are ignored. If necessary it is possible to trans-
mit them via binary inputs to be processed additionally with the KG bit in the user program. The remaining
bits of the status word can be used for this purpose
Use in the AS620--S5:
In an AP based on the SIMATIC S5 system, the FLOATINP function block expects the analog value to be in
S5--floating point format. The auxiliary plant system has to send the value in S5--floating point format.
Use in the AS620--S7:
In an AP based on the SIMATIC S7 system, the FLOATINP function block expects the analog value to be in
S7 floating point format (IEEE 754). If the AP is linked to SIMATIC S5--based auxiliaries, however, these au-
xiliaries will send their analog values in S5--floating point format. The format conversion in this case will be
transparent to the user. The ES 680 Engineering System will recognize the auxiliary plant control system
type and will provide the link processing in the AP with the information required for the conversion.
Remark: in the program setting and clearing the KG bit is solved in that the remaining bits of the data word
remain unchanged. It is so possible, by configuring further signals of the auxiliary (e.g. limit values) connec-
ted via separate binary value inputs, to assign to this data word within the AS 620 and to evaluate them via
the OM standard display.
The signal monitoring of the range limits can only be switched on or off jointly for the upper and lower range
limit (parameter: EU). It is immediately active, a delay cannot be configured (see parameter EUZE in Section
5 Parameterizing). The range violation of the signal has an effect on its validity (KG bit = 0).

12--8
e Siemens AG
Page 589 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
in all automation levels. The various TTD types and TTDs specific to the FB150 are described below.
3.2.1 Signal TTD
Parameters can be set to select input signals if they are required as time--tagged data (TTDs) in the process
control level for message output and logging.
The analog signals are scanned for the occurrence of a parameterizable signal change in parameterizable
time intervals. The time intervals are parameterized via the parameter ’scanning time’ (ABZE), the signal
change via the parameter ’Deltaband’ (DELT).
If an inquiry shows that the analog signal has reached or exceeded the deltaband parameterized a signal
TTD with the current analog value is generated.
Analog signal changes that are within the deltaband are summed up on the inquiry side and used to gene-
rate signal TTD with the current analog value once the summed up value exceeds 16 times the delta value.
Signal TTD

Channel valid KG
Fig. 5: Signal TTD
Disable and enable processing of the signal TTD is implemented with the parameter MTTD (TTD form).
3.2.2 Fault TTD
In addition to the TTDs assigned to a signal, there are also fault TTDs which describe the status of the con-
trol system in detailed form for messages and logs using error numbers. The fault TTDs are generated as the
results of events (faults) recognized by monitoring the analog signal.
Fault TTD

Fig. 6: Fault TTD
Disable and enable range monitoring is implemented with the parameter EU (input range monitoring).

12--9
e Siemens AG
Page 590 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
3.3 Operation Mode External Time Tag
Area of application
This mode of operation is used in auxiliary plant systems which provide the analog signal changes with an
additional time tag. The analog signal and time tag together are transferred in the telegram interface. An ana-
log TTD is then generated in the AP from this pair of values. The external time tag mode can be set via the
parameter AE_ZEIT (see Chapter 5 “Parameterization”).
Initiation of an analog TTD
The criterion for recognizing an analog event is generated in the auxiliary plant system. The TTD initiation
must be implemented in the auxiliary plant system by a suitable procedure. Please take care to limit the oc-
currence of TTDs as seems appropriate (e.g. delta value, scanning time etc., see Chapter 3.2.1). The analog
value is sent via TTD each time the time tag of the auxiliary plant system changes the time or each time the
included channel--valid--bit changes! The GPEIN in this mode of operation does not take into account the
configuring values ’delta value’ and ’scanning time’ into consideration.
Time tag structure
The time tag of the auxiliary plant system must be transferred as a double word behind the floating point
value and must contain the number of milliseconds passed since 0:00 hrs. Bit 30 (the second highest bit of
the double word) contains the channel--valid bit (KG). This bit is connected to the GPEIN--internal valitidy
criteria (coupling status, and range monitoring if it is switched on) by an “And” operation and is thus available
as TTD and as binary output.

(Output of function block FB150 FLOATINP)
31 K 27 Time tag High 16 K

2 G 2 2
G
15 Time tag Low 0 15
2 2 0
V: Sign External time tag
KG: Valid channel in ms since 0:00 hrs
KG--, EBU-- and EBO TTD

Normally each change of the analog value transferred is associated with a change in the time tag. As a con-
sequence, the recognition of an exceeded range is assigned the external time tag and the TTD “EBU/EBO”
and “KG” are provided with an external time tag.
Exception: If the analog value of the auxiliary plant system should change while the external time tag re-
mains the same, the AP internal time tag is used for the resulting TTD if an exceeded range has been detec-
ted.

12--10
e Siemens AG
Page 591 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
4 Configuring
The following figure shows the control system flowchart symbol of the function block FB150 FLOATINP (simi-
lar to the symbol representation in the ES 680 configuring system).
NA.GPEIN Symbol: Analog input floating point via auxiliary

pic_id 7102
only for use in AP
Fig. 8: Control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB150 FLOATINP

12--11
e Siemens AG
Page 592 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
5 Parameterizing
Fig. 9: Parameterization form FB150 FLOATINP
Fig. 10: Parameter I&C mask symbol NA.GPEIN

12--12
e Siemens AG
Page 593 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
- Analog input range *) (AEB)
- Smoothing of input signal *) (GL)
- Value of substitution analog signal *) (EASW)
- Delta (DELT)
- Delay input range monitoring *) (EUZE)
- Default analog signal *) (EAS)
- Form (mask) for TTD (MTTD)
*) not relevant
from this parameter setting (e.g. range limits for bar diagram). The values set in the auxiliary can only be ent-
ered for documentation even if the parameters are not required by the OM. The user however has to look
for consistency.
- Analog input range *)

Name: AEB
Range of values: 1, 2, 8
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 2
- Smoothing of input signal *)

Name: GL
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 0

12--13
e Siemens AG
Page 594 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
- Value of substitution analog signal *)

Name: EASW
Function: Defines the value of the substitution signal depending on the analog input range
AEB. Value is set as physical variable of the nominal range.
Basic setting: 0%

Name: EU
Function: Defines how the range monitoring functions are active (downward, upward viola-
tion)
Meaning: 0 : downward not active, upward not active
4 : downward active, upward active
other values: as for 0
Basic setting: 0
- Sampling period
Name: ABZE
(step size 100 = 0.1 s, 0 : for each block transit)
- Delta
Name: DELT
Function: A signal TTD is generated with a change in the input signal ≥ DELTA
(step size 100 = 1%, 0 = 0%). Value is set as physical variable of the nominal
range.
Range of values: 0 to 10000 corresponding 0 to 100 % of the physical nominal range
Basic setting: 100, corresponding 1%
- Delay in input range monitoring *)

Name: EUZE
Function: Defines the delay time on triggering of the input range monitoring. Is active for
lower and upper range limit if ”active with delay” is parameterized for EU.
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 0

12--14
e Siemens AG
Page 595 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
- Default analog signal *)

Name: EAS
Function: Defines the type of default signal with channel faults
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting: 0

Name: LRV
Function: Physical lower range value
Range of values: SIMATIC GP format
Meaning: Parameter can be set, lower range limit
Basic setting: 0.0

Name: URV
Function: Physical upper range value
Range of values: SIMATIC GP format
Meaning: Parameter can be set, upper range limit
Basic setting: 0.0
- Form (mask) for time--tagged data

Name: MTTD
Function: Defines if signal TTDs are generated
1 = TTD generated
Bit 0 = AESIG / KG
Name: FUNR
Meaning: Word, assigned from ES
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

12--15
e Siemens AG
Page 596 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB150

Block name: FLOATINP
Version: ________________↑
-- processing signal TTD 20 µs in addition
-- processing range monitoring 20 µs in addition
-- Code 603 words
-- Parameter (per call) 11 words
-- Historical value (per call) 8 words + 4 words header

12--16
e Siemens AG
Page 597 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
7 Abbreviations
AEB Analog input range (parameter)
AP--S7 Automation processor based on the SIMATIC S7 system
AUX Auxiliary plant system
DB Data block
DELT Delta, significant change of input signal (parameter)
DX Extended data block
I/O Input/Output
EAS Default analog signal (parameter)
EASW Value of the default analog signal (parameter)
EBU Lower range limit exceeded
EBO Upper range limit exceeded
EU Input range monitoring (parameter)
EUZE Time delay in input range monitoring (parameter)
FAKT Destandardization factor (parameter)
FB Function block
FLOATINP Floating--point input
GL Smoothing of the input signal
INST Entity number
KSSNA Communication interface auxiliaries
MTTD Form for TTD (parameter)

12--17
e Siemens AG
Page 598 of 719

FB150 FLOATINP
S5 see SIMATIC S5
S7 see SIMATIC S7
SF Signal shaper

12--18
e Siemens AG
Page 599 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 600 of 719

I/O Function Block
FB151 NA.MO (Motor/Solenoid Valve Control)
NA.MO
Page 601 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

12--2
e Siemens AG
Page 602 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--5
1.1 FB151 MOTKOP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--5

2.1 Motor Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--7
2.2 Solenoid Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--7

3.1.1 Commands from the Serial Operating and Monitoring System (OM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--9
3.1.2 Commands from Next Higher Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--9
3.1.3 Command from the Undervoltage Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--9
3.3 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--11
3.4 Check--back Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--12
3.5.1 ACTUAL Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--13
3.5.2 DESIRED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--13
3.5.3 Serial Control Possible ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--13
3.7 Internal Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--15
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--17
5 Parameterizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--18
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--23
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--24

12--3
e Siemens AG
Page 603 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP

12--4
e Siemens AG
Page 604 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
1 Application
1.1 FB151 MOTKOP Functions
The function block FB151 MOTKOP (coupling of a drive control for motor/solenoid valve) is used for an auxi-
liary coupling (besides for coupling of an AG--F or an APT) to a motor/solenoid valve control. It represents
the correct link (remote control) between the drive control in the auxiliary (SIMATIC S5 or S7) and the auto-
mation processor (AP) of AS 620. One function block call with the corresponding parameter set is required
per motor or solenoid valve.
E S 680 O M 65 0 D S 6 70
plant bus plant bus
AS 620--S7 AS 620--S5
AP--S7 AP
FB151 FB151
check--back commands check--back

commands
messages messages
Drive control Drive control

auxiliary plant auxiliary plant
system system
Fig. 1: Drive control coupling with the FB 151

12--5
e Siemens AG
Page 605 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
The FB151 has the following functions at disposal:
- Priority allocation of the command types:
-- Protection
-- Manual
-- Automatic
- Command output to the auxiliary
- AS 620 correct representation of the check--back message from the auxiliary
- TTD generation following signal change and disturbances
The commands output by FB151 to the drive control of the auxiliary are like automatic commands.
. Note
The present software description of the FB151 function block MOTKOP supposes in
some sections that the function block is employed for controlling a motor or a sole-
noid valve via a coupled auxiliary (SIMATIC S5 or S7). Since the FB151 function
block MOTKOP can be used in auxiliaries but also for linked AG--F or APT systems,
the information is correspondingly valid, that is the term AG--F or APT system must
replace the term auxiliary. In these cases control and monitoring of the motor or so-
lenoid valve occur via the outputs and inputs of the AG--F or APT system.
The drive control for the motor/solenoid valve actuator is carried out in the auxiliary (AUX). That is why the
following functions can only be implemented in the auxiliary:
- Fast terminating the command output when check--back message arrives
- Undervoltage monitoring (AC 230 V)
- Fast protection termination

12--6
e Siemens AG
Page 606 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
2 Mode of Operation
The following figure represents the software functions or function blocks effected by the FB151 function block
MOTKOP.
Control word Status word TTD
FB 151
Signalling
Command generation
and indicating
Command
priority allocation
Status acquisition
Command output
Check---back message
conditioning
Command section Monitoring
Control command to Check---back messages

AUX / AG---F / APT from AUX / AG---F /
APT
Fig. 2: Software functions of the I/O function block FB151 MOTKOP
2.1 Motor Drive

Continuous command:
A motor drive of the auxiliary is switched on and off with control commands. The control command remains
until an opposite command is issued.
Pulse command (for switchgear with latching):
A motor drive of the auxiliary is switched on and off with drive commands. The arriving correspondant check--
back message cancels the control command of the FB151.
2.2 Solenoid Valve

Continuous command:
A solenoid valve of the auxiliary is opened and closed with control commands. The control command re-
mains until an opposite command is issued.
Pulse command (for switchgear with latching):
A solenoid valve of the auxiliary is opened and closed with drive commands. The arriving correspondant
check--back message cancels the control command of the FB151.

12--7
e Siemens AG
Page 607 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
The following image shows the functions of the FB151 function block MOTKOP for the auxiliary coupling.
OM
AP--SSW
Automatic/Protection
FB151
MOTKOP
Single--channel
or redundant
AP--AUX--coupling
AUX (auxiliary), AG--F, APT
Fig. 3: Structure of the drive control via auxiliaries
There are three types of commands:
- Manual commands
Depending on the command priorities the different enable criteria such as process enable or manual enable
are required to make a command effective.
All commands come with the command word.

12--8
e Siemens AG
Page 608 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
3.1.1 Commands from the Serial Operating and Monitoring System (OM)
Manual ON
Manual OFF
A command from OM is only output to the auxiliary when the corresponding process enable PFEIN/PFAUS is
present, when the serial commands are enabled (SSB =0) and in the absence of commands of higher priori-
ty.
3.1.2 Commands from Next Higher Level
Automatic ON
Automatic OFF
Protection ON
Protection OFF
The commands of the next higher level automatic ”Automatic ON” and ”Automatic OFF” are output to the au-
xiliary when the corresponding process enable ENON/ENOFF is present, and in the absence of commands
of higher priority.
The protection commands ”Protection ON” and ”Protection OFF” need no process enable.
. Note
A protection command ON/OFF present in the auxiliary can be applied to the input
”Protection ON” or ”Protection OFF” via OM in the control word of the FB151 for
visualization reasons. In this case coupling is implemented via the SIM function
block FB72 BINEIN (binary signal input). Since the command issued by the FB151
to the auxiliary is similar to an automatic command, a reciprocal blocking is ex-
cluded.
As well automatic commands and process enables from the auxiliary can be
coupled with the FB72 BINEIN
3.1.3 Command from the Undervoltage Monitoring
In case of undervoltage the termination is carried out in the auxiliary. The ULS input in the control word is not
evaluated from the FB151. No command is output to the auxiliary.
. Note
An undervoltage present in the auxiliary can be applied to the input ”UGS” via OM in
the control word of the FB151 for visualization reasons. In this case coupling is im-
plemented via the SIM function block FB72 BINEIN (binary signal input).

12--9
e Siemens AG
Page 609 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
The following figure lists the command types corresponding to their priorities, the highest priority being at the
first place.
Protection ON
Manual commands Manual OFF
Manual ON
Automatic commands Automatic OFF
Automatic ON
Fig. 4: Priorities of the command types

12--10
e Siemens AG
Page 610 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
3.3 Command Output
The protection, automatic and manual control commands present in the control word of the I/O function block
MOTKOP are converted into on/off commands in accordance to the logical motor control block and transmit-
ted to the auxiliary. The acknowledgement bit is set or reset according to the acknowledgement logic. Ad-
dressing in the transmit mailbox is carried out with PAAD/PAAW and the channel number KANR. These para-
meters are obtained from the ES 680. Maximum two channels are provided in the transmit mailbox for this.
Each channel addresses an 8--bit field. The unused bits 3...7 or 11...15 in the transmit mailbox are unchan-
ged.

(I/O function block MOTKOP, control word)
KANR: 2 1
15 0 15 0
PAAD 2 2 2 2
PAAW Control
word
2 1 0 15 0
PAA bit
0 : QUIT Acknowledgement
1 : COON/OP Command in ON direction
2 : COOFF/CL Command in OFF direction
3:
: not
relevant
: (free)
7:
Fig. 5: Interfaces for motor/solenoid valve control output, FB151 MOTKOP
The command output transmits the control command to the auxiliary until a new command is issued from the
serial operating and monitoring system or from the higher level (continuous command) or until the check--
back message arrives from the auxiliary (pulse command).

12--11
e Siemens AG
Page 611 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
3.4 Check--back Messages
The addressing of the check--back messages received by the auxiliary is carried out via PAED/PAEW and
the same channel number KANR as for the motor/solenoid valve control output. The identified check--back
messages and status signals of a motor/solenoid valve control (8--bit block) are completed by the I/O func-
tion block MOTKOP with AP internal setpoints and status signals and converted into the 16--bit representa-
tion of the AS 620. In this status signals that are not at disposal in the auxiliary must have default values (e.g.
”Valid” or ”Enable”).

(I/O function block MOTKOP, status word)
KANR: 2 1
15 0 15 0
PAED 2 2 2 2
PAEW Status
word
0 15 0
7
PAE bit Meaning Default value
0 CBON/OP Check--back message ON --
1 CBOFF/CL Check--back message OFF --
2 LAUF *) Run in ON direction 0
3 LZU *) Run in OFF direction 0
4 AZB Feeder ready 1
5 NOSD No status discrepancy 1
*) irrelevant 6 NOFF No feeder fault 1
not implemented
7 KLB No run time/blocking 1
Fig. 6: Interfaces for motor/solenoid valve control input, FB151 MOTKOP
The following check--back messages
- ACTUAL status ON,
- ACTUAL status OFF,
- Feeder ready,
- No status discrepancy,
- No feeder fault and
- No run time blocking
are taken from the auxiliary check--back messages. A plausibility check does not occur.

12--12
e Siemens AG
Page 612 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
ACTUAL status
DESIRED status / Running direction
Serial control possible ...
Last status reached by ...
3.5.1 ACTUAL Status
ACTUAL status ON (IZE)
ACTUAL status OFF (IZA)
The corresponding check--back signals take on the ACTUAL drive status transmitted by the auxiliary.
The ACTUAL value is available for the TELEPERM XP user through the FB151 status word.
3.5.2 DESIRED Status
The information ”DESIRED (setpoint) status” is directly derived from the control commands transmitted from
FB151 to the auxiliary. If these are continuous commands the DESIRED status is also present when the limit
position is reached.
DESIRED status running direction ON (DS/ON)
DESIRED status running direction OFF (DS/OFF)
The DESIRED status is available through the status word.
3.5.3 Serial Control Possible ...
The FB151 signals to the serial control system the commands issued from the drive that are possible with
the locking in the control word. To do that it sets the corresponding bits in the status word.
Serial control possible ON
Serial control possible OFF
Serial control possible Acknowledgement
The information ”Last status reached by ...” specifies the cause (protection, automatic or manual) of the out-
put of the current valid control command (setpoint status). The information is available through the status
word. The FB151 cannot verify if the check--back message of the auxiliary is actually carried out as conse-
quence of an output control command.

12--13
e Siemens AG
Page 613 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
Cause of status change: Last status achieved by:
Manual ON, OFF MANUAL

Automatic ON, OFF AUTOMATIC
Protection ON, OFF PROTECTION
Block restart / System restart not defined
These functions run completely in the auxiliary:
- Undervoltage monitoring (AC 230 V)
- Protection execution
- Limit position monitoring
- Run time monitoring

12--14
e Siemens AG
Page 614 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
3.7 Internal Communication

Data exchange with the block occurs through the control word and the status word.
Status word
Bit 0 ACTUAL status ON IZE

1 ACTUAL status OFF IZA
2 DESIRED status ON direction DS/ON
3 DESIRED status OFF direction DS/OFF
7 Undervoltage time runs (always = 0) USZ
9 Serial control possible ON SBE
10 Serial control possible OFF SBA
11 Serial control possible acknowledgement SCA
12 Feeder ready AZB
13 No status discrepancy NOSD
Control word
Bit 3 Collective acknowledgement SQ

4 Disable serial input SSB
8 Automatic ON BAE
9 Automatic OFF BAA
10 -- --
11 Untervoltage limit signal ULS
12 Protection ON SE
13 Protection OFF SA
14 Process enable ON PFE
15 Process enable OFF PFA
Fig. 7: Data process image for motor , solenoid valve and switchgear coupling via auxiliary with screen control
in all automation levels. The time stamp has a resolution of 1 ms.

12--15
e Siemens AG
Page 615 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
- Signal TTD
Parameters can be set to select status word signals which are required in the process control level for mes-
sage output and logging. These can be process events (e.g. check--back message ON/OFF, feeder ready, ...)
or other status changes.
The time stamp characterizes the acquisition time by the FB151. It must be taken into account that the run
time through the communication system and the approximate delay in the auxiliary allow only a precision of
the actual entry of the process event of 10 seconds.
- Fault TTD
Fault TTDs are signalled to the instrumentation and control with fault numbers, function area numbers and
entity numbers. They signal fault statuses detected by the monitoring equipment auf the auxiliary.
Signal TTD
ACTUAL status ON IZEIN

ACTUAL status OFF IZAUS
DESIRED status ON direction DSON
DESIRED status OFF direction DSOFF
Feeder ready AZB
No status discrepancy NOSD
Fault TTD

Run time exceeded when leaving the end position LZV
Protection execution in ON direction MSE
Protection execution in OFF direction MSA
Fig. 8: Time--tagged data for motor , solenoid valve and switchgear coupling via auxiliary with screen control

12--16
e Siemens AG
Page 616 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
4 Configuring
The following figure shows the control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB151 NA.MO
(similar to the symbol representation in the ES 680 configuring system).
NA.MO Symbol: motor/solenoid valve coupling via auxiliary
Fig. 9: Control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB151 MOTKOP

12--17
e Siemens AG
Page 617 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
5 Parameterizing
Fig. 10: Parameterization form FB151 MOTKOP

12--18
e Siemens AG
Page 618 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
- Channel assignment *) (BEL)
- Priority of the command direction *) (PBR)
- Command output variants (BAV)
- Max. undervoltage time *) (TUM)
- Staggered time for re--activation *) (TWS)
- Check--back contact Travel limit ON *) (RWE)
- Check--back contact Travel limit OFF *) (RWA)
- Time for leaving of limit position *) (TVE)
- Effect of check--back fault (WE) on command execution *) (WRB)
- Effect of status discrepancy *) (WEF)
- Total run time of drive *) (TGL)
- Form for DMZ (MTTD)
for consistency.
- Channel assignment *)
Name: BEL
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0
- Priority of the command direction *)
Name: PBR
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0

12--19
e Siemens AG
Page 619 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
- Command output variants

Name: BAV
Function: determines the command output mode
Meaning: bit 0 = 0 continuous command
bit 0 = 1 pulse command
Basic setting 0
- Max. undervoltage time *)

Name: TUM
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0
- Staggered time for re--activation *)

Name: TWS
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0
- Check--back contact Travel limit ON *)

Name: RWE
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0
- Check--back contact Travel limit OFF *)

Name: RWA
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0
- Effect of check--back fault (WE) on command execution *)

Name: WRB
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0
- Effect of status discrepancy *)

12--20
e Siemens AG
Page 620 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
Name: WEF
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0
- Total run time of drive *)
Name: TGL
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0
- Time for leaving of limit position *)
Name: TVE
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0
Name: FUNR
Function: Describes the function area allocated to the motor control
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

12--21
e Siemens AG
Page 621 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
Name: MTTD
Function: Defines if signal TTD is generated
Meaning:
0 = no TTD generated
1 = generate TTD
Bit 0 = ACTUAL status ON
Bit 1 = ACTUAL status OFF
Bit 2 = DESIRED status ON
Bit 3 = DESIRED status OFF
Bit 4 = last status reached by PROTECTION command
Bit 5 = last status reached by AUTOMATIC command
Bit 6 = last status reached by MANUAL command
Bit 7 = --
Bit 8 = undervoltage limit signal
Bit 9 = feeder ready
Bit 10 = no status discrepancy
Bit 11 = no feeder fault
Bit 12 = no run time/blocking
Bit 13 = --
Bit 14 = --
Bit 15 = --
Basic setting all bits = 0

12--22
e Siemens AG
Page 622 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB151

Block name: MOTKOP
Version: ________________↑
-- Code 529 words
-- Historical values (per call) 0 word + 0 word header

12--23
e Siemens AG
Page 623 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
7 Abbreviations
AON Automatic ON
AOFF Automatic OFF
AG Programmable logic controller (SIMATIC)
AG--F Programmable logic controller, fail--safe
AUX Auxiliary
AZB Feeder ready
BAA Automatic OFF
BAAUS Automatic command OFF
BAE Automatic ON
BAEIN Automatic command ON
BAV Command output variant (parameter)
BEL Channel assignment (parameter)
BINEIN FB72 binary signal input
CB Check--back message
CBOFF/CL Check--back message OFF
CBON/OP Check--back message ON
COON/OP Command in direction ON
COOFF/CL Command in direction OFF
DB Data block
DSCL Setpoint status OFF
DSOFF Setpoint (desired) status OFF
DSOP Setpoint (desired) status ON
I/O Input/Output
ES 680 Configuring system for (Engineering System)
ESG Individual control element
FB Function block

12--24
e Siemens AG
Page 624 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP

INST Entity number
IZA ACTUAL status OFF
IZAUS ACTUAL status OFF
IZE ACTUAL status ON
IZEIN ACTUAL status ON
LAN Local Area Network,
LAUF Running direction ON
LZU Running direction OFF
LZV Run time exceeded when leaving the end position
MTTD Form for TTD (parameter)
MOTKOP Motor coupling
MSA Protection execution in OFF direction
MSE Protection execution in ON direction
OM 650 Operating and monitoring system
PAAW Word number in PAA
PBR Priority of command direction (parameter)
PFA Process enable OFF
PFAUF Process enable ON
PFAUS Process enable OFF
PFE Process enable ON
PFEIN Process enable ON
PFZU Process enable OFF
QUIT Acknowledgement serial control
RWA Check--back contact Travel limit OFF
RWE Check--back contact Travel limit ON
SA Protection OFF
SAUF Protection command ON
SAUS Protection command OFF
SB Serial command
SBA Serial control possible OFF

12--25
e Siemens AG
Page 625 of 719

FB151 MOTKOP
SBAUS Serial control possible OFF

SBE Serial control possible ON
SBEIN Serial control possible ON
SD Standard display (OM)
SE Protection ON
SEIN Protection command ON
SER_S5 Transmit/receive routine for SIMATIC S5 coupling
SF Signal shaper
SFB Standard function block
SIMADYN--D SIEMENS automation system for fast closed--loop controls
SMS Disable message protection execution
SSB Disable serial control
SZ/AUF Setpoint status OFF
SZE Setpoint status ON
SZ/EIN Setpoint status ON
PCL Protection command OFF
TGL Total run time of the drive (parameter)
TUM Max. undervoltage time (parameter)
TVE Time for leaving of limit position (parameter)
TWS Staggered time for re--activation (parameter)
USG Undervoltage limit signal
WEF Effect of status discrepancy (parameter)
WRB Effect of check--back fault WE on command execution (parameter)

12--26
e Siemens AG
Page 626 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 627 of 719

I/O Function Block
FB152 NA.SA (Actuator Control)
NA.SA
Page 628 of 719

FB152 STAKOP

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

13--2
e Siemens AG
Page 629 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--5
1.1 FB152 STAKOP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--5

2.1 Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--7

3.1.1 Commands from the Serial Operating and Monitoring System (OM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--10
3.3 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--11
3.5.1 ACTUAL Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--13
3.5.2 DESIRED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--13
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--18
5 Parameterizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--19
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--27
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--28

13--3
e Siemens AG
Page 630 of 719

FB152 STAKOP

13--4
e Siemens AG
Page 631 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
1 Application
1.1 FB152 STAKOP Functions
With control commands an actuator can move a final control element in any position. The I/O function block
FB152 STAKOP (coupling of a drive control for actuator) is used for an auxiliary coupling (besides for cou-
pling of an AG--F or an APT) to control actuators. It represents the correct link (remote control) between the
drive control in the auxiliary (SIMATIC S5 or S7) and the automation processor (AP) of AS 620. One function
block call with the corresponding parameter set is required per actuator.
E S 680 O M 65 0 D S 6 70
plant bus plant bus
AS 620--S7 AS 620--S5
AP--S7 AP
FB152 FB151

commands
messages messages

system system
The FB152 provides the following functions:
-- Protection
-- Manual
-- Automatic
- AS 620 correct representation of the check--back messages from the auxiliary
The commands output by FB152 to the drive control of the auxiliary are similar to automatic commands.

13--5
e Siemens AG
Page 632 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
. Note
The present software description of the FB152 function block STAKOP supposes in
some sections that the function block is employed for controlling an actuator via a
coupled auxiliary (SIMATIC S5 or S7). Since the FB152 function block STAKOP can
be used in auxiliaries but also for linked AG--F or APT systems, the information is
correspondingly valid, that is the term AG--F or APT system must replace the term
auxiliary. In these cases control and monitoring of the actuator occur via the outputs
and inputs of the AG--F or APT system.
The drive control for the actuator is carried out in the auxiliary (AUX). That is why the following functions can
only be implemented in the auxiliary:
- Fast terminating the command output with travel--dependent check--back message
- Fast terminating the command output with torque--dependent check--back message
- Torque monitoring (sluggish final control element)
- All types of run time monitoring
- Plausibility check of run direction

13--6
e Siemens AG
Page 633 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
2 Mode of Operation
FB 152
Signalling
Command generation
and indicating
Command
priority allocation
Status acquisition
Command output
conditioning

AUX / AG---F / APT from AUX / AG---F / APT
Fig. 2: Software functions of the I/O function block FB152 STAKOP
2.1 Actuator
An actuator of the auxiliary can run out and in with the auxiliary commands OPEN, CLOSED and STOP. The
origin of the control commands may be:
- Protection commands from the next higher level
- Automatic commands from automation processor (AP)
- Manual commands from screen (OM)
The command formation links these commands according to defined priorities to the setpoint status and
transmits it with the corresponding enables as command to the auxiliary. Setpoint statuses are stored. In ca-
se of a continuous command the command remains until a new command is issued (OPEN, CLOSED,
STOP).The command output is terminated when the check--back message (limit position) arrives.

13--7
e Siemens AG
Page 634 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
The stepwise manual opening and closing is carried out with the following control pulses:
- Control pulse in OPEN direction
- Control pulse in CLOSED direction
Control pulses are directly connected and are not stored.

The status acquisition recognizes if the last output control command was initiated by manual, automatic or
protection command and signals this to the next higher level through the status word.

13--8
e Siemens AG
Page 635 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
The following figure shows the functions of the I/O function block FB152 STAKOP for the auxiliary coupling.
OM
AP--SSW
FB152
STAKOP
Single--channel
or redundant
AP--AUX--coupling
Fig. 3: Structure of the actuator control via auxiliaries
- Manual commands
Depending on the command priorities the different enable criteria such as process enable are required to
make a command effective.
All commands arrive with the command word.

13--9
e Siemens AG
Page 636 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
3.1.1 Commands from the Serial Operating and Monitoring System (OM)
Manual OPEN
Manual CLOSED
Manual STOP
CIMP OP (control pulse in OPEN direction)
CIMP CL (control pulse in CLOSED direction)
A command from OM is only output to the auxiliary when the serial commands are enabled (SSB =0) and in
the absence of commands of higher priority. In addition the commands ”Manual OPEN”, ”Manual CLOSED”,
”CIMP OP” and ”CIMP CL” need the corresponding process enable ENOP/ENCL. The commands ”Manual
STOP” and the serial input ”QUIT” need no process enable.
The control pulse serves for an accurate actuator positioning. Its length cannot be modified. The FB152 also
does not limit it with a STOP command but it is directly transmitted by the OM. The pulse duration and so the
resolution of the positioning depends on the auxiliary.
. Note
The OM operator control may be disabled in setting the bit ”Disable serial operator
control” in the control word.
Automatic OPEN
Automatic CLOSED
Automatic STOP
Protection OPEN
Protection CLOSED
The commands of the next higher automatic ”Automatic OPEN” and ”Automatic CLOSED” are output to the
auxiliary when the corresponding process enable ENOP/ENCL is present, and in the absence of commands
of higher priority. The protection commands ”Protection OPEN” and ”Protection CLOSED” as well as ”Auto-
matic STOP” need no process enable.
. Note
A protection command OPEN/CLOSED present in the auxiliary can be applied to
the input ”Protection OPEN” or ”Protection CLOSED” via OM in the control word of
the FB152 for visualization reasons. In this case coupling is implemented via the
SIM function block FB72 BINEIN (binary signal input). Since the command issued
by the FB152 to the auxiliary is similar to an automatic command, a reciprocal
blocking is excluded.
coupled with the FB72 BINEIN.

13--10
e Siemens AG
Page 637 of 719

FB152 STAKOP

The following figure lists the command types corresponding to their priority, the highest priority being at the
first place.

Protection OPEN

Manual OPEN
Manual STOP

Automatic OPEN
Automatic STOP
3.3 Command Output

STAKOP are converted into on/open or off/closed commands in accordance to the logical motor control block
and transmitted to the auxiliary. The acknowledgement bit is set or reset according to the acknowledgement
logic. OPEN/CLOSED control pulses can also be added. Addressing in the transmit mailbox is carried out via
PAAD/PAAW and the channel number KANR. These parameters are stipulated through ES 680. Maximum
two channels are provided in the transmit mailbox for this. Each channel addresses an 8--bit field. The un-
used bits 6 + 7 or 14 + 15 remain unchanged.

(I/O function block STAKOP, control word)
KANR: 2 1
PAAD 15 0 15 0
2 2 2 2
PAAW
Control
word
5 0 15
PAA bit
1 : COON/OP Command in ON/OPEN direction
2 : COOFF/CL Command in OFF/CLOSED direction
3 : STOP Stop actuator
4 : CIMP OP Control pulse OPEN
5: CIMP CL Control pulse CLOSED
6: not
7: relevant (free)
Fig. 5: Interfaces for actuator output, FB152 STAKOP
The command output transmits the control command to the auxiliary until a new command is output from the
back message arrives from the auxiliary (pulse command). The termination as well as an eventually required
command direction reversing can be carried out in the auxiliary.

13--11
e Siemens AG
Page 638 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
Control pulses are transmitted 1 by 1.
the same channel number KANR as for the actuator control output. The identified check--back messages
and status signals of an actuator control (8--bit block) are completed by the AP internal setpoint values and
status signals and converted into the 16--bit representation of the AS 620. Status signals that are not at dis-
posal in the auxiliary must have default values (e.g. ”Valid” or ”Enable”).
Further important information (e.g. torque termination) may be transmitted via separate binary values and
evaluated from user program.

(I/O function block STAKOP, status word)
KANR: 2 1
15 0 15 0
PAED 2 2 2 2
PAEW Status
word
0 15 0
7
0 CBON/OP Check--back message ON/OPEN --
1 CBOFF/CL Check--back message OFF/CLOSED --
2 DEAUF Torque switch in OPEN direction 0
3 DEZU Torque switch in CLOSED direction 0
6 NOFF No feeder fault 1
7 KLB No run time blocking 1
Fig. 6: Interfaces for actuator input, FB152 STAKOP

13--12
e Siemens AG
Page 639 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
- ACTUAL position OPEN,
- ACTUAL position CLOSED,
- Torque switch in OPEN direction,
- Torque switch in CLOSED direction,
- Feeder ready,

ACTUAL status
3.5.1 ACTUAL Status
ACTUAL status OPEN (IZE)
ACTUAL status CLOSED (IZA)
The information ”SETPOINT (SETPOINT) status” is directly derived from the control commands transmitted
from FB152 to the auxiliary. If these are continuous commands the DESIRED status is also present when the
limit position is reached.
DESIRED status / running direction OPEN (SZE)
DESIRED status / running direction CLOSED (SZA)
The SETPOINT status is available through the status word.

13--13
e Siemens AG
Page 640 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
The FB152 signals to the serial control system the commands issued from the actuator that are possible with
Serial control possible STOP
Serial control possible OPEN
Serial control possible CLOSED
word. It cannot be verified by the FB152 if the check--back message of the auxiliary is carried out as conse-
quence of an actually output control word.
Manual OPEN, CLOSED, STOP MANUAL

Automatic OPEN, CLOSED, STOP AUTOMATIC
- Torque monitoring

13--14
e Siemens AG
Page 641 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
Status word
Bit 0 ACTUAL status OPEN IZE

1 ACTUAL status CLOSED IZA
2 DESIRED status/running direction OPEN SZE
3 DESIRED status/running direction CLOSED SZA
7 -- --
8 Serial control possible STOP SBS
9 Serial control possible OPEN SBE
10 Serial control possible CLOSED SBA
12 Feeder ready AZB
Control word

4 Disable serial operation SSB
8 Automatic OPEN BAE
9 Automatic CLOSED BAA
10 Automatic STOP BAS
11 -- --
12 Protection OPEN SE
13 Protection CLOSED SA
14 Process enable OPEN PFE
15 Process enable CLOSED PFA
Fig. 7: Data process image for actuator via auxiliary with screen control

13--15
e Siemens AG
Page 642 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
- Signal TTD
Parameters can be set to select control word signals which are required in the process control level for mes-
sage output and logging. These can be process events (e.g. check--back message OPEN/CLOSED, feeder
ready, ...) or other status changes.
- Fault TTD
Fault TTD ranges are signalled to the instrumentation and control with fault, function area and entity num-
bers. They signal fault statuses detected by the monitoring equipment auf the auxiliary.

13--16
e Siemens AG
Page 643 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
Signal TTD
ACTUAL status OPEN IZEI

ACTUAL status CLOSED IZA
DESIRED status/running direction OPEN SZE
DESIRED status/running direction CLOSED SZA
Feeder ready AZB
Fault DMZ

Total run time exceeded LZG
Protection execution in OPEN direction MSE
Protection execution in CLOSED direction MSA
Torque switch in OPEN direction disturbed DEAS
Torque switch in CLOSED direction disturbed DEZS
Fig. 8: Time--tagged data for actuator via auxiliary with screen control

13--17
e Siemens AG
Page 644 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
4 Configuring
The following figure shows the control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB152 STAKOP (si-
milar to the symbol representation in the ES 680 configuring system).
NA.SA Symbol: actuator coupling via auxiliary

pic_id 7051 without desk tile *)
pic_id 7052 with desk tile **)
only for use in AP
Fig. 9: Control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB152 STAKOP
*) pic_id 7051 is only implemented up to and including release 4
**) pic_id 7052 is only implemented beginning from release 5

13--18
e Siemens AG
Page 645 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
5 Parameterizing
Fig. 10: Parameterization form FB152 NA.SA without desk tile. This form is only implemented up to and including release 4

13--19
e Siemens AG
Page 646 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
Fig. 11: Parameterization form FB152 NA.SA_T with desk tile. This form is only implemented beginning from release 5

13--20
e Siemens AG
Page 647 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
- Channel assignment *) (BEL)
- Command generation variant (BBV)
- Desk tile STOP pushbutton *) (TST)
- Control pulse duration *) SID)
- Check--back contacts torque *) (RDE)
- Acquisition of the ACTUAL status *) (EIZ)
- Time for leaving the limit position *) (TVE)
- Torque time overriding in OPEN direction *) (TDA)
- Torque time overriding in CLOSED direction *) (TDZ)
- Form for TTD (MTTD)
for consistency.
- Channel assignment *)
Name: BEL
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0

13--21
e Siemens AG
Page 648 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
- Priority of the command direction *)
Name: PBR
- Command output variants
Name: BAV
Range of values: Persistent command
Pulse command
Basic setting Persistent command
- Desk tile STOP pushbutton *)
Name: TST
Function: --
Range of values: --
Meaning: irrelevant
Basic setting 0
- Control pulse duration *)
Name: SID
100 = 10 s
- Check--back contact Travel limit ON *)
Name: RWE

13--22
e Siemens AG
Page 649 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
- Check--back contact Travel limit OFF *)
Name: RWA
- Check--back contact torque *)

Name: RDE
NO--Contact
NC--Contact
- Acquisition of the ACTUAL status *)

Name: EIZAUF
EIZZU
- Effect of check--back fault (WE) on command execution *)

Name: WRBHAEA
WRBHAAZ
WRBSEA
WRBSAZ
not blocked
Meaning: WRBHAEA= check--back fault MANUAL/AUTOMATIC ON
WRBHAAZ= check--back fault MANUAL/AUTOMATIC OFF
WRBSEA= check--back fault PROTECTION ON
WRBSAZ= check--back fault PROTECTION OFF

13--23
e Siemens AG
Page 650 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
- Effect of status discrepancy *)

Name: WEFSPERR
WEFNSEA
WEFNSAZ
discrepancy
blocked
- Time for leaving the limit position *)

Name: TVE
600 = 60 s
- Total run time of drive *)

Name: TGL
60,000 = 6,000 s
- Torque time overriding in OPEN direction *)

Name: TDA
in OPEN direction
Meaning: 0 = 0s
10,000 = 100 s

13--24
e Siemens AG
Page 651 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
- Torque time overriding in CLOSED direction *)

Name: TDZ
in CLOSED direction
Meaning: 0 = 0s
10,000 = 100 s
Name: FUNR
Function: Describes the function area allocated to the actuator
Basic setting: 0
- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0

13--25
e Siemens AG
Page 652 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
Name: MTTD
Meaning:
1 = generate TTD
Bit 0 = ACTUAL status OPEN
Bit 1 = ACTUAL status CLOSED
Bit 2 = DESIRED status OPEN
Bit 3 = DESIRED status CLOSED
Bit 4 = Last status reached by PROTECTION command
Bit 5 = Last status reached by AUTOMATIC command
Bit 6 = Last status reached by MANUAL command
Bit 7 = --
Bit 8 = --
Bit 9 = Feeder ready
Bit 10 = No status discrepancy
Bit 11 = No feeder fault
Bit 12 = No run time/blocking
Bit 13 = --
Bit 14 = --
Bit 15 = --

13--26
e Siemens AG
Page 653 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB152

Block name: STAKOP
Version: _________________↑
-- Code 571 words
-- Historical values (per call) 0 word + 0 word header

13--27
e Siemens AG
Page 654 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
7 Abbreviations
AUX Auxiliary
AZB Feeder ready
BAA Automatic OFF/CLOSED
BAAUF Automatic command OPEN
BAE Automatic ON/OPEN
BAZU Automatic command CLOSED
BBV Command generation variant (parameter)
COON/CL Command in direction ON or OPEN
COOFF/CL Command in direction OFF or CLOSED
CBOFF/CL Check--back message OFF/CLOSED
CBON/OP Check--back message ON/OPEN
DB Data block
DEAS Torque switch in OPEN direction disturbed
DEZS Torque switch in CLOSED direction disturbed
EIZ Acquisition of the ACTUAL status (parameter)
FB Function block

13--28
e Siemens AG
Page 655 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
INST Entity number

I/O Input/Output
IZA ACTUAL status OFF/CLOSED
IZE ACTUAL status ON/OPEN
IZZU ACTUAL status CLOSED
LAUF Running direction OPEN
LZG Total run time exceeded
LZU Running direction CLOSED
MTTD Form for DMZ (parameter)
MSA Protection execution in OPEN direction
MSE Protection execution in CLOSED direction
PFA Process enable OFF/CLOSED
PFAUF Process enable OPEN
PFE Process enable ON/OPEN
PFZU Process enable CLOSED
RDE Check--back contact torque (parameter)
SA Protection OFF/CLOSED
SAUF Protection command OPEN
SB Serial command

13--29
e Siemens AG
Page 656 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
SBA Serial control possible OFF/CLOSED

SBE Serial control possible ON/OPEN
SBQ Serial control possible acknowledgement
SBS Serial control possible STOP
SE Protection ON/OPEN
SF Signal shaper
SID Control pulse duration (parameter)
SIM Signal module (standard interface module)
STAKOP Actuator coupling
SZA Setpoint status OFF/CLOSED
SZAUF Setpoint status OPEN
SZAUS Setpoint status OFF
SZE Setpoint status ON/OPEN
SZEIN Setpoint status ON
SZU Protection command CLOSED
SZZU Setpoint status CLOSED
TDA Torque time overriding in OPEN direction (parameter)
TDZ Torque time overriding in CLOSED direction (parameter)
TST Desk tile STOP pushbutton (parameter)
TVE Time for leaving the limit position (parameter)
UGS Undervoltage limit signal
WRB Effect of check--back fault (WE) on command execution (parameter)

13--30
e Siemens AG
Page 657 of 719

FB152 STAKOP
ZEA (Last) status achieved by automatic command

ZEH (Last) status achieved by manual command
ZES (Last) status achieved by protection command

13--31
e Siemens AG
Page 658 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 659 of 719

I/O Function Block
FB167 STAKOP_T (Actuator Control)
NA.SA_T
Page 660 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

13--2
e Siemens AG
Page 661 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--5
1.1 FB167 STAKOP_T Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--5

2.1 Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--7

3.1.1 Commands from the Serial Operating and Monitoring System (OM 650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--9
3.1.2 Commands from an Outside Manufactured OM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--9
3.3 Command Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--11
3.5.1 ACTUAL Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--13
3.5.2 DESIRED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--13
3.8 Messages and Signals to the Outside Manufactured OM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--17
4 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--19
5 Parameterizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--20
6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--24
7 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--25

13--3
e Siemens AG
Page 662 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T

13--4
e Siemens AG
Page 663 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
1 Application
1.1 FB167 STAKOP_T Functions
With control commands an actuator can move a final control element in any position. The I/O function block
FB167 STAKOP_T (coupling of a drive control for actuator) is used for an auxiliary coupling (besides for cou-
pling of an AG--F or an APT) to control actuators. It represents the correct link (remote control) between the
drive control in the auxiliary (SIMATIC S5 or S7) and the AS 620 automation processor (AP) of AS 620. One
function block call with the corresponding parameter set is required per actuator.
E S 680 O M 65 0 D S 6 70
plant bus plant bus
AS 620--S7 AS 620--S5
AP--S7 AP
FB167 FB167

commands
messages messages

system system
The FB167 provides the following functions:
-- Protection
-- Manual
-- Automatic
- AS 620 correct representation of the check--back messages from the auxiliary
The commands output by FB167 to the drive control of the auxiliary are similar to automatic commands.

13--5
e Siemens AG
Page 664 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
. Note
The present software description of the FB167 function block STAKOP_T supposes
in some sections that the function block is employed for controlling an actuator via a
coupled auxiliary (SIMATIC S5 or S7). Since the FB167 function block STAKOP_T
can be used in auxiliaries but also for linked AG--F or APT systems, the information
is correspondingly valid, that is the term AG--F or APT system must replace the
term auxiliary. In these cases control and monitoring of the actuator occur via the
outputs and inputs of the AG--F or APT system.
The drive control for the actuator is carried out in the auxiliary (AUX). That is why the following functions can
only be implemented in the auxiliary:
- Fast terminating the command output with travel--dependent check--back message
- Fast terminating the command output with torque--dependent check--back message
- Torque monitoring (sluggish final control element)
- All types of run time monitoring
- Plausibility check of run direction

13--6
e Siemens AG
Page 665 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
2 Mode of Operation
FB167
Signalling
Command generation
and indicating
Command
priority allocation
Status acquisition
Command output
conditioning

AUX / AG---F / APT from AUX / AG---F / APT
Fig. 2: Software functions of the I/O function block FB167 STAKOP_T
2.1 Actuator
An actuator of the auxiliary can run out and in with the auxiliary commands OPEN, CLOSED and STOP. The
origin of the control commands may be:
- Protection commands from the next higher level
- Automatic commands from automation processor (AP)
- Manual commands from screen (OM)
The command formation links these commands according to defined priorities to the setpoint status and
transmits it with the corresponding enables as command to the auxiliary. Setpoint statuses are stored. In ca-
se of a continuous command the command remains until a new command is issued (OPEN, CLOSED,
STOP).The command output is terminated when the check--back message (limit position) arrives.

13--7
e Siemens AG
Page 666 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
The stepwise manual opening and closing is carried out with the following control pulses:
- Control pulse in OPEN direction
- Control pulse in CLOSED direction
Control pulses are directly connected and are not stored.

The status acquisition recognizes if the last output control command was initiated by manual, automatic or
protection command and signals this to the next higher level through the status word.
The following figure shows the functions of the I/O function block FB167 STAKOP_T for the auxiliary
coupling.
OM
AP--SSW
FB167
STAKOP_T
Single--channel
or
redundant
AP--AUX--coupling
Fig. 3: Structure of the actuator control via auxiliaries

13--8
e Siemens AG
Page 667 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
- Manual commands
Depending on the command priorities the different enable criteria such as process enable are required to
make a command effective.
All commands arrive with the command word.
3.1.1 Commands from the Serial Operating and Monitoring System (OM 650)
Manual OPEN
Manual CLOSED
Manual STOP
CIMP OP (control pulse in OPEN direction)
CIMP CL (control pulse in CLOSED direction)
A command from OM is only output to the auxiliary when the serial commands are enabled (SSB =0) and in
the absence of commands of higher priority. In addition the commands ”Manual OPEN”, ”Manual CLOSED”,
”CIMP OP” and ”CIMP CL” need the corresponding process enable ENOP/ENCL. The commands ”Manual
STOP” and the serial input ”QUIT” need no process enable.
The control pulse serves for an accurate actuator positioning. Its length can be modified via the parameter
SID. The FB167 also does not limit it with a STOP command but it is directly transmitted by the OM. The pul-
se duration and so the resolution of the positioning depends on the auxiliary.
. Note
The OM operator control may be disabled in setting the bit ”Disable serial operator
control” in the control word.
3.1.2 Commands from an Outside Manufactured OM
Manual OPEN
Manual CLOSED
Manual STOP
In addition to the corresponding process enable (EN/OP; EN/CL) in the control word, the function block

13--9
e Siemens AG
Page 668 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
. Note
In order to give commands from the outside manufactured OM the manual enable
must be activated simultaneously with the respective command.
. Note
Control from the outside manufactured OM can be blocked by setting the bit ”Dis-
able desk tile input” (Disable outside manufactured OM) in the control word.
The outside manufactured OM input is blocked when the drive status word is simu-
lated.
Automatic OPEN
Automatic CLOSED
Automatic STOP
Protection OPEN
Protection CLOSED
The commands of the next higher automatic ”Automatic OPEN” and ”Automatic CLOSED” are output to the
auxiliary when the corresponding process enable ENOP/ENCL is present, and in the absence of commands
of higher priority. The protection commands ”Protection OPEN” and ”Protection CLOSED” as well as ”Auto-
matic STOP” need no process enable.
. Note
A protection command OPEN/CLOSED present in the auxiliary can be applied to
the input ”Protection OPEN” or ”Protection CLOSED” via OM in the control word of
the FB167 for visualization reasons. In this case coupling is implemented via the
SIM function block FB72 BINEIN (binary signal input). Since the command issued
by the FB167 to the auxiliary is similar to an automatic command, a reciprocal
blocking is excluded.
coupled with the FB72 BINEIN.
The following figure lists the command types corresponding to their priority, the highest priority being at the
first place.

13--10
e Siemens AG
Page 669 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T

Protection OPEN

Manual OPEN
Manual STOP

Automatic OPEN
Automatic STOP
3.3 Command Output
STAKOP_t are converted into on/open or off/closed commands in accordance to the logical motor control
block and transmitted to the auxiliary. The acknowledgement bit is set or reset according to the acknowledge-
ment logic. OPEN/CLOSED control pulses can also be added. Addressing in the transmit mailbox is carried
out via PAAD/PAAW and the channel number KANR. These parameters are stipulated through ES 680. Ma-
ximum two channels are provided in the transmit mailbox for this. Each channel addresses an 8--bit field. The
unused bits 6 + 7 or 14 + 15 remain unchanged.

(I/O function block STAKOP_T, control word)
KANR: 2 1
PAAD 15 0 15 0
2 2 2 2
PAAW
Control
word
5 0 15
PAA bit
1 : COON/OP Command in ON/OPEN direction
2 : COOFF/CL Command in OFF/CLOSED direction
3 : STOP Stop actuator
4 : CIMP OP Control pulse OPEN
5: CIMP CL Control pulse CLOSED
6: not
7: relevant (free)
Fig. 5: Interfaces for actuator output, FB167 STAKOP_T
The command output transmits the control command to the auxiliary until a new command is output from the
back message arrives from the auxiliary (pulse command). The termination as well as an eventually required
command direction reversing can be carried out in the auxiliary.
Control pulses are transmitted 1 by 1.

13--11
e Siemens AG
Page 670 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
the same channel number KANR as for the actuator control output. The identified check--back messages
and status signals of an actuator control (8--bit block) are completed by the AP internal setpoint values and
status signals and converted into the 16--bit representation of the AS 620. Status signals that are not at dis-
posal in the auxiliary must have default values (e.g. ”Valid” or ”Enable”).
Further important information (e.g. torque termination) may be transmitted via separate binary values and
evaluated from user program.

(I/O function block STAKOP_T, status word)
KANR: 2 1
15 0 15 0
PAED 2 2 2 2
PAEW Status
word
0 15 0
7
0 CBON/OP Check--back message ON/OPEN --
1 CBOFF/CL Check--back message OFF/CLOSED --
2 DEAUF Torque switch in OPEN direction 0
3 DEZU Torque switch in CLOSED direction 0
6 NOFF No feeder fault 1
7 KLB No run time blocking 1
Fig. 6: Interfaces for actuator input, FB167 STAKOP_T
- ACTUAL position OPEN,
- ACTUAL position CLOSED,
- Torque switch in OPEN direction,
- Torque switch in CLOSED direction,
- Feeder ready,

13--12
e Siemens AG
Page 671 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
ACTUAL status
3.5.1 ACTUAL Status
ACTUAL status OPEN (IZE)
ACTUAL status CLOSED (IZA)
The information ”SETPOINT (SETPOINT) status” is directly derived from the control commands transmitted
from FB167 to the auxiliary. If these are continuous commands the DESIRED status is also present when the
limit position is reached.
DESIRED status / running direction OPEN (SZE)
DESIRED status / running direction CLOSED (SZA)
The SETPOINT status is available through the status word.
The FB167 signals to the serial control system the commands issued from the actuator that are possible with
Serial control possible STOP
Serial control possible OPEN
Serial control possible CLOSED

13--13
e Siemens AG
Page 672 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
word. It cannot be verified by the FB167 if the check--back message of the auxiliary is carried out as conse-
quence of an actually output control word.
Manual OPEN, CLOSED, STOP MANUAL

Automatic OPEN, CLOSED, STOP AUTOMATIC
- Torque monitoring

13--14
e Siemens AG
Page 673 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
Status word
Bit 0 ACTUAL status OPEN IZE

1 ACTUAL status CLOSED IZA
2 DESIRED status/running direction OPEN SZE
3 DESIRED status/running direction CLOSED SZA
7 -- --
8 Serial control possible STOP SBS
9 Serial control possible OPEN SBE
10 Serial control possible CLOSED SBA
12 Feeder ready AZB
Control word

4 Disable serial operation SSB
8 Automatic OPEN BAE
9 Automatic CLOSED BAA
10 Automatic STOP BAS
11 -- --
12 Protection OPEN SE
13 Protection CLOSED SA
14 Process enable OPEN PFE
15 Process enable CLOSED PFA
Fig. 7: Data process image for actuator via auxiliary with screen control

13--15
e Siemens AG
Page 674 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
- Signal TTD
Parameters can be set to select control word signals which are required in the process control level for mes-
sage output and logging. These can be process events (e.g. check--back message OPEN/CLOSED, feeder
ready, ...) or other status changes.
- Fault TTD
Fault TTD ranges are signalled to the instrumentation and control with fault, function area and entity num-
bers. They signal fault statuses detected by the monitoring equipment auf the auxiliary.
Signal TTD
ACTUAL status OPEN IZEI

ACTUAL status CLOSED IZA
DESIRED status/running direction OPEN SZE
DESIRED status/running direction CLOSED SZA
Feeder ready AZB
Fault DMZ

Total run time exceeded LZG
Protection execution in OPEN direction MSE
Protection execution in CLOSED direction MSA
Torque switch in OPEN direction disturbed DEAS
Torque switch in CLOSED direction disturbed DEZS
Fig. 8: Time--tagged data for actuator via auxiliary with screen control

13--16
e Siemens AG
Page 675 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
3.8 Messages and Signals to the Outside Manufactured OM
Data exchange with the function block is carried out using data blocks (TADB and LADB). The signal lamps
”ON”, ”OFF” and ”Fault” on the open-loop control tile indicate:

If ”Disable desk tile input” (command from outside manufactured OM) is present, the signal lamp ”Fault”
lights up permanently. There are no other fault displays in addition. The actual and setpoint statuses are still
signalled as described above. The three signal lamps can be set to steady ON via the input LP at the
ESG--modul.
The statuses are displayed by the signal lamps OPEN, CLOSED and FAULT. To each of these “signal lamps”
belongs a status encoding for steady ON, blinking, flickering, and OFF. The structure of this interface is des-
cribed in the document “Connection to Auxiliaries” (C79000--T8076--C622) in the AS 620 System Manual
(6DP6200).

13--17
e Siemens AG
Page 676 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
ACTUAL position
SETPOINT direction
OPEN CLOSED
State in position
CLOSED/OPEN/BETWEEN

Status discrepancy
Run time/blocking

(plausibility)
SIM module faulty

Lamp test (o.k.)

13--18
e Siemens AG
Page 677 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
4 Configuring
The following figure shows the control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB167 STAKOP_T
(similar to the symbol representation in the ES 680 configuring system).
NA.SA_T
Symbol: actuator coupling via auxiliary

only for use in AP
Fig. 10: Control system flowchart symbol of the I/O function block FB167 STAKOP_T

13--19
e Siemens AG
Page 678 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
5 Parameterizing
Fig. 11: Parameterization form FB167 STAKOP_T with desk tile

13--20
e Siemens AG
Page 679 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0
- Command generation variant (BBV)
- Desk tile STOP pushbutton *) (TST)
- Control pulse duration SID)
- Check--back contacts torque *) (RDE)
- Acquisition of the ACTUAL status *) (EIZ)
- Time for leaving the limit position *) (TVE)
- Torque time overriding in OPEN direction *) (TDA)
- Torque time overriding in CLOSED direction *) (TDZ)
- Form for TTD (MTTD)

13--21
e Siemens AG
Page 680 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
*) Parameter validity
for consistency.
Name: BEL
the FUP pictograph “STAKOP_T“ or
“STAKOP_T with desk tile“ as selected by the user
Meaning: 3 = actuator without desk tile input (outside manufactured OM)
4 = actuator with desk tile input (outside manufactured OM)
Basic setting: 3
Name: BAV
Meaning: bit 0 = 0 continuous command
bit 0 = 1 pulse command
Basic setting: 0
Name: SID
Function: Defines the duration of the control pulse as a multiple of the function block cycle
100 = 100 x function block cycle
Basic setting: 0

13--22
e Siemens AG
Page 681 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
Name: MTTD
Meaning:
1 = generate TTD
Bit 0 = ACTUAL status OPEN
Bit 1 = ACTUAL status CLOSED
Bit 2 = DESIRED status OPEN
Bit 3 = DESIRED status CLOSED
Bit 4 = Last status reached by PROTECTION command
Bit 5 = Last status reached by AUTOMATIC command
Bit 6 = Last status reached by MANUAL command
Bit 7 = --
Bit 8 = --
Bit 9 = Feeder ready
Bit 10 = No status discrepancy
Bit 11 = No feeder fault
Bit 12 = No run time/blocking
Bit 13 = --
Bit 14 = --
Bit 15 = --

13--23
e Siemens AG
Page 682 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
6 Technical Data
Block number: FB167

Block name: STAKOP_T
Version: _________________↑
-- Code 571 words
Other conditions: The block can only be used in the group control level (AP)
within the system environment for SIM/protection.

13--24
e Siemens AG
Page 683 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
7 Abbreviations
AUX Auxiliary
AZB Feeder ready
BAA Automatic OFF/CLOSED
BAAUF Automatic command OPEN
BAE Automatic ON/OPEN
BAZU Automatic command CLOSED
BBV Command generation variant (parameter)
COON/CL Command in direction ON or OPEN
COOFF/CL Command in direction OFF or CLOSED
CBOFF/CL Check--back message OFF/CLOSED
CBON/OP Check--back message ON/OPEN
DB Data block
DEAS Torque switch in OPEN direction disturbed
DEZS Torque switch in CLOSED direction disturbed
EIZ Acquisition of the ACTUAL status (parameter)
FB Function block

13--25
e Siemens AG
Page 684 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
INST Entity number

I/O Input/Output
IZA ACTUAL status OFF/CLOSED
IZE ACTUAL status ON/OPEN
IZZU ACTUAL status CLOSED
LAUF Running direction OPEN
LZG Total run time exceeded
LZU Running direction CLOSED
MTTD Form for DMZ (parameter)
MSA Protection execution in OPEN direction
MSE Protection execution in CLOSED direction
PFA Process enable OFF/CLOSED
PFAUF Process enable OPEN
PFE Process enable ON/OPEN
PFZU Process enable CLOSED
RDE Check--back contact torque (parameter)
SA Protection OFF/CLOSED
SAUF Protection command OPEN
SB Serial command

13--26
e Siemens AG
Page 685 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
SBA Serial control possible OFF/CLOSED

SBE Serial control possible ON/OPEN
SBQ Serial control possible acknowledgement
SBS Serial control possible STOP
SE Protection ON/OPEN
SF Signal shaper
SID Control pulse duration (parameter)
SIM Signal module (standard interface module)
STAKOP Actuator coupling
SZA Setpoint status OFF/CLOSED
SZAUF Setpoint status OPEN
SZAUS Setpoint status OFF
SZE Setpoint status ON/OPEN
SZEIN Setpoint status ON
SZU Protection command CLOSED
SZZU Setpoint status CLOSED
TDA Torque time overriding in OPEN direction (parameter)
TDZ Torque time overriding in CLOSED direction (parameter)
TST Desk tile STOP pushbutton (parameter)
TVE Time for leaving the limit position (parameter)
UGS Undervoltage limit signal
WRB Effect of check--back fault (WE) on command execution (parameter)

13--27
e Siemens AG
Page 686 of 719

FB167 STAKOP_T
ZEA (Last) status achieved by automatic command

ZEH (Last) status achieved by manual command
ZES (Last) status achieved by protection command

13--28
e Siemens AG
Page 687 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 688 of 719

SIM and Auxiliary Plant Control System Function Blocks
FC404 BINEIN2 (Binary Signal Input)
BININP2
IDW
CPU SS BININP2
TTD
Cf
BE
KG
SIG
Page 689 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

14--2
e Siemens AG
Page 690 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--4

2.2 Input Signal Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--4
2.3 Signal TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--6
2.4 Startup/Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--6
2.5 Fault Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--6
2.6 Interfaces for Binary Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--7
2.7 External Time Tag Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--7
3 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--9
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--13
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--13

14--3
e Siemens AG
Page 691 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
1 Application
The FC404 function block in conjunction with the signal modules SIM 323 and SIM 321 is used to read in
binary process signals.
The FC404 function block is also used to read in binary signals which originate from coupled systems (such
as auxiliaries using SIMATIC S7).
The main difference between the BINEIN2 function block and the BINEIN (FB72) function block is that the
BINEIN2 function block also features:
-- Optional configuration of a channel validity bit
-- Evaluation of the connection faults in a communication link to auxiliary plant control systems.
The FC404 function block can only be used in the AS620--S7.
During normal operation (i.e. with proper connection) the binary signal read in is cyclically entered into the
status word, taking into account the configured input signal extension, if applicable.
2.2 Input Signal Extension
The input signals are extended if the ESV is <> 0, i.e. the signal remains unchanged for at least the param-
eterized time following a change in signal (0--1).
The input signal extension only applies to positive edges. The input signal extension can be selected in the
range from 0 to 10 s. All changes in signal within the signal extension time are ignored.
Exception: The input signal extension is deactivated during a connection fault.

14--4
e Siemens AG
Page 692 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
ESV t_ESV
1) t
2)
PAE
t_ESV_Start t
t_ESV--Start
BESIG
3) t
ESV Switch-on delay counter

t_ESV Delay time
PAE Binary signal from PAED
ZUDB Status data block
1) Change in edge 0 --> 1

The input signal is extended by the time defined by ESV (0--10000 ms).
The generated time is derived from the scanning time.
2) The extension time when in progress is retriggered by a new 0--1 edge.
3) Input signal without input signal extension.
The signal is stored here in the status DB (BESIG).
Fig. 1: Input signal extension

14--5
e Siemens AG
Page 693 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
2.3 Signal TTD
Time--tagged data result as a signal TTD following a change in status of the input signal if the parameter TTD
is set.
The following signal TTDs are generated:
D Change in input signal
D Change in channel validity status
The FC404 does not generate fault TTDs.
2.4 Startup/Restart
The FC404 carries out a cold restart when requested by the AP; internal statuses are initialized in the pro-
cess. No further block processing is carried out during a cold restart.
The block is processed in every subsequent cycle.
2.5 Fault Response

The parameters KGDB/KGDW/KGBT can be used to allocate a channel validity bit to the binary signal to be
acquired. If the parameter DMZ (TTD) is set, a signal TTD notifies the OM of any change in the channel
validity bit. The OM evaluates the channel valid signal TTD and adds the respective attribute to the original
binary signal.
If no channel validity bit has been parameterized, the channel will always be considered valid unless a
connection fault is present.
If the function block is used in order to acquire a binary signal via a communication link connected to
auxiliary plant control systems, the function block is notified of the communication status via the parameters
FEDB/FEDW/FEBT. No signal TTDs are issued when the communication is faulty. The communication fault
is signaled as an I&C fault elsewhere which causes the OM to identify the allocated signal as invalid. The
channel validity bit is always reset in the status word during a connection fault.

14--6
e Siemens AG
Page 694 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
2.6 Interfaces for Binary Signals

(SIM function block FC404 BINEIN2)
ZUDB
PAEDB 15 0 ZUDW 15 7 0
PAEDW 2 2 2 2 2
Status word
X KG X
Example: PAEBT = 5
KGDB
KGDW
Y
Y
KG
&
Example: KGBT = 13
Connection fault (FEDB/ FEDW/ FEBT)
Fig. 2: Interfaces for binary signal input, FC404 BINEIN2
Taking into account the signal extension, the function block enters the bit addressed via
PAEDB/PAEDW/PAEBT into the status word bit 0.
The channel validity bit, if available, will be recalculated in each cycle and entered into bit 7 of the status
word. If no channel validity bit has been configured (parameter KGDB is 0) bit 7 will always be set in the
status word.
2.7 External Time Tag Mode
Area of application
This mode of operation is used for connections to auxiliary plant systems which provide the binary signal
changes with an additional time tag. The binary signal and time tag are transferred together in the telegram
interface. A signal TTD is then generated in the AP from this pair of values. The external time tag mode can
be set via the parameter AE_ZEIT (see Chapter 4 “Parameterization”).
Time tag structure
The time tag from the auxiliary plant control system must be transferred as a double word and contain the
number of milliseconds passed since 0:00 hrs. Bit 31 (highest bit of the double word) contains the binary si-
gnal.
The double word is addressed by the parameters PAEDB/ PAEDW.
The unassigned bits 28 through 30 in the double word can be used to transfer the channel validity bit.

14--7
e Siemens AG
Page 695 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
Binary signal (input signal)
31 27 Time tag High 16

2 2 2
External time tag
in ms since 0:00 hrs
15 Time tag Low 0
2 2

14--8
e Siemens AG
Page 696 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
3 Configuring
Fig. 4 shows the symbol of the function block FC404 BINEIN2 in the ES 680 configuring system.
Symbol of the binary input for auxiliaries

Pic_id: 7106
function block FC404
can only be used in the AP
IDW
CPU SS BININP2
TTD
Cf
BE
KG
SIG
Fig. 4: ES symbol of the function block FC404 BINEIN2

14--9
e Siemens AG
Page 697 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
4 Parameterization
Fig. 5: Parameterization form BINEIN2
Fig. 6: I&C form parameters of the NA.BINEIN2 symbol

14--10
e Siemens AG
Page 698 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
Parameters of the parameterization form:
-- Input signal extension

Name: ESV
Function: Defines whether the input signal is extended, and by how long
10000 = 10 s; steps 0.25 s
Basic setting: 0
-- Time--tagged data
Name: TTD
Function: Defines whether data with time are to be generated
Range of values: 0--1
1 = generate TTD for every change in signal
Basic setting: 0
-- Alarm, warning, tolerance

Name: AWT
A = alarm
W = warning
T = tolerance
Basic setting: S
Parameters of the I&C form:
-- Function area number

Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0

14--11
e Siemens AG
Page 699 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
-- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0
-- Input value address

Name: PAEDW / PAEBT
Function: Word address of the analog value to be read in within the data function block
PAEDB. The function block number PAEDB is assigned by the ES.
Range of value PAEDW: 0...254 for mode with external time tag.
0...255 for mode without external time tag.
Range of value PAEBT: 0..15 not applicable to mode with external time tag.
-- Channel validity address

Name: KGDW/ KGBT
Function: Address of the channel validity bit to be read in within the data function block
KGDB. The function block number KGDB is assigned by the ES. KGDW
addresses a word of the function block and KGBT identifies the bit number within
the word
Range of values: KGDW: 0...255 not applicable to mode with external time tag.
KGBT: 0...15 not applicable to mode with external time tag.
The parameters KGDW/ KGBT are only evaluated when the parameter NA--KG is YES.
If both NA--KG and NA--ZEIT are YES, the values KGDW/ KGBT will be ignored. The ES parameterizes the
GPEIN2 function block so that the channel validity bit will always be read in to bit 30 of the time tag double
value.
-- Addressing of the auxiliary plant control system

Name: CPU of the auxiliary plant control system
Function: AS number of the auxiliary plant control system from the topology diagram
-- RECV--BUFFER--NR
Name: RECV--BUFFER--NR
Function: Number for the receive buffer
The parameter ”RECV--BUFFER--NR” has the default value “1” and denotes a connection between the AP
and an auxiliary plant control system. Depending on the amount of data to be transfered, multible
transmission links to the auxiliary plant control system may be required. In this case enter the value “2”, “3”
etc. This number specifies that the data are transfered on an additional transmission link.

14--12
e Siemens AG
Page 700 of 719

FC404 BINEIN2
5 Technical Data
Block number: FC404

Block name: BINEIN2
6 Abbreviations
BESIG Binary value in the ZUDB
KANR Channel number
OM Operating and Monitoring System
SIM Signal module

14--13
e Siemens AG
Page 701 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 702 of 719

SIM and Auxiliary Plant Control System Function Block
FC405 FLOATINP2 (Analog Signal Input Floating--Point)
FLINP2
IDW
CPU SS FLINP2
TTD
Cf
AI
KG
SIG
Page 703 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2

Warning
Caution
. Note
Warning

14--2
e Siemens AG
Page 704 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
Contents
Page
1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--5
1.1 Functions of the FC405 FLOATINP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--5

2.1 Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--6
2.2.1 Signal TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--7
2.2.2 Fault TTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--8
2.3 Fault Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--8
2.3.1 Connection Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--8
2.3.2 Monitoring for Channel Validity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--8
2.3.3 Range Limit Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--8
2.4 Operation Mode External Time Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--9
2.5 Linking Auxiliary Plant Control Systems Based on SIMATIC S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--10
3 Configuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--10
4 Parameterizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--11
5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--15
6 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--16

14--3
e Siemens AG
Page 705 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2

14--4
e Siemens AG
Page 706 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
1 Application
1.1 Functions of the FC405 FLOATINP2
The auxiliary plant control system function block FC405 FLOATINP2 (analog signal input for floating points)
is used as a communication link to auxiliary plant systems for reading in analog values in floating point
format.
The function block FC405 can only be used in the AS620--S7.
E S 680 O M 65 0 D S 6 70
plant bus
AS 620--S7
AP--S7
FC405
analog value
(floating point)
auxiliary
plant system
Fig. 1: Coupling of an auxiliary plant system with analog value transfer
The function block FC405 FLOATINP2 provides the following functions:
-- SPPA--T2000 conform representation of the analog value
-- TTD generation following signal changes, time tagging in auxiliary plant control systems is possible
-- Monitoring the analog value for range limits
-- Provision for a channel validity bit
-- Provision for a connection fault

14--5
e Siemens AG
Page 707 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
The following preprocessing functions are not carried out by the function block and may have to be imple-
mented in the auxiliary plant control system:
-- Output of a substitute analog value in event of fault
2.1 Standard Operation
The I/O function block FLOATINP2 selects the analog value parameterized from the data block received from
the auxiliary plant control system. The selection is parameterized by ES. The value is in floating--point format
and is placed unchanged by the I/O function block FLOATINP2 at the user program’s disposal for further
processing.

(Function block FC405 FLOATINP2)
ZUDB
PAEDB ZUDW
PAEDW
analog value in
analog value in
floating point format

floating point format
K Additional
G status word
15 0
2 2
KG: channel valid
KGDB
KGDW
X X
KG
KGBT &
Connection fault (FEDB/ FEDW/ FEBT)
Fig. 2: Interfaces for analog signal input in floating--point format, FC405 FLOATINP2

14--6
e Siemens AG
Page 708 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
Time--tagged data are used for the chronologically correct acquisition of process signals and I & C fault
alarms in alarm processing and display as well as for logging. They are produced on status change in all
automation levels. The various TTD types and TTDs specific to the function block are described below.
2.2.1 Signal TTD
Parameters can be set to select input signals if they are required as time--tagged data (TTDs) in the process
control level for alarm output and logging.
The analog signals are scanned for the occurrence of a parameterizable signal change within parameteriza-
ble time intervals. The time intervals are parameterized via the parameter ’scanning time’ (ABZE), the signal
change via the parameter ’Deltaband’ (DELT).
If an inquiry shows that the analog signal has reached or exceeded the deltaband parameterized, a signal
TTD with the current analog value is generated.
Analog signal changes that are within the deltaband are summed up on the inquiry side and used to gene-
rate signal TTD with the current analog value once the summed up value exceeds 16 times the delta value.
Signal TTD

Channel valid KG
Fig. 3: Signal TTD
Disable and enable processing of the signal TTD is implemented in the parameter form by setting the para-
meter TTD of the output AE/SIG.

14--7
e Siemens AG
Page 709 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
2.2.2 Fault TTD
In addition to the TTDs assigned to a signal, there are also fault TTDs which, using error numbers, describe
the status of the control system in detailed form for alarms and logs. The fault TTDs are generated as the
results of events (faults) recognized by monitoring the analog signal.
With enabled range monitoring, the FLOATINP2 function block signals violations of the range limits as fault
TTDs.
Fault TTD
Violation of lower range limit EBU

Violation of upper range limit EBO
Fig. 4: Fault TTD
Disable and enable range monitoring is implemented with the parameter EU (input range monitoring).
2.3 Fault Response
2.3.1 Connection Fault
If the function block is used in order to acquire an analog value via a communication link connected to
auxiliary plant control systems, the function block is notified of the communication status via the parameter
FEDB/FEDW/FEBT. No signal TTDs are issued when the connection is faulty. The connection fault is
signaled as an I&C fault elsewhere, which causes the OM to identifiy the allocated value as being invalid.
The channel validity bit is always reset in the status word during a connection fault.
2.3.2 Monitoring for Channel Validity
The parameters KGDB/KGDW/KGBT can be used to allocate a channel validity bit to the analog value to be
acquired. If the parameter TTD is set, a signal TTD notifies the OM of any change in the channel validity bit
The OM evaluates the channel valid signal TTD and adds the respective attribute to the orginal binary signal.
If no channel bit has been parameterized, the channel will always be considered valid unless a connection
fault is present.
Note: On the technical side of the program, the rest of the bits of the status data word remain unchanged
when setting and deleting the KG bit. It is thus possible to route other signals from the auxiliary plant control
system (such as limit values) which are linked via separate binary value inputs to the same data word within
the AS 620 and to evaluate them via OM standard displays.
2.3.3 Range Limit Monitoring
Signal monitoring for range limits can only be enabled and disabled for the upper and lower range limits
together (parameter: EU). Monitoring is effective immediately, i.e. no delay can be configured (refer to the
parameter EUZE in Chapter 4 Parameterizing). Violating the range of a signal has an effect on its validity
(KG bit = 0).

14--8
e Siemens AG
Page 710 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
2.4 Operation Mode External Time Tag
Area of application
This mode of operation is used for connections to auxiliary plant systems which provide the analog signal
changes with their own time tag. The analog signal and time tag are transferred together in the telegram in-
terface. An analog TTD is then generated in the AP from this pair of values. The external time tag mode can
be set via the parameter AE_ZEIT (see Chapter 4 “Parameterizing”).
Initiation of an analog TTD
The criterion for recognizing an analog event is generated in the auxiliary plant system. The TTD initiation
must be implemented in the auxiliary plant system by a suitable procedure. Please be careful to limit the oc-
currence of TTDs as seems appropriate (e.g. delta value, scanning time etc., see Chapter 2.2.1). The analog
value is sent via TTD each time the time tag of the auxiliary plant system changes the time or each time the
included channel--valid--bit changes! The FLOATINP2 in this mode of operation does not take into account
the configuring values ’delta value’ and ’scanning time’.
Time tag structure
The time tag from the auxiliary plant system must be transferred as a double word behind the floating point
value and contain the number of milliseconds passed since 0:00 hrs in the bits 0 through 27.
If a channel validity bit is used the ES specifies bit 30 of the double word to be the channel validity bit. (It is
addressed by the parameters KGDB/KGDW/KGBT)

(Output of function block FC405 FLOATINP2)
31 K 27 Time tag High 16 K

2 G 2 2 Status word
G
15 Time tag Low 0 15
2 2 0
V: Sign External time tag
KG: Valid channel in ms since 0:00 hrs
KG, EBU and EBO TTD

Normally each change of the analog value transferred is associated with a change in the time tag. As a con-
sequence, the recognition of an exceeded range is assigned the external time tag and the TTD “EBU/EBO”
and “KG” are provided with an external time tag.
Exception: If the analog value of the auxiliary plant system should change while the external time tag re-
mains the same, the AP internal time tag is used for the resulting TTD if an exceeded range has been detec-
ted.

14--9
e Siemens AG
Page 711 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
2.5 Linking Auxiliary Plant Control Systems Based on SIMATIC S5
The FLOATINP2 function block expects a numerical value in SIMATIC--S7 floating point format in its input
range (PAEDB/PADW). If the AP is connected to an auxiliary plant control system based on a SIMATIC--S5,
however, the auxiliary plant control system sends its analog values in S5 floating point format and expects
values to be in the same format. In this case, the necessary conversions of numerical formats are performed
transparent to the user.
3 Configuring
The following figure shows the symbol of the function block FC405 FLOATINP2 in the ES 680 configuring
system.
Pic_id: 7107
Function block: FC405
only for use in AP
IDW
CPU SS FLINP 2
TTD
Cf
AI
KG
SIG
Fig. 6: Symbol of the I/O function block FC405 FLOATINP2

14--10
e Siemens AG
Page 712 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
4 Parameterizing
Fig. 7: Parameterization form FLOATINP2
Fig. 8: Parameter I&C form symbol FLOATINP2

14--11
e Siemens AG
Page 713 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
Parameters of the parameterization form:
-- Time--tagged data
Name: TTD
Function: Defines whether signal TTDs are generated
1 = generate TTD
Bit 0 = AESIG / KG (signal and channel valid TTD)

Name: EU
Function: Defines the range monitoring functions (violation of upper and lower limits)
Meaning: 0 : not active for lower limit, not active for upper limit
4 : active for lower limit, active for upper limit
other values: as for 0
Basic setting: 0
- Sampling period
Name: ABZE
(step size 100 = 0.1 s, 0 : for each block processing)
- Delta
Name: DELT
Function: A signal TTD is generated with a change in the input signal ≥ DELTA
Value is set as physical variable of the nominal range.
Range of values: 0 to 10000 corresponding 0 to 100 % of the physical nominal range
Basic setting: 100, corresponding 1%

Name: LRV
Function: Physical lower range value
Range of values: Floating point format
Meaning: Parameter can be set, lower range limit
Basic setting: 0.0

Name: URV
Function: Physical upper range value
Range of values: Floating point format
Meaning: Parameter can be set, upper range limit
Basic setting: 0.0

14--12
e Siemens AG
Page 714 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
- Unit
Name: EINH
Range of values: Character string with up to 8 characters
Meaning: The character string is used for documentation purposes only in the OM and ES.
Parameters of the I&C form:
-- Function area number

Name: FUNR
Basic setting: 0
-- Entity number
Name: INST
Basic setting: 0
-- Input value address

Name: PAEDW
Function: Word address of the analog value to be read in within the data function block
PAEDB. The function block number PAEDB is assigned by the ES.
Range of values: 0...252 for mode with external time tag
0...254 for mode without external time tag
-- Channel validity address

Name: KGDW / KGBT
Function: Address of the channel validity bit to be read in within the data function block
KGDB. The function block number KGDB is assigned by the ES.
KGDW addresses a word of the function block and KGBT identifies the bit
number within the word.
Range of values: KGDW: 0...255 not applicable to mode with external time tag.
KGBT: 0...15 not applicable to mode with external time tag.
The parameters KGDW/KGBT are only evaluated when the parameter KG--NA is YES.
If both KG--NA and AE--ZEIT are YES, the values KGDW/KGBT will be ignored. ES parameterizes
the FLOATINP2 function block so that the channel validity bit will always be read into bit 30 of the
time tag double value.

14--13
e Siemens AG
Page 715 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
-- Addressing of the auxiliary plant control system

Name: CPU of the auxiliary plant control system
Function: AS number of the auxiliary plant control system from the topology diagram
-- RECV--BUFFER--NR
Name: RECV--BUFFER--NR
Function: Number for the receive buffer
The parameter ”RECV--BUFFER--NR” has the default value “1” and denotes a connection between
the AP and an auxiliary plant control system. Depending on the amount of data to be transfered,
multible transmission links to the auxiliary plant control system may be required. In this case enter
the value “2”, “3” etc. This number specifies that the data are transfered on an additional
transmission link.

14--14
e Siemens AG
Page 716 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
5 Technical Data
Block number: FC405

Block name: FLOATINP2
-- processing signal TTD 20 µs in addition
-- processing range monitoring 20 µs in addition
System environment: Protection/SIM and freely usable environment

14--15
e Siemens AG
Page 717 of 719

FC405 FLOATINP2
6 Abbreviations

DB Data block
DELT Delta, significant change in the input signal (parameter)
EBU Lower range limit exceeded
EBO Upper range limit exceeded
END Physical upper range value (parameter)
ES Engineering System
FB Function block
FLOATINP Floating point input
INST Entity number
I/O Input/Output
KG Channel validity bit
LRV Lower Range Value
NA Auxiliary plant control system
OM Operating and Monitoring System
PAEDB Data block number of PAE
PAEDW Word number in PAEDB
URV Upper range value

14--16
e Siemens AG
Page 718 of 719

Siemens AG
Power Generation
PG L
Page 719 of 719

05_ SPPA T2000 as 620, SIM and I-O Function Blocks

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

05_ SPPA T2000 as 620, SIM and I-O Function Blocks

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

05_ SPPA T2000 as 620, SIM and I-O Function Blocks

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IRAN POWER

2nd 3000 MW POWER PLANT

SPPA T2000 AS 620, SIM and I/O function blocks

IN-HOUSE REVISIONS DOCUMENT REVISIONS

June June June June June June

OWNER'S DOC. NO.:

SIM Function Blocks

Ordering data are contained in the catalog LT600.

SPPA is a registered trade mark of Siemens AG.

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

The EC declaration of conformity and the documentation relating to this are

Field of Application Requirement for

Industry EN 61000--6--4: 2001 EN 61000--6--2: 2001

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

Notes for The maximum number of APF racks is 3 per cabinet.

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany

Copyright Copyright E Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not

Prescribed use Please observe the following:

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

2 Mode of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6

5 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--18

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

2.1 Analog Signal Processing

2.1.1 Software Smoothing

2.1.2 Nominal Range and Overflow Range

Nominal range Overflow range

2.1.3 Modification of Input Signal

2.1.4 Generation of Mean Value

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

2.2 Data with Time

2.2.1 Signal TTDs

2.2.2 Fault TTDs

Fig. 1: List of TTDs (data with time)

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

2.3 Generation of Limit Signals

2.3.1 Triggering Direction OG (Upper Limit max.)

- Effects on the process image

- Effects on data with time

- Effects on further internal processing

2.3.2 Triggering Direction UG (Lower Limit min.)

- Effects on the process image

- Effects on data with time

- Effects on further internal processing

AS 620 SIM and I/O Function Blocks A8.1

2.4 Analog Signal Simulation

2.5 Input Signal Monitoring

2.5.1 Analog Input Range

- Effects on the process image

- Effects on data with time

- Effects on further internal processing

2.5.2 Analog Signal Monitoring following Modification

- Effects on the process image

- Effects on data with time

- Effects on further internal processing